Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value
for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a
customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
At all of our Kia dealerships you will be treated with warmth, hospi‐
tality and professionalism by people who care based on our
Family-
like Care promise.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip‐
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As
a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not appli‐
cable to your specific Kia vehicle.
Enjoy your vehicle and Kia’s Family-like Care experience!
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It
is supplemented by a Warranty and Maintenance book that provides important information on all warranties re‐
garding your vehicle. Kia urges you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help
assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the
equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular
vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the
right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obli‐
gation. If you have questions, Kia recommends to check with an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Kia assures you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2017 Kia MOTORS Corp.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, elec‐
tronic or mechanical, including photocopying, record‐
ing, or by any information storage and retrieval sys‐
tem or translation in whole or part is not permitted
without written authorization from Kia MOTORS Cor‐
poration.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
Table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Audio system
5
Driving your vehicle
6
What to do in an emergency
7
Maintenance
8
Specifications & Consumer information
9
Appendix
10
Alphabetical index
I
iii
iv
How to use this manual........................................................... 1-02
Fuel requirements.....................................................................1-03
Gasoline engine..................................................................... 1-03
Diesel engine..........................................................................1-05
Vehicle break-in process..........................................................1-06
Risk of burns when parking or stopping vehicle.................. 1-07
Introduction
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your ve‐
hicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist
you in many ways. We strongly recom‐
mend that you read the entire manual.
In order to minimize the chance of
death or injury, you must read the
WARNING and CAUTION sections in the
manual.
Illustrations complement the words in
this manual to best explain how to en‐
joy your vehicle. By reading your man‐
ual, you learn about features, impor‐
tant safety information, and driving
tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents. Use
the index when looking for a specific
area or subject; it has an alphabetical
listing of all information in your manual.
Sections: This manual has 9 sections
plus an index. Each section begins with
a brief list of contents so you can tell at
a glance if that section has the infor‐
mation you want.
You will find various WARNINGs, CAU‐
TIONs, and NOTICEs in this manual.
These WARNINGs were prepared to en‐
hance your personal safety. You should
carefully read and follow ALL proce‐
dures and recommendations provided
in these WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NO‐
TICEs.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provi‐
ded.
Introduction
1-02
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance,
we recommend you to use unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI
(Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of RON 91~94 / AKI 87~90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle. (Do not use
methanol blended fuels.)
Except Europe
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an Octane
Rating of RON (Research Octane Num‐
ber) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or
higher. (Do not use methanol blended
fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEA‐
DED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust
emissions and spark plug fouling.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use
of leaded fuel is detrimental to the
catalytic converter and will damage
the engine control system’s oxygen
sensor and affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Kia recom‐
mends to consult an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner for details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when re‐
fueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci‐
dent.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is de‐
signed to use leaded gasoline. When
you are going to use leaded gasoline,
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner and ask
whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle
is available or not.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or in‐
stead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use gas‐
oline or gasohol containing any metha‐
nol. Either of these fuels may cause
drivability problems and damage to the
fuel system, engine control system and
emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufac‐
turer’s warranty if they result from the
use of:
1-03
1
Introduction
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs driva‐
bility.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained
fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels, may cause vehicle and engine
damage or cause plugging, misfiring,
poor acceleration, engine stalling,
catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per‐
formance problem caused by the
use of these fuels may not be cov‐
ered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels contain‐
ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)
over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%
weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may re‐
duce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob‐
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight.)
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco‐
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and damage components
of the fuel system, engine control sys‐
tem and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use unleaded
gasoline which has an octane rating of
RON (Research Octane Number) 95 /
AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher (for
Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Re‐
search Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-
Knock Index) 87 or higher (except Eu‐
rope).
For customers who do not use good
quality gasolines including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting
or the engine does not run smoothly,
one bottle of additives added to the
fuel tank at every 15,000 km (For Eu‐
rope) / 10,000 km (Except Europe). Ad‐
ditives are available from a professional
workshop along with information on
how to use them. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner. Do not mix other additives.
Introduction
1-04
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg‐
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi‐
tives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a
limitation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter
fuel properly according to the following
temperature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type die‐
sel fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very
carefully : If the engine stops through
fuel failure, the circuits must be com‐
pletely purged to restart.
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water en‐
ter the tank. This would make it nec‐
essary to drain it out and to bleed
the lines to avoid jamming the injec‐
tion pump and damaging the engine.
CAUTION
n
Diesel Fuel (if equipped with
DPF)
It is recommended to use the regula‐
ted automotive diesel fuel for diesel
vehicle equipped with the DPF sys‐
tem.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be dam‐
aged and white smoke can be emit‐
ted.
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN
14214 or equivalent specifications. (EN
stands for "European Norm"). The use
of biofuels exceeding 7% made from
rapeseed methyl ester (RME), fatty
acid methyl ester (FAME), vegetable oil
methyl ester (VME) etc. or mixing die‐
sel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will
cause increased wear or damage to the
engine and fuel system. Repair or re‐
placement of worn or damaged compo‐
nents due to the use of non approved
fuels will not be covered by the manu‐
factures warranty.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether diesel
or B7 biodiesel or otherwise, that
fails to meet the latest petroleum
industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recom‐
mended or approved by the vehicle
manufacturer.
1-05
1
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for
the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may
add to the performance, economy and
life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
within 3,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is needed
to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen‐
cies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
Introduction
1-06
RISK OF BURNS WHEN PARKING OR STOPPING VEHICLE.
• Do not park or stop the vehicle near
flammable items such as leaves, pa‐
per, oil, and tire. Such items placed
near the exhaust system can become
a fire hazard.
• When an engine idles at a high speed
with the rear side of the vehicle
touching the wall, heat of the ex‐
haust gas can cause discoloration or
fire. Keep enough space between the
rear part of the vehicle and the wall.
• Be sure not to touch the exhaust/
catalytic systems while engine is run‐
ning or right after the engine is
turned off. There is a risk of burns
since the systems are extremely hot.
1-07
1
Introduction
Exterior overview......................................................................2-02
Interior overview....................................................................... 2-04
Instrument panel overview......................................................2-05
Engine compartment................................................................2-06
Your vehicle at a glance
2
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
OYB017001D
Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Hood...................................... ...................................... p. 4-28
2. Head lamp (Features of your vehicle).................... p. 4-82
Head lamp (Maintenance)...................................... p. 8-104
3. Front fog lamp (Features of your vehicle)............ p. 4-85
Front fog lamp (Maintenance).............................. p. 8-104
4. DRL lamp (Features of your vehicle)...................... p. 4-87
DRL lamp (Maintenance)........................................ p. 8-104
5. Wheel and tire............................................................ p. 8-67
6. Outside rearview mirror..................... ..................... p. 4-42
7. Sunroof........................................................................ p. 4-33
8. Front windshield wiper blades (Features of your ve‐
hicle)...................................... ...................................... p. 4-90
Front windshield wiper blades (Maintenance)...... p. 8-60
9. Windows...................................................................... p. 4-23
Your vehicle at a glance
2-02
OYB017002D
Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Door locks.................................................................... p. 4-16
2. Fuel filler lid................................................................ p. 4-30
3. Rear combination lamp (Maintenance)................ p. 8-104
4. High mounted stop lamp (Maintenance)...... ...... p. 8-104
5. Tailgate........................................................................ p. 4-21
6. Antenna................................... ................................... p. 5-02
7. Rearview camera........................... ........................... p. 4-79
8. Rear parking assist system.................. .................. p. 4-76
9. Rear window wiper blade (Features of your vehicle)
...................................................................................... p. 4-93
Rear window wiper blade (Maintenance).............. p. 8-62
2-03
2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
OYB017003
1. Inside door handle.......................... .......................... p. 4-17
2. Inner fuse panel............................ ............................ p. 8-77
3. Power window switches..................... ..................... p. 4-23
4. Power window lock button...................................... p. 4-26
5. Outside rearview mirror control switch................ p. 4-42
6. Outside rearview mirror folding switch........ ........ p. 4-44
7. Hood release lever.......................... .......................... p. 4-28
8. Fuel filler lid release lever.................... .................... p. 4-30
9. Steering wheel............................. ............................. p. 4-37
10. Steering wheel tilt control................... ................... p. 4-38
11. Headlight leveling device.......................................... p. 4-87
12. Instrument panel illumination control switch... ... p. 4-46
13. BCW ON/OFF button........................ ........................ p. 6-71
14. LDW ON/OFF button........................ ........................ p. 6-62
15. ESC OFF button.......................................................... p. 6-36
16. TPMS SET switch........................... ........................... p. 7-08
17. Brake pedal................................ ................................ p. 6-30
18. Accelerator pedal
Your vehicle at a glance
2-04
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
OYB017004
1. Instrument cluster.................................................... p. 4-45
2. Horn...................................... ...................................... p. 4-39
3. Driver’s front air bag........................ ........................ p. 3-46
4. Light control............................... ............................... p. 4-81
Turn signals................................ ................................ p. 4-84
5. Wiper/Washer............................................................ p. 4-90
6. Ignition switch............................................................ p. 6-06
ENGINE START/STOP button................. ................. p. 6-10
7. Hazard warning flasher switch............... ............... p. 7-02
8. Audio
9. Central door lock switch..................... ..................... p. 4-18
10. Climate control system............... ............... p. 4-99, 4-108
11. AUX-USB port............................................................ p. 5-03
12. Shift lever............................ ............................ p. 6-20, 6-24
13. Parking brake lever.................................................... p. 6-31
14. Passenger’s front air bag.................... .................... p. 3-46
15. Power outlet............................................................ p. 4-129
16. Glove box.................................................................. p. 4-122
17. Steering wheel audio remote control
18. Cigarette lighter...................................................... p. 4-126
19. Seat warmer............................................................ p. 4-128
20. Heated steering wheel switch................ ................ p. 4-39
21. Idle Stop and Go system OFF button.......... .......... p. 6-16
22. USB charger.............................................................. p. 4-130
2-05
2
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (1.2L)
■ Gasoline Engine (1.4L)
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir.......................................... p. 8-48
2. Engine oil filler cap.......................... .......................... p. 8-45
Changing the engine oil and filter............. ............. p. 8-46
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir.................. .................. p. 8-52
4. Air cleaner................................. ................................. p. 8-58
5. Fuse box...................................................................... p. 8-77
6. Negative battery terminal................... ................... p. 8-63
7. Positive battery terminal.................... .................... p. 8-63
8. Engine oil dipstick...................................................... p. 8-44
Changing the engine oil and filter............. ............. p. 8-46
9. Radiator cap............................... ............................... p. 8-48
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.......................... p. 8-55
11. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick.......................... p. 8-53
Your vehicle at a glance
2-06
OYB076081/OYB076003C
Gasoline Engine (1.0L)
Diesel Engine (1.4L/1.6L)
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir.......................................... p. 8-48
2. Engine oil filler cap.......................... .......................... p. 8-45
Changing the engine oil and filter............. ............. p. 8-46
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir.................. .................. p. 8-52
4. Air cleaner................................. ................................. p. 8-58
5. Fuse box...................................................................... p. 8-77
6. Negative battery terminal................... ................... p. 8-63
7. Positive battery terminal.................... .................... p. 8-63
8. Engine oil dipstick...................................................... p. 8-44
Changing the engine oil and filter............. ............. p. 8-46
9. Radiator cap............................... ............................... p. 8-48
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.......................... p. 8-55
2-07
2
Your vehicle at a glance
Seats............................................................................................3-02
Front seat adjustment.........................................................3-05
Headrest................................................................................. 3-06
Seatback pocket ...................................................................3-08
Rear seat adjustment.......................................................... 3-09
Seat belts....................................................................................3-13
Seat belt restraint system..................................................3-13
Pre-tensioner seat belt ...................................................... 3-20
Seat belt precautions........................................................... 3-23
Care of seat belts..................................................................3-25
Child Restraint System (CRS)..................................................3-26
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS)......................... 3-26
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)......................... 3-28
ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage
(ISOFIX anchorage system) for children............................3-29
Air bag - supplemental restraint system ............................3-38
How does the air bag system operate..............................3-39
Air bag warning light............................................................ 3-42
SRS components and functions..........................................3-43
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ............................. 3-46
Side air bag ............................................................................3-51
Curtain air bag ...................................................................... 3-53
SRS care..................................................................................3-60
Additional safety precautions.............................................3-60
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-
equipped vehicle.................................................................... 3-61
Air bag warning label ...........................................................3-62
Safety features of your vehicle
3
SEATS
The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Driver’s seat
1. Forward and backward
2. Seatback angle
3.
Seat cushion height
*
4. Headrest
Front passenger’s seat
5. Forward and backward
6. Seatback angle
7. Headrest
Rear seat
8.
Headrest
*
9.
Seatback folding
*
WARNING
n
Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera‐
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
*
if equipped
Safety features of your vehicle
3-02
WARNING
n
Uprighting seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants around
the seat. If the seatback is returned
without being held and controlled,
the back of the seat could spring
forward resulting in accidental injury
to a person struck by the seatback.
WARNING
n
Driver responsibility for pas‐
sengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seatback
reclined could lead to serious or fatal
injury in an accident. If a seat is re‐
clined during an accident, the occu‐
pant’s hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt, applying
great force to the unprotected abdo‐
men. Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result. The driver must advise
the passenger to keep the seatback
in an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that re‐
duces friction between the seat and
passenger. The passenger's hips
may slide under the lap portion of
the seat belt during an accident or a
sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal
injuries could result because the seat
belt can't operate normally.
WARNING
n
Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way in‐
terfering with proper locking of a
seatback could result in serious or
fatal injury in a sudden stop or col‐
lision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por‐
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary and
perhaps severe air bag injuries, al‐
ways sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while
maintaining comfortable control of
the vehicle. We recommend that
your chest be at least 250 mm
(10 inches) away from the steer‐
ing wheel.
WARNING
n
Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be secure‐
ly latched. If not, passengers and
objects could be thrown forward
resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
(Continued)
3-03
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Luggage and other cargo should be
laid flat in the cargo area. If ob‐
jects are large, heavy, or must be
piled, they must be secured. Under
no circumstances should cargo be
piled higher than the seatbacks.
Failure to follow these warnings
could result in serious injury or
death in the event of a sudden
stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and re‐
strained properly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
• To avoid the possibility of burns,
do not remove the carpet in the
cargo area. Emission control devi‐
ces beneath this floor generate
high temperatures.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever. Sudden
or unexpected movement of the
driver's seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
• Use extreme caution so that hands
or other objects are not caught in
the seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper‐
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
• If there are occupants in the rear
seats, be careful while adjusting
the front seat position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use extreme caution when picking
small objects trapped under the
seats or between the seat and the
center console. Your hands might
be cut or injured by the sharp
edges of the seat mechanism.
Feature of Seat Leather
• Leather is made from the outer skin
of an animal, which goes through a
special process to be available for
use. Since it is a natural substance,
each part differs in thickness or den‐
sity.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural re‐
sult of stretching and shrinking de‐
pending on the temperature and hu‐
midity.
• The seat is made of stretchable fab‐
ric to improve comfort.
• The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting area
is high which provides driving comfort
and stability.
• Wrinkles may appear naturally from
usage. It is not a fault of the product.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-04
CAUTION
• Wrinkles or abrasions which ap‐
pear naturally from usage are not
covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic accessories,
zippers or keys inside the back
pocket may damage the seat fab‐
ric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat. It
may change the nature of natural
leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the sur‐
face of the seat covering fabric.
Front seat adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and rear‐
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on
the seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to
the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place. (The
lever MUST return to its original
position for the seatback to lock.)
3-05
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat cushion height (if equipped,
for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cush‐
ion, push the lever that is located on
the outside of the seat cushion up‐
wards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lev‐
er up several times.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the center of gravity of
an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of
most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may occur
in the event of an accident. Headr‐
ests may provide protection
against neck injuries when proper‐
ly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi‐
tion of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-06
CAUTION
When there is no occupant in the
rear seats, adjust the height of the
headrest to the lowest position. The
rear seat headrest can reduce the
visibility of the rear area.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head‐
rest, push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support and lower
the headrest to the desired position (3).
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up
(4).
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
3-07
3
Safety features of your vehicle
To reinstall the headrest:
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro‐
priate height.
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling
and adjusting it properly.
Forward and backward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted forward
to 4 different positions by pulling the
headrest forward to the desired de‐
tent. To adjust the headrest to it’s fur‐
thest backwards position, pull it fully
forward to the farthest position and
release it. Adjust the headrest so that
it properly supports the head and neck.
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
headrest release button may appear
when seating on the seat or when
you push or pull the seat. Be careful
not to get your finger, etc. caught in
the gap.
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s seatback.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-08
WARNING
n
Seatback pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects in
the seatback pockets. In an accident
they could come loose from the
pocket and injure vehicle occupants.
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest (if equipped)
The rear seat is equipped with headr‐
ests for the occupant's safety and
comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to pro‐
tect the head and neck in the event of
a collision.
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally, the
center of gravity of most people's
head is similar with the height of
the top of their eyes. Also adjust
the headrest as close to your head
as possible. For this reason, the
use of a cushion that holds the
body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Severe in‐
jury to an occupant may occur in
the event of an accident. Headr‐
ests may provide protection
against severe neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
Adjusting the height up and down (if
equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head‐
rest, push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support and lower
the headrest to the desired position (3).
3-09
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal and installation (if equipped)
To remove the headrest, raise it as far
as it can go then press the release but‐
ton (1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head‐
rest poles (3) into the holes while
pressing the release button (1). Then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in po‐
sition after adjusting it to properly
protect the occupants.
Folding the rear seat (if equipped)
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to in‐
crease the luggage capacity of the ve‐
hicle.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects than could not other‐
wise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on top
of the folded down seatback while
the car is moving as this is not a
proper seating position and no seat
belts are available for use. This could
result in serious injury or death in
case of an accident or sudden stop.
Objects carried on the folded down
seatback should not extend higher
than the top of the front seats. This
could allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
The rear seatbacks may be folded for‐
ward to provide additional cargo space
and to provide access to the cargo area.
• To raise the seatback, lift and push it
firmly until it clicks into place.
• When you return the seatback to its
upright position, reposition the rear
safety belts so that they can be used
by rear seat passengers.
WARNING
Do not fold the rear seat, if the driv‐
er's position is not properly set ac‐
cording to the driver's physical figure
after folding the rear seat. A sudden
stop or collision may cause injury.
CAUTION
• When folding or unfolding the rear
seat, make sure to move the front
seat fully forward. If there are not
enough space to fold the rear seat,
never fold it by force. It will cause
damage to the headrest or the re‐
lated parts of the seat.
• Before using the seat belt, be sure
to remove it from the holder. If
you pull out the seat belt while it's
in the holder, it may damage the
seat belt or holder.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
3-10
(Continued)
• Use the holder only when there is
no passengers in the rear seat or
when you need to fold the rear
seat.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. When folding the seat back, insert
the rear seat belt buckle in the
pocket between the rear seatback
and cushion then make sure both
seatbelts do not interfere with
stowed luggage and cargo. Then,
insert the seat belt into the two
holes located on both sides.
2. Set the front seatback to the up‐
right position and if necessary, slide
the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to lowest
position.
4. Pull the lock release lever and fold
the rear seatback forward and
down firmly.
To unfold the rear seat
1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place. When you return
the seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
If you can not see the red line at
the bottom of folding lever, it
means the seatback is locked com‐
pletely.
2. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
3. When the seatback is completely
installed, check the seatback fold‐
ing lever again.
WARNING
n
Uprighting seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring for‐
(Continued)
3-11
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
ward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
WARNING
After folding the rear seat, unless
the driver’s position is properly set
according to the driver’s physical fig‐
ure, do not fold the rear seat. It may
increase body injuries in a sudden
stop or collision.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not allow
the seat belt webbing or buckle to
get caught or pinched in the rear
seat. Ensure that the seatback is
completely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the top of the
seatback. Otherwise, in an accident
or sudden stop, the seat could fold
(Continued)
(Continued)
down and allow cargo enter the pas‐
senger compartment, which could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
n
Damaging rear seat belt buck‐
les
When you fold the rear seatback, in‐
sert the buckle between the rear
seatback and cushion. Doing so can
prevent the buckle from being dam‐
aged by the rear seatback.
CAUTION
n
Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position.
WARNING
n
Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and causing
injury to the vehicle occupants. Do
not place objects in the rear seats,
since they cannot be properly se‐
cured and may hit the front seat oc‐
cupants in a collision.
WARNING
n
Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the au‐
tomatic transaxle is in P (Park) or
the manual transaxle is in 1st, and
the parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may al‐
low the vehicle to move if the shift
lever is inadvertently moved to an‐
other position.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-12
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must al‐
ways be used whenever the car is
moving.
• Seat belts are most effective when
seatbacks are in the upright posi‐
tion.
• Children age 12 and younger must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children
to ride in the front passenger seat.
If a child over 12 must be seated in
the front seat, he/she must be
properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as
possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt un‐
der your arm or behind your back.
An improperly positioned shoulder
belt can cause serious injuries in a
crash. The shoulder belt should be
positioned midway over your
shoulder across your collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never wear a seat belt over fragile
objects. If there is a sudden stop
or impact, the seat belt can dam‐
age it.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the belt webbing
is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is damaged,
replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
lap section of the belt across the ab‐
dominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con‐
tamination of the webbing with pol‐
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic‐
ularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing be‐
comes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious. Belts should
not be worn with straps twisted.
Each belt assembly must only be
used by one occupant; it is danger‐
ous to put a belt around a child being
carried on the occupant's lap.
3-13
3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating
to remove slack, or prevent the
seat belt assembly from being ad‐
justed to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very
dangerous and you may not be
protected by the seat belt proper‐
ly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death, se‐
rious injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
Front seat belt warning (if
equipped)
1GQA2083
As a reminder to the front seat belt,
the front seat belt warning lights will il‐
luminate for approximately 6 seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the front seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON
or if it is disconnected after the ignition
switch is turned ON, the corresponding
seat belt warning light will illuminate
until the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 9km/h, the illu‐
minated warning light will start to blink.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20km/h the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the
corresponding warning light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while driv‐
ing under 20km/h the seat belt warning
light will illuminate until the seat belt is
fastened.
WARNING
Riding in an improper position ad‐
versely affects the front seat belt
warning system. It is important for
the driver to instruct the passenger
to properly be seated as instructed
in this manual.
NOTICE
• You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the cen‐
ter fascia panel.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
3-14
(Continued)
• Although the front passenger seat
is not occupied, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illumi‐
nate for 6 seconds.
• The front passenger's seat belt
warning may operate when lug‐
gage is placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning
(if equipped)
OQL035070
If the ignition switch is turned ON (en‐
gine is not running) when the rear pas‐
senger's lap/shoulder belt is not fas‐
tened, the corresponding seat belt
warning light will illuminate until the
belt is fastened.
And then, the rear corresponding seat
belt warning light will illuminate for ap‐
proximately 35 seconds, if any of fol‐
lowing occurs;
-
You start the engine when the rear
belt is not fastened.
-
You drive over 9km/h when the rear
belt is not fastened.
-
The rear belt is disconnected when
driving under 20km/h.
If the rear seat belt is fastened, the
warning light will turn off immediately.
If the rear seat belt is disconnected
when you drive over the 20km/h, the
corresponding seat belt warning light
will blink and warning chime will sound
for 35 seconds.
But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoul‐
der belt is/are connected and discon‐
nected twice within 9 seconds after the
belt is fastened, the corresponding seat
belt warning light will not operate.
3-15
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Lap/shoulder belt
Height adjustment (front seat, if equip‐
ped)
Front seat
You can adjust the height of the shoul‐
der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi‐
tions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be adjus‐
ted so that it lies across your chest and
midway over your shoulder near the
door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height ad‐
juster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height ad‐
juster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro‐
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries in
an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to person‐
al injury or death. Replace your
seat belts after being in an acci‐
dent as soon as possible.
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be an
audible "click" when the tab locks into
the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy mo‐
tion, the belt will extend and let you
move around. If there is a sudden stop
or impact, however, the belt will lock in‐
to position. It will also lock if you try to
lean forward too quickly.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-16
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
WARNING
You should place the lap belt portion
as low as possible and snugly across
your hips, not on your waist. If the
lap belt is located too high on your
(Continued)
(Continued)
waist, it may increase the chance of
injury in the event of a collision. Both
arms should not be under or over
the belt. Rather, one should be over
and the other under, as shown in the
illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
OYB037047B
The seat belt should be locked into the
buckle on each seat cushion to be prop‐
erly fastened.
❈ A : Rear right seat belt fastening
buckle
B : Rear center seat belt fastening
buckle
C : Rear left seat belt fastening
buckle
OYB037048B
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the CENTER mark
must be used.
CAUTION
Do not force to lock the left or right
seat belt into the center seat belt
buckle.
Make sure to lock the rear center
seat belt into the center seat belt
buckle.
(Continued)
3-17
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
If not, the improperly fastened seat
belt will not be able to provide pro‐
tection.
Rear center seatbelt :
Pull the metal tab (3) and insert it (3)
into the buckle (4). There will be an au‐
dible click when the tab locks into the
buckle. Make sure the belt is not twis‐
ted. When using the rear center seat
belt the buckle with the CENTER mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (A) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt
to be sure it is not twisted, then try
again.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-18
Lap belt (if equipped)
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, in‐
sert the metal tab (1) into the locking
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buck‐
le. Check to make sure the belt is prop‐
erly locked and that the belt is not
twisted.
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the
length must be adjusted manually so it
fits snugly around your body. Fasten
the belt and pull on the loose end to
tighten.
The belt should be placed as low as
possible on your hips (1), not on your
waist. If the belt is too high, it could in‐
crease the possibility of your being in‐
jured in an accident.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the CENTER mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt:
When you want to release the seat
belt, press the button (1) in the locking
buckle.
3-19
3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
The center lap belt latching mecha‐
nism is different from those for the
rear seat shoulder belts. When fas‐
tening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protec‐
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be stow‐
ed in the pocket between the rear
seatback and cushion when not in use.
Pre-tensioner seat belt (if
equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with pre-ten‐
sioner seatbelts at the front and rear
outboard seating positions. The pur‐
pose of the pre-tensioner is to make
sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts
may be activated in crashes where the
collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal colli‐
sions, the pre-tensioner will activate
and pull the seat belt into tighter con‐
tact against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the af‐
fected seat belt. (if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your seat.
NOTICE
n
if equipped with rollover sen‐
sor
The pre-tensioner will activate not
only in a frontal collision but also in a
side collision or rollover, if the vehicle
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
3-20
(Continued)
is equipped with a side or curtain air
bag.
NOTICE
n
without rollover sensor
The pre-tensioner will activate not
only in a frontal collision but also in a
side collision, if the vehicle is equip‐
ped with a side or curtain air bag.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following compo‐
nents. Their locations are shown in the
illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor‐
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi‐
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this man‐
ual.
2. Be sure you and your passen‐
gers always wear seat belts
properly.
NOTICE
• Pre-tensioners equipped at the
front and rear outboard seating
positions will be activated in cer‐
tain collisions. The pre-tensioner
seat belts can be activated, where
the collision is severe enough, to‐
gether with the air bags.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visi‐
ble in the passenger compart‐
ment. These are normal operating
conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for pro‐
longed periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an ac‐
cident in which the pre-tensioner
seat belts were activated.
(Continued)
3-21
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi‐
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the SRS
air bag. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat‐
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have the system in‐
spected by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to op‐
erate only one time. After activa‐
tion, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts, of
any type, should always be re‐
placed after they have been worn
during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt as‐
sembly mechanisms become hot
during activation. Do not touch the
pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies
for several minutes after they
have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or re‐
place the pre-tensioner seat belts
yourself. Have the system inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt sys‐
tem in any manner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten‐
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not to
strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, contact a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of the
vehicle may damage the pre-ten‐
sioner seat belt system. Therefore,
have the system serviced by a pro‐
fessional workshop. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-22
Seat belt precautions
WARNING
• All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints re‐
duce the risk of serious or fatal in‐
juries for all occupants in the event
of a collision or sudden stop. With‐
out a seat belt, occupants could be
shifted too close to a deploying air
bag, strike the interior structure
or be thrown from the vehicle.
Properly worn seat belts greatly
reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and oc‐
cupant safety contained in this
manual.
• Never wear a seat belt over fragile
objects. If there is a sudden stop
or impact, the seat belt can dam‐
age it.
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific re‐
quirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use of
these restraints, refer to Child re‐
straint system on page 3-26.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and children.
Never hold a child in your arms or lap
when riding in a vehicle. The violent
forces created during a crash will
tear the child from your arms and
throw the child against the interior.
Always use a child restraint appro‐
priate for your child's height and
weight.
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
(Continued)
(Continued)
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Before buying any child restraint
system, make sure that it has a la‐
bel certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The re‐
straint must be appropriate for your
child's height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to Child restraint
system on page 3-26.
3-23
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child re‐
straint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available lap/
shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check if belt fits
periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12)
must be seated in the front seat, the
child should be securely restrained by
the available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rearmost
position. Children age 12 and under
should be restrained securely in the
rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12
and under in the front seat. NEVER
place a rear facing child seat in the
front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
WARNING
n
Shoulder belts on small chil‐
dren
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be in
contact with a child’s neck or face
while the vehicle is in motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is a
risk of death or serious injury.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the
chance of injury in an accident. When a
seat belt is used, the lap belt portion
should be placed as low and snugly as
possible on the hips, not across the ab‐
domen. For specific recommendations,
consult a physician.
WARNING
n
Pregnant women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen where
the fetus is located or above the ab‐
(Continued)
(Continued)
domen where the belt could crush
the fetus during an impact.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an in‐
jured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con‐
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of inju‐
ries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the re‐
straint system, all passengers should
be sitting up and the front and rear
seats should be in an upright position
when the vehicle is moving. A seat belt
cannot provide proper protection if the
person is lying down in the rear seat or
if the front and rear seats are in a re‐
clined position.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-24
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback in‐
creases your chance of serious or fa‐
tal injuries in the event of a collision
or sudden stop. The protection of
your restraint system (seat belts
and air bags) is greatly reduced by
reclining your seat. Seat belts must
be snug against your hips and chest
to work properly. The more the
seatback is reclined, the greater the
chance that an occupant's hips will
slide under the lap belt causing seri‐
ous internal injuries or the occu‐
pant's neck could strike the shoulder
belt. Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat‐
backs upright.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be dis‐
assembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat
belts and belt hardware are not dam‐
aged by seat hinges, doors or other
abuse.
WARNING
• When you return the rear seat‐
back to its upright position after
the rear seatback has been folded
down, be careful not to damage
the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be
sure that the webbing or buckle
does not get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. A seat belt with
damaged webbing or buckle could
possibly fail during a collision or
sudden stop, resulting in serious
injury. If the webbing or buckles
are damaged, get them replaced
immediately.
• Seatbelts can become hot in a ve‐
hicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather. They could burn
infants and children.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected peri‐
odically for wear or damage of any
kind. Any damaged parts should be re‐
placed as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or as‐
semblies should be replaced if the vehi‐
cle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. In this case, have the system
replaced by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to consult an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
3-25
3
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Our recommendation: Children
always in the rear
WARNING
Always properly restrain children in
the vehicle. Children of all ages are
safer when riding in the rear seats.
Never place a rearward-facing Child
Restraint System on the front pas‐
senger seat, unless the air bag is de‐
activated.
Children under age 13 should always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil‐
dren are safer when properly restrain‐
ed in the rear seats than in the front
seat. Children too large for a Child Re‐
straint System must use the seat belts
provided.
Most countries have regulations which
require children to travel in approved
Child Restraint Systems.
The laws governing the age or height/
weight restrictions at which seat belts
can be used instead of Child Restraint
System differs among countries, so
you should be aware of the specific re‐
quirements in your country, and where
you are travelling.
Child Restraint Systems must be prop‐
erly installed in the vehicle seat. Always
use a commercially available Child Re‐
straint System that meets the require‐
ments of your country.
Child Restraint System (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rearward-
facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the seat
of the vehicle. Read and comply with
the instructions for installation and use
provided by the manufacturer of the
Child Restraint System.
WARNING
• Always follow the Child Restraint
System manufacturer’s instruc‐
tions for installation and use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always properly restrain your child
in the Child Restraint System.
• Do not use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that hooks over
a seatback, it may not provide ad‐
equate protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have the sys‐
tem checked by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a Child Restraint Sys‐
tem for your child, always:
• Make sure the Child Restraint System
has a label certifying that it meets
applicable Safety Standards of your
country.
A Child Restraint System may only be
installed if it was approved in accord‐
ance with the requirements of ECE-
R44 or ECE-R129.
• Select a Child Restraint System based
on your child’s height and weight. The
required label or the instructions for
use typically provide this information.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-26
• Select a Child Restraint System that
fits the vehicle seating position where
it will be used.
For the suitability of Child Restraint
Systems on the vehicle's seating po‐
sitions, please refer to the installa‐
tion tables.
• Read and comply with the warnings
and instructions for installation and
use provided with the Child Restraint
System.
Child Restraint System types
There are three main types of Child Re‐
straint Systems: rearward-facing, for‐
ward-facing and booster Child Re‐
straint Systems.
They are classified according to the
child’s age, height and weight.
Rearward-facing Child Restraint Sys‐
tem
A rearward-facing Child Restraint Sys‐
tem provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the child.
The harness system holds the child in
place, and in an accident, acts to keep
the child positioned in the Child Re‐
straint Systems and reduce the stress
to the fragile neck and spinal cord.
All children under the age of one year
must always ride in a rearward-facing
Child Restraint System. There are dif‐
ferent types of rearward-facing Child
Restraint Systems: infant-only Child
Restraint Systems can only be used
rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-
in-1 Child Restraint Systems typically
have higher height and weight limits for
the rearward-facing position, allowing
you to keep your child rearward-facing
for a longer period of time.
Keep using Child Restraint Systems in
the rearward-facing position as long as
children fit within the height and
weight limits allowed by the Child Re‐
straint System's manufacturer.
3-27
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward-facing Child Restraint System
A forward-facing Child Restraint Sys‐
tem provides restraint for the child’s
body with a harness. Keep children in a
forward-facing Child Restraint System
with a harness until they reach the top
height or weight limit allowed by your
Child Restraint System’s manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing Child Restraint System, your
child is ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is a Child Restraint Sys‐
tem designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle’s seat belt system. A booster
seat positions the seat belt so that it
fits properly over the stronger parts of
your child’s body. Keep your children in
booster seats until they are big enough
to fit in a seat belt properly.
For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap
belt must lie comfortable across the
upper thighs, not the stomach. The
shoulder belt should lie comfortable
across the shoulder and chest and not
across the neck or face. Children under
age 13 must always be properly re‐
strained to minimize the risk of injury
in an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
WARNING
Before installing your Child Restraint
System always:
Read and follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of the
Child Restraint System.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Failure to follow all warnings and in‐
structions could increase the risk of
a SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an ac‐
cident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a Child Re‐
straint System, the headrest of the
respective seating position shall be
readjusted or entirely removed.
After selecting a proper Child Restraint
System for your child and checking that
the Child Restraint System fits properly
on the seating position, there are three
general steps for a proper installation:
• Properly secure the Child Restraint
System to the vehicle. All Child Re‐
straint Systems must be secured to
the vehicle with the lap belt or lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the
ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX an‐
chorage and/or with the support leg.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-28
• Make sure the Child Restraint System
is firmly secured. After installing a
Child Restraint System to the vehicle,
push and pull the seat forward and
from side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A Child
Restraint System secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-side
movement can be expected.
When installing a Child Restraint Sys‐
tem, adjust the vehicle seat and seat‐
back (up and down, forward and rear‐
ward) so that your child fits in the
Child Restraint System in a comforta‐
ble manner.
• Secure the child in the Child Restraint
System. Make sure the child is prop‐
erly strapped in the Child Restraint
System according to the Child Re‐
straint System manufacturer’s in‐
structions.
CAUTION
A Child Restraint System in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. To pre‐
vent burns, check the seating sur‐
face and buckles before placing your
child in the Child Restraint System.
ISOFIX anchorage and top-
tether anchorage (ISOFIX
anchorage system) for children
The ISOFIX system holds a Child Re‐
straint System during driving and in an
accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the Child Restraint
System easier and reduce the possibili‐
ty of improperly installing your Child
Restraint System. The ISOFIX system
uses anchors in the vehicle and attach‐
ments on the Child Restraint System.
The ISOFIX system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the Child
Restraint System to the rear seats.
ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each ISOFIX seating posi‐
tion that will accommodate a Child Re‐
straint System with lower attach‐
ments.
To use the ISOFIX system in your vehi‐
cle, you must have a Child Restraint
System with ISOFIX attachments.
The Child Restraint System manufac‐
turer will provide you with instructions
on how to use the Child Restraint Sys‐
tem with its attachments for the ISO‐
FIX anchorages.
ISOFIX anchorages have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear seat‐
ing positions. Their locations are shown
in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not attempt to install a Child Re‐
straint System using ISOFIX ancho‐
rages in the rear center seating po‐
sition. There are no ISOFIX anchorag‐
es provided for this seat. Using the
outboard seat anchorages, for the
CRS installation on the rear center
seating position, can damage the an‐
chorages.
3-29
3
Safety features of your vehicle
OYB037017
Type A
OYB037018
Type B
ISOFIX anchorages are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of
the rear seat left and right outboard
seating positions, indicated by the
symbols.
❈ (1) : ISOFIX Anchor Position Indica‐
tor (Type A- , Type B- )
(2) : ISOFIX Anchor
Securing a Child Restraint System
with the ISOFIX Anchorage
System
To install an i-Size or ISOFIX-compatible
Child Restraint System in either of the
rear outboard seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the ISOFIX anchorages.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchorages that could prevent
a secure connection between the
Child Restraint System and the ISO‐
FIX anchorages.
3. Place the Child Restraint System on
the vehicle seat, then attach the
seat to the ISOFIX anchorages ac‐
cording to the instructions provided
by the Child Restraint System man‐
ufacturer.
4. Follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer
for proper installation and connec‐
tion of the ISOFIX attachments on
the Child Restraint System to the
ISOFIX anchorages.
WARNING
Take the following precautions when
using the ISOFIX system:
• Read and follow all installation in‐
structions provided with your Child
Restraint System.
• To prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted
seat belts, buckle all unused rear
seat belts and retract the seat belt
webbing behind the child. Children
can be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one Child
Restraint System to a single an‐
chorage. This could cause the an‐
chor or attachment to come loose
or break.
• Always have the ISOFIX system in‐
spected by your dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the ISOFIX system and may not
properly secure the Child Restraint
System.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-30
Securing a Child Restraint System
seat with Top-tether Anchorage
system (if equipped)
Child restraint system top tether an‐
chorages are located on the back of the
rear seatbacks.
1. Route the Child Restraint System
top-tether strap over the seatback.
Placing the top tether strap, please
follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System manufacturer.
2. Connect the top-tether strap to
the top-tether anchorage, then
tighten the top-tether strap ac‐
cording to the instructions of your
Child Restraint System's manufac‐
turer to firmly attach the Child Re‐
straint System to the seat.
WARNING
Take the following precautions when
installing the top-tether:
• Read and follow all installation in‐
structions provided with your Child
Restraint System.
• NEVER attach more than one Child
Restraint System to a single ISO‐
FIX top-tether anchorage. This
could cause the anchorage or at‐
tachment to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the top-tether to
anything other than the correct
top-tether anchorage. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Child Restraint System anchorages
are designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by correctly
fitted Child Restraint System.
Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
3-31
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations
Mass Group Size Class Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
1st 2nd row
Passenger Left Hand Center Right Hand
Carrycot
F ISO/L1 N/A X N/A X
G ISO/L2 N/A X N/A X
0 : UP to 10 kg E ISO/R1 N/A IL N/A IL
0+ : UP to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 N/A IL N/A IL
D ISO/R2 N/A IL* N/A IL*
C ISO/R3 N/A IL* N/A IL*
I : 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 N/A IL* N/A IL*
C ISO/R3 N/A IL* N/A IL*
B ISO/F2 N/A IUF, IL N/A IUF, IL
B1 ISO/F2X N/A IUF, IL N/A IUF, IL
A ISO/F3 N/A IUF, IL N/A IUF, IL
IUF = suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are
those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
IL* = suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list.
Driver Seat : Seat Height should be up highest position.
Passenger Seat : Seat should be move foremost position.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-32
Securing a Child Restraint System
with a lap/shoulder belt
When not using the ISOFIX system, all
Child Restraint Systems must be se‐
cured to a rear seat with the lap part of
a lap/shoulder belt.
Installing a Child Restraint System with
a lap/shoulder belt
To install a Child Restraint System on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the Child Restraint System on
a rear seat and route the lap/shoul‐
der belt around or through the
Child Restraint System, following
the Child Restraint System manu‐
facturer’s instructions.
Make sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis‐
tinct click sound. Position the re‐
lease button so that it is easy to
access in case of an emergency.
3. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down on
the Child Restraint System while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
4. Push and pull on the Child Restraint
System to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place.
If your Child Restraint System manu‐
facturer recommends the use of a top-
tether with the lap/shoulder belt.
To remove the Child Restraint System,
press the release button on the buckle
and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out
of the Child Restraint System and allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
3-33
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to ECE
regulations (For Europe)
Use Child Restraint System that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the Child Re‐
straint System, refer to the following table.
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front Passenger Outboard Second Row
Airbag activated
Airbag deactiva‐
ted
Outboard Left
Center (3 POINT
BELT)
Outboard Right
Group 0 (0-9 months) up to 10 kg X U U U* U
Group 0 + (0-2 years) up to 13 kg X U U U* U
Group I (9
months-4years)
9 to 18 kg X U U U* U
Group II (15 to 25 kg) 15 to 25 kg UF U U U* U
Group III (22 to 36 kg) 22 to 36 kg UF U U U* U
U = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group
U* =
Seating position not suitable for fitment of Child Restraint Systems with support leg
UF =
Suitable for forward facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
L = Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the "specific vehicle", "restric‐
ted" or "semi-universal" categories.
B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-34
Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to ECE
regulations (Except Europe)
Use Child Restraint System that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the Child Re‐
straint System, refer to the following table.
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front Passenger Outboard Second Row
Airbag acti‐
vated
Airbag deac‐
tivated
Outboard
Left
Center (3
POINT BELT)
Center (2
POINT BELT)
Outboard
Right
Group 0 (0-9 months) up to 10 kg X U U U UF U
Group 0 + (0-2 years) up to 13 kg X U U U UF U
Group I (9 months-4
years)
9 to 18 kg X U U U UF U
Group II (15 to 25 kg) 15 to 25 kg UF U U U UF U
Group III (22 to 36 kg) 22 to 36 kg UF U U U UF U
U = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group.
UF =
Suitable for forward facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
3-35
3
Safety features of your vehicle
i-Size Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front Passenger
Outboard
Second Row
Outboard Left Center Outboard Right
i-Size Child Restraints Systems X i-U X i-U
i-U =
Suitable for i-Size "universal" Child Restraints Systems forward and rearward facing.
X = Seat position not suitable for i-Size CRS.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-36
Recommended Child Restraint Systems – For Europe
Mass group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44 Appro‐
val No.
Group 0-1 Baby Safe Plus Britax Römer Rearward-facing with ISOFIX Base E1 04301146
Group 1 Duo Plus Britax Römer Forward-facing with ISOFIX and top-tether E1 04301133
Group 2 KidFix II XP Britax Römer Forward-facing with ISOFIX and vehicle belt E1 04301323
Group 3 Junior III Graco Forward-facing with vehicle belt
E11 03.44.164
E11 03.44.165
❈ The Graco Junior III will be used without the backrest
CRS Manutacturer information
Britax Römer http://www.britax.com
Graco http://www.gracobaby.com
3-37
3
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1.
Driver’s front air bag
*
2.
Passenger’s front air bag
*
3.
Side air bag
*
4.
Curtain air bag
*
5. Front passenger’s air bag ON/OFF
switch
*
WARNING
• Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and se‐
verity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
• SRS and pretensioners contain ex‐
plosive chemicals.
If scraping a vehicle without re‐
moving SRS and pretensioners
from a vehicle, it may cause fire.
Before scraping a vehicle, contact
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
(Continued)
*
if equipped
Safety features of your vehicle
3-38
(Continued)
• Keep the SRS parts and wirings
away from water or any liquid. If
the SRS components are inopera‐
tive due to exposure to water or
liquids, it may cause fire or severe
injury.
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate
if necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event
of a serious frontal collision or side
collision (if equipped with a side air
bag or curtain air bag) in order to
help protect the occupants from seri‐
ous physical injury.
NOTICE
n
If equipped with rollover sen‐
sor
(Continued)
(Continued)
Also, the air bags inflate instantly in
the event of a rollover (if equipped
with a side air bag or curtain air bag)
in order to help protect the occu‐
pants from serious physical injury.
• In normal conditions, the airbag is de‐
signed to deploy based on certain an‐
gle and intensity of the collision.
These two factors are crucial ele‐
ments for deciding whether to trans‐
mit airbag deployment signal or start
the electrical operation or not.
• The airbag will deploy based on angle
and intensity of the collision. It will
not deploy in every crash or collision
situations.
• The front air bags will completely in‐
flate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an ac‐
cident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com‐
partments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in
a severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of the air
bag inflation is a consequence of ex‐
tremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to inflate the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu‐
pant impacts those structures.
This speed of inflation reduces the
risk of serious or life-threatening in‐
juries in a severe collision and is thus
a necessary part of the air bag de‐
sign.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also cau‐
ses the air bags to expand with a
great deal of force.
•
There are even circumstances under
which contact with the steering
wheel air bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is posi‐
tioned excessively close to the steer‐
ing wheel.
3-39
3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury or
death caused by deploying air bags
in a collision, the driver should sit
as far back from the steering
wheel air bag as possible (at least
250 mm (10 inches) away). The
front passengers should always
move their seats as far back as
possible and sit back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of a collision, and passen‐
gers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in a
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause injuries
including facial or bodily abrasions,
injuries from broken glasses or
burns.
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the ig‐
nition of the air bag inflator. After the
air bag inflates, you may feel substan‐
tial discomfort in breathing due to the
contact of your chest with both the
seat belt and the air bag, as well as
from breathing the smoke and powder.
Open your doors and/or windows as
soon as possible after impact in order
to reduce discomfort and prevent pro‐
longed exposure to the smoke and
powder.
Though the smoke and powder are
non-toxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
(Continued)
(Continued)
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s in‐
ternal components immediately af‐
ter an air bag has inflated.
Do not install or place any accesso‐
ries near air bag deployment areas,
such as the instrument panel, win‐
dows, pillars, and roof rails.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-40
Front passenger's air bag warning
label for child restraint system
■ Type A
■ Type B
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-
facing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place a front-facing
child restraints in the front passenger’s
seat. If the front passenger air bag in‐
flates, it could cause serious or fatal in‐
juries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the pas‐
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,
you can activate or deactivate the
front passenger’s air bag when neces‐
sary.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and se‐
curely lock the child restraint sys‐
tem in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury or
death to an infant or child.
3-41
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
W7-147
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag - Supplemental Restraint Sys‐
tem (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle
is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
Passenger’s front air bag ON
indicator (if equipped)
The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator illuminates
for approximately 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON indi‐
cator also comes on when the passeng‐
er's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the ON position and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds.
Passenger’s front air bag OFF
indicator (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air
bag OFF indicator illuminates
for about 4 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi‐
cator also comes on when the passeng‐
er’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position and goes off when
the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-42
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indica‐
tor will not illuminate (The passeng‐
er's front air bag ON indicator comes
on and goes off after approximately
60 seconds) and the passenger’s
front air bag will inflate in a frontal
impact even if the passenger’s front
air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
OFF position.
In this case, have the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch and the
SRS air bag system inspected by a
professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com‐
ponents:
1.
Driver's front air bag module
*
2.
Passenger's front air bag module
*
3.
Side air bag modules
*
4.
Curtain air bag modules
*
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem‐
blies
*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM) / Roll‐
over sensor
*
*
if equipped
8.
Side impact sensors
*
9. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch
*
10. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator
*
The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS
components while the ignition switch is
ON to determine if a crash impact is se‐
vere enough to require air bag deploy‐
ment or pre-tensioner seat belt de‐
ployment.
The SRS air bag warning light "
" on
the instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, af‐
ter which the SRS air bag warning light
"
" should go out.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions oc‐
curs, this indicates a malfunction of
the SRS. In this case, have the sys‐
tem inspected by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
(Continued)
3-43
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminat‐
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi‐
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
*
if equipped
Drivers front air bag (1)
The air bag modules are located both in
the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front
of the vehicle, it will automatically de‐
ploy the front air bags.
Drivers front air bag (2)
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will sepa‐
rate under pressure from the expan‐
sion of the air bags. Further opening of
the covers then allows full inflation of
the air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-44
Drivers front air bag (3)
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows
the driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag im‐
mediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
Passengers front air bag (if equipped)
B240B05LC
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces‐
sories (drink holder, sticker, etc.)
on the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle
with a passenger's air bag. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When installing a container of liq‐
uid air freshener inside the vehicle,
do not place it near the instrument
cluster nor on the instrument pan‐
el surface.
It may become a dangerous pro‐
jectile and cause injury if the pas‐
senger's air bag inflates.
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle. These
conditions are normal and are not
hazardous - the air bags are
packed in this fine powder. The
dust generated during air bag de‐
ployment may cause skin or eye
irritation as well as aggravate
asthma for some persons. Always
wash all exposed skin areas thor‐
oughly with cold water and a mild
soap after an accident in which the
air bags were deployed.
(Continued)
3-45
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON po‐
sition. If the SRS " " warning light
does not illuminate, or continuous‐
ly remains on after illuminating for
about 6 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON posi‐
tion, or after the engine is started,
comes on while driving, the SRS is
not working properly. In this case,
have the system inspected by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
• Before you replace a fuse or dis‐
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK po‐
sition and remove the ignition key.
Never remove or replace the air
bag related fuse (s) when the igni‐
tion switch is in the ON position.
Failure to heed this warning will
cause the SRS warning light
to illuminate.
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag (if equipped)
Drivers front air bag
Passengers front air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple‐
mental Restraint (Air Bag) System and
lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's pres‐
ence are the letters "AIRBAG" engraved
on the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of
the steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys‐
tem alone in case of a frontal impact of
sufficient severity.
WARNING
The driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passenger's
arms and hands should be placed on
their laps.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-46
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child re‐
straints – every trip, every time, ev‐
eryone! Air bags inflate with consid‐
erable force and in the blink of an
eye. Seat belts help keep occupants
in proper position to obtain maxi‐
mum benefit from the air bag. Even
with air bags, improperly belted and
unbelted occupants can be severely
injured when the air bag inflates. Al‐
ways follow the precautions about
seat belts, air bags and occupant
safety contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi‐
mum safety benefit from your re‐
straint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest place
for children of any age to ride.
• Front and side air bags can injure
occupants improperly positioned in
the front seats.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passengers
can be severely injured by inflating
air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride in
the front seat when the passeng‐
er’s front air bag OFF indicator is
illuminated, because the air bag
will not deploy in the event of a
moderate or severe frontal crash.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to
deploy.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components of
the SRS system. Doing so could re‐
sult in injury, due to accidental de‐
ployment of the air bags or by
rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If the SRS air bag warning light re‐
mains illuminated while the vehicle
is being driven, have the system
inspected by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
(Continued)
3-47
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once -
have the system replaced by a
professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• The SRS is designed to deploy the
front air bags only when an impact
is sufficiently severe and when the
impact angle is less than 30° from
the forward longitudinal axis of
the vehicle. Additionally, the air
bags will only deploy once. Seat
belts must be worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact
or rollover crashes. In addition,
front air bags will not deploy in
frontal crashes below the deploy‐
ment threshold.
• A child restraint system must nev‐
er be placed in the front seat. The
infant or child could be severely in‐
jured or killed by an air bag deploy‐
ment in case of an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Children age 12 and under must al‐
ways be properly restrained in the
rear seat. Never allow children to
ride in the front passenger seat. If
a child over 12 must be seated in
the front seat, he or she must be
properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as
possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occupants
including the driver should always
wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at
their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash. Do not sit or
lean unnecessarily close to the air
bag while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of posi‐
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen‐
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comforta‐
bly extended and their feet on the
floor until the vehicle is parked and
the ignition key is removed.
• The SRS air bag system must de‐
ploy very rapidly to provide pro‐
tection in a crash. If an occupant is
out of position because of not
wearing a seat belt, the air bag
may forcefully contact the occu‐
pant causing serious or fatal inju‐
ries.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-48
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger’s front
air bag ON/OFF switch if a child re‐
straint is installed on the front pas‐
senger's seat or if the front passeng‐
er's seat is unoccupied by a person.
To ensure the safety of your child, the
passenger’s front air bag must be de‐
activated when it should be necessary
to install a rearward facing child seat
on the front passenger seat in excep‐
tional circumstances.
To deactivate or reactivate the pas‐
senger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch and turn it to the OFF position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi‐
cator ( ) will illuminate and stay on
until the passenger’s front air bag is re‐
activated.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch and turn it to the ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi‐
cator will go out and the passenger’s
front air bag ON indicator (
) will illu‐
minate for approximately 60 seconds.
WARNING
The front air bag ON/OFF switch
could turn by using a similar small
rigid device. Always check the status
of the front air bag ON/OFF switch
and passenger's front air bag
ON/OFF indicator.
NOTICE
• When the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position, the passenger’s front
air bag is activated and child or in‐
fant seat should not be installed
on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
OFF position, the passenger’s
front air bag is deactivated.
3-49
3
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
( ) on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator ( ) will not illumi‐
nate (The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator comes on and
goes off after approximately 60
seconds), the SRS Control Module
reactivate the passenger’s front
air bag and the passenger’s front
air bag will inflate in frontal impact
crashes even if the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position.
In this case, have the system in‐
spected by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the SRS air bag warning light
blinks or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, or if it illuminates
while the vehicle is being driven,
have the system inspected by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the mal‐
function may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passeng‐
er’s and/or side and curtain air bag
may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly during a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passenger's
seat unless the passenger's front
air bag has been deactivated. The
infant or child could be severely in‐
jured or killed by an air bag deploy‐
ment in case of an accident.
• Even though your vehicle is equip‐
ped with the passenger's front air
bag ON/OFF switch, do not install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger's seat. A child restraint
system must never be placed in
the front seat. Children who are
too large for child restraint sys‐
tems should always occupy the
rear seat and use the available lap/
shoulder belts. Children are affor‐
ded the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are re‐
strained by a proper restraint sys‐
tem in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no lon‐
ger needed on the front passeng‐
er's seat, reactivate the front pas‐
senger's air bag.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
3-50
(Continued)
• Never place or insert any object in‐
to any small opening near side air‐
bag labels attached to the vehicle
seats. When the air bag deploys,
the object may affect the deploy‐
ment and result in unexpected ac‐
cident or bodily harm.
WARNING
n
No attaching objects
No objects (such as crash pad cover,
cellular phone holder, cup holder,
perfume or stickers) should be
placed over or near the air bag mod‐
ules on the steering wheel, instru‐
ment panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause the air
bags to deploy. Do not place any ob‐
jects over the air bag or between the
air bag and yourself.
Side air bag (if equipped)
Front
Your vehicle is equipped with a side im‐
pact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and the front passenger
with additional protection than that of‐
fered by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to de‐
ploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash se‐
verity, angle, speed and point of im‐
pact. The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
situations.
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors and
passengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or cur‐
tain air bags.
3-51
3
Safety features of your vehicle
NOTICE
n
if equipped with rollover sen‐
sor
• Also, both side of the side air bags
deploy in certain rollover situa‐
tions.
• The side air bag may deploy when
the rollover sensor detects the sit‐
uation as a rollover.
WARNING
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the seat belt systems and is not a
substitute for them. Therefore
your seat belts must be worn at all
times while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion. The air bags deploy only in
certain side impact or rollover
*1
conditions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle oc‐
cupants.
(Continued)
*1
Only vehicle equipped with rollover
sensor.
(Continued)
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front and all rear (if
equipped) seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
• Use of seat covers could reduce or
prevent the effectiveness of the
system.
• To prevent unexpected deploy‐
ment of the side air bag that may
result in personal injury, avoid im‐
pact to the side impact sensor
when the ignition switch is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam‐
aged, have the system serviced by
a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
WARNING
n
No attaching objects
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag and
yourself. Also, do not attach any
objects around the area the air bag
inflates such as the door, side door
glass, front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects between
the door and the seat. They may
become dangerous projectiles if
the side air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side air bags.
• Do not hang heavy items on the
coat hooks for safety reasons.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-52
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the center
pillar.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in
certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash se‐
verity, angle, speed and impact. The
curtain air bags are not designed to de‐
ploy in all side impact situations, colli‐
sions from the front or rear of the ve‐
hicle or in most rollover situations.
NOTICE
n
if equipped with rollover sen‐
sor
• Also, both sides of the curtain air
bags deploy in certain rollover sit‐
uations.
• The curtain air bag may deploy
when the rollover sensor detects
the situation as a rollover.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide their best protec‐
tion, front seat occupants and
outboard rear occupants should sit
in an upright position with the seat
belts properly fastened. Impor‐
tantly, children should sit in a
proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child restraint
system. Make sure to position the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint system
in a locked position.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects be‐
tween the doors and passengers
when they are seated on seats
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags.
(Continued)
3-53
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain air
bag system. If necessary, have the
system serviced by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Failure to follow the above instruc‐
tions can result in injury or death to
the vehicle occupants in an accident.
WARNING
n
No attaching objects
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag. Also, do not attach any
objects around the area the air bag
inflates such as the door, side door
glass, front and rear pillar, roof
side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable ob‐
jects on the clothes hanger.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-54
Air bag collision sensors
OYB037031/OYB036032/OYB037035/OYB036033/OYB036034B
❈ The actual air bag collision sensors
in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a colli‐
sion? (Inflation and non-inflation condi‐
tions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expec‐
ted to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact acci‐
dents, as well as low speed impacts.
1. SRS control module / Rollover sen‐
sor (if equipped)
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side impact sensor (if equipped)
4. Side impact sensor (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could re‐
sult in serious personal injury or
death.
(Continued)
3-55
3
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the installation location or angle
of the sensors is altered in any
way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the system
serviced by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, body or B pillars where
side collision sensors are installed.
In this case, have the system serv‐
iced by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been designed to
absorb impact and deploy the air
bag(s) in certain collisions. Instal‐
ling bumper guards or replacing a
bumper with non-genuine parts
may adversely affect your vehi‐
cle’s collision and air bag deploy‐
ment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in
a frontal collision depending on the in‐
tensity, speed or angles of impact of
the front collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-56
Side and curtain air bags (if equipped)
Side and curtain air bags are designed
to inflate when an impact is detected
by side collision sensors depending on
the strength, speed or angles of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are de‐
signed to inflate only in frontal colli‐
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to in‐
flate only in side impact collisions, but
they may inflate in other collisions if
the side impact sensors detect a suffi‐
cient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces
not designed for vehicle traffic to pre‐
vent unintended air bag deployment.
NOTICE
n
If equipped with a rollover
sensor
(Continued)
(Continued)
Also, the side and curtain air bags
are designed to inflate when a roll‐
over is detected by a rollover sensor.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts in such collisions.
3-57
3
Safety features of your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because oc‐
cupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, in‐
flated air bags would not be able to
provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the intensi‐
ty, vehicle speed and angles of im‐
pact.
• In an angled collision, the force of im‐
pact may direct the occupants in a di‐
rection where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional ben‐
efit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-58
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi‐
cle causing it to ride under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
under-ride collisions.
• Air bags do not inflate in most roll‐
over accidents, even though the vehi‐
cle is equipped with side air bags and
curtain air bags.
NOTICE
n
If equipped with rollover sen‐
sor
However, if equipped with side and
curtain air bags, the air bags may in‐
flate in a rollover, when it is detec‐
ted by the rollover sensor.
NOTICE
n
Without rollover sensor
However, side and/or curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact collision,
if the vehicle is equipped with side
air bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of im‐
pact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not de‐
livered to the sensors.
3-59
3
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safe‐
ly service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on, have the sys‐
tem inspected by a professional work‐
shop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components or
wiring, including the addition of
any kind of badges to the pad cov‐
ers or modifications to the body
structure, can adversely affect
SRS performance and lead to pos‐
sible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov‐
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or clean‐
ers could adversely affect the air
bag covers and proper deployment
of the system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to in‐
flate.
• If the air bags inflate, have the
system replaced by a professional
workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so could
result in injury, due to accidental
inflation of the air bags or by ren‐
dering the SRS inoperative.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag sys‐
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be ob‐
served. An authorized Kia dealer
knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary informa‐
tion. Failure to follow these pre‐
cautions and procedures could in‐
crease the risk of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; in this case, have your
vehicle inspected by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to
contact an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the cargo
area or on top of a folded-down back
seat. All occupants should sit upright,
fully back in their seats with their
seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-60
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to restrain
one occupant. If more than one per‐
son uses the same seat belt, they
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve oc‐
cupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provi‐
ded by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard or
sharp objects between themselves
and the air bags. Carrying hard or
sharp objects on your lap or in your
mouth can result in injuries if an air
bag inflates.
•
Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on
the floor. If occupants are too close
to the air bag covers, they could be
injured if the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere
with the proper operation of the air
bags.
• Do not modify the front seats. Modi‐
fication of the front seats could in‐
terfere with the operation of the
supplemental restraint system sens‐
ing components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera‐
tion of the supplemental restraint
system sensing components and wir‐
ing harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri‐
ously injured or killed in the event of
a crash. All infants and children
should be properly restrained in ap‐
propriate child safety seats or seat
belts in the rear seat.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi‐
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying air
bag, strike the interior structure
or be thrown from the vehicle re‐
sulting in serious injury or death.
• Always sit upright with the seat‐
back in an upright position, cen‐
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and your feet on the
floor.
Adding equipment to or
modifying your air bag-
equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
3-61
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning label (if
equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of po‐
tential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk of children. We also
want you to be aware of the risks
which adults are exposed to. Those
have been described in previous pages.
Safety features of your vehicle
3-62
Keys.............................................................................................4-04
Record your key number..................................................... 4-04
Key operations...................................................................... 4-04
Immobilizer system.............................................................. 4-05
Remote keyless entry .............................................................4-07
Remote keyless entry system operations....................... 4-07
Transmitter precautions......................................................4-07
Battery replacement............................................................4-09
Smart key ..................................................................................4-10
Smart key functions.............................................................4-10
Smart key precautions.........................................................4-11
Theft-alarm system ............................................................... 4-13
Armed stage.......................................................................... 4-13
Theft-alarm stage................................................................4-14
Disarmed stage..................................................................... 4-14
Door locks................................................................................... 4-16
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle................4-16
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle...................4-17
Impact sensing door unlock system ................................. 4-19
Speed sensing door lock system ....................................... 4-19
Child-protector rear door lock............................................ 4-19
Tailgate....................................................................................... 4-21
Opening the tailgate............................................................. 4-21
Closing the tailgate............................................................... 4-21
Emergency tailgate safety release....................................4-22
Windows..................................................................................... 4-23
Power windows .................................................................... 4-23
Manual windows (if equipped)............................................ 4-27
Hood............................................................................................ 4-28
Opening the hood..................................................................4-28
Hood open warning ..............................................................4-28
Closing the hood....................................................................4-29
Fuel filler lid................................................................................4-30
Opening the fuel filler lid......................................................4-30
Closing the fuel filler lid........................................................4-30
Sunroof ...................................................................................... 4-33
Sliding the sunroof................................................................4-34
Tilting the sunroof................................................................ 4-35
Sunshade................................................................................ 4-36
Resetting the sunroof..........................................................4-36
Steering wheel...........................................................................4-37
Electric power steering........................................................ 4-37
Tilt & telescopic steering .................................................... 4-38
Heated steering wheel ........................................................4-39
Horn.........................................................................................4-39
Mirrors........................................................................................ 4-41
Inside rearview mirror..........................................................4-41
Outside rearview mirror.......................................................4-42
Instrument cluster....................................................................4-45
Instrument Cluster Control..................................................4-46
LCD Window Control............................................................. 4-47
Gauges.................................................................................... 4-48
Transaxle Shift Indicator......................................................4-51
LCD windows .............................................................................4-53
Overview.................................................................................4-53
Trip information (Trip computer)....................................... 4-53
Digital speedometer............................................................. 4-57
LCD Modes (for type C,D cluster)....................................... 4-58
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System mode ...............4-58
Service Mode..........................................................................4-58
Features of your vehicle
4
User Settings Mode (for type C, D cluster)...................... 4-59
Warning messages................................................................4-61
Warning and indicator lights................................................... 4-65
Warning lights........................................................................4-65
Indicator Lights......................................................................4-72
Rear parking assist system ....................................................4-76
Operation of the rear parking assist system...................4-76
Non-operational conditions of rear parking as‐
sist system.............................................................................4-77
Rear parking assist system precautions...........................4-77
Self-diagnosis........................................................................ 4-78
Rearview camera ..................................................................... 4-79
Lighting....................................................................................... 4-80
Battery saver function.........................................................4-80
Headlight escort function ................................................... 4-80
Headlight welcome function .............................................. 4-80
Lighting control..................................................................... 4-81
High beam operation............................................................ 4-83
Turn signals and lane change signals.................................4-84
Front fog light .......................................................................4-85
Rear fog light ........................................................................ 4-86
Static bending light ..............................................................4-86
Daytime running light ......................................................... 4-87
Headlight leveling device .....................................................4-87
High beam Assist ................................................................. 4-88
Wipers and washers................................................................. 4-90
Windshield wipers (front).................................................... 4-90
Windshield washers (front).................................................4-92
Rear window wiper and washer switch ........................... 4-93
Interior light............................................................................... 4-95
Map lamp................................................................................ 4-95
Room lamp............................................................................. 4-96
Luggage room lamp .............................................................4-96
Vanity mirror lamp .............................................................. 4-96
Glove box lamp...................................................................... 4-97
Defroster.................................................................................... 4-98
Rear window defroster........................................................ 4-98
Manual climate control system ............................................. 4-99
Heating and air conditioning............................................. 4-100
System operation............................................................... 4-104
Climate control air filter ................................................... 4-106
Air Conditioning refrigerant label.....................................4-106
Checking the amount of air conditioner refriger‐
ant and compressor lubricant...........................................4-107
Automatic climate control system ..................................... 4-108
Automatic heating and air conditioning..........................4-109
Manual heating and air conditioning............................... 4-110
System operation............................................................... 4-114
Climate control air filter ................................................... 4-116
Air Conditioning refrigerant label.....................................4-116
Checking the amount of air conditioner refriger‐
ant and compressor lubricant...........................................4-117
Windshield defrosting and defogging..................................4-118
Manual climate control system........................................4-118
Automatic climate control system.................................. 4-119
Defogging logic ...................................................................4-119
Storage compartments......................................................... 4-122
Center console storage .....................................................4-122
Glove box..............................................................................4-122
Sunglass holder ..................................................................4-123
4
Luggage net holder ........................................................... 4-123
Luggage board ................................................................... 4-124
Increase cargo space .........................................................4-124
Interior features......................................................................4-126
Cigarette lighter .................................................................4-126
Ashtray ................................................................................4-126
Cup holder............................................................................ 4-127
Sunvisor................................................................................4-128
Seat warmer .......................................................................4-128
Power outlet........................................................................4-129
USB charger ........................................................................4-130
Floor mat anchor(s) ...........................................................4-131
Shopping bag holder...........................................................4-131
Clothes hanger ................................................................... 4-132
Exterior features.................................................................... 4-133
Roof rack .............................................................................4-133
Side seal molding ............................................................... 4-134
4
KEYS
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the
key code tag attach‐
ed to the key set.
Should you lose your keys Kia recom‐
mends to contact an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner. Remove the key
code tag and store it in a safe place. Al‐
so, record the key code number and
keep it in a safe and handy place, but
not in the vehicle.
Key operations
Folding key
■ Folding key
To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto‐
matically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without pressing
the release button. This may dam‐
age the key.
Smart key
■ Smart key
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and re‐
move the mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
WARNING
n
Ignition key (Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in a ve‐
hicle with the ignition key (smart
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-04
(Continued)
key) is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition switch or start
button is ACC or ON position.
Children copy adults and they could
place the key in the ignition switch
or press the start button. The igni‐
tion key (smart key) would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children, when
the engine is running.
WARNING
Kia recommends to use parts for re‐
placement from an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner. If an after‐
market key is used, the ignition
switch may not return to ON after
START. If this happens, the starter
will continue to operate causing
damage to the starter motor and
possible fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised
of a small transponder in the ignition
key and electronic devices inside the
vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the ig‐
nition switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the igni‐
tion key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cyl‐
inder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi‐
tion. The immobilizer system activates
automatically. Without a valid ignition
key for your vehicle, the engine will not
start.
Vehicles with smart key system
Whenever the engine start/stop button
is changed to the ON position, the im‐
mobilizer system checks and verifies if
the key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer sys‐
tem activates automatically. Without a
valid smart key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your ve‐
hicle, do not leave spare keys any‐
where in your vehicle. Your immobil‐
izer password is a customer unique
password and should be kept confi‐
dential. Do not leave this number
anywhere in your vehicle.
4-05
4
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other immobilizer
keys around. Otherwise the engine
may not start or may stop soon af‐
ter it starts. Keep each key separate
in order to avoid a starting malfunc‐
tion.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch. Metal accesso‐
ries may interrupt the transponder
signal and may prevent the engine
from being started.
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition key
is an important part of the immobil‐
izer system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how‐
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system mal‐
function could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it could
cause the immobilizer system to
malfunction. In this case, have the
system serviced by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Malfunctions caused by improper al‐
terations, adjustments or modifica‐
tions to the immobilizer system are
not covered by your vehicle manu‐
facturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
4-06
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Remote keyless entry system
operations
■ Folding key
■ Smart Key
Lock (1)
All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the
lock button is pressed while all doors
are closed.
The hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked.
However, if any door, engine hood or
tailgate remains open, the hazard
warning lights will not operate. If all
doors, engine hood and tailgate are
closed after the lock button is pressed,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once.
Unlock (2)
All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if
the unlock button is pressed.
The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that all doors are un‐
locked.
After pressing this button, the doors
will lock automatically unless you open
any door within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3) (if equipped)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that the tailgate is un‐
locked.
However, after pressing this button,
the tailgate will lock automatically un‐
less you open the tailgate within
30 seconds.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock auto‐
matically.
With the tailgate locked and the smart
key in your possession, press the tail‐
gate open switch. Then, the tailgate will
be opened.
❈ The word HOLD is written on the
button to inform you that you
must press and hold the button for
1 second.
Transmitter precautions
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any
of the following occurs:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
(Continued)
4-07
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, Kia
recommends to contact an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close prox‐
imity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the trans‐
mitter could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially im‐
portant when the phone is active
such as making call, receiving calls,
text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails.
Avoid placing the transmitter and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket
and maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
CAUTION
• Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufac‐
turer vehicle warranty.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex‐
pressly approved by the party re‐
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. If the keyless entry sys‐
tem is inoperative due to changes or
modifications not expressly ap‐
proved by the party responsible for
compliance, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle warran‐
ty.
Features of your vehicle
4-08
Battery replacement
■ Folding key
■ Smart Key
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
For transmitter replacement, Kia rec‐
ommends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
• The keyless entry system trans‐
mitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, howev‐
er it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or re‐
place the battery, Kia recommends
to contact an authorized Kia deal‐
er/ service partner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter or smart key to
malfunction. Be sure to use the
correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter
or smart key, don't drop it, get it
wet, or expose it to heat or sun‐
light.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed battery
can be harmful to the environment
and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
4-09
4
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OXM043002
With a smart key, you can lock or un‐
lock a door (and tailgate) and even
start the engine without inserting the
key.
The functions of buttons on a smart
key are similar to the folding key.
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock
and unlock the vehicle doors (and tail‐
gate). Also, you may start the engine.
Refer to the following, for more details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the front out‐
side door handles with all doors (and
tailgate) closed and any door unlocked,
locks all the doors (and tailgate). If all
doors (and tailgate) and engine hood
are closed, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that all doors
(and tailgate) are locked.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the outside door handle. If you
want to make sure that a door has
locked or not, you should check the
door lock button inside the vehicle or
pull the outside door handle.
Even though you press the outside door
handle buttons, the doors will not lock
and the chime will sound for 3 seconds
if any of following occur:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the tailgate is open.
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the front out‐
side door handles with all doors (and
tailgate) closed and locked, unlocks all
the doors (and tailgate). The hazard
warning lights blink twice to indicate
that all doors (and tailgate) are un‐
locked.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the outside door handle.
Features of your vehicle
4-10
When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from
the front outside door handle, other
people can also open the door without
possession of the smart key.
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless you open
any door within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlocking
If you are within 0.7 m ~ 1 m
(28 ~ 40 in.) from the outside tailgate
handle, with your smart key in posses‐
sion, the tailgate will unlock and open
when you press the tailgate handle
switch.
The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that the tailgate is un‐
locked.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock auto‐
matically.
Start-up
You can start the engine without in‐
serting the key. For detailed informa‐
tion, refer to Starting the engine with
a smart key on page 6-07.
Smart key precautions
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to
lose your smart key, you will not
be able to start the engine. Tow
the vehicle, if necessary, contact a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to contact an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you lose a smart key, Kia recom‐
mends to contact an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a ra‐
dio transmitter such as a radio
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two-way radio system or a cel‐
lular phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
When the smart key does not
work properly, open and close the
door with the mechanical key. If
you have a problem with the
smart key, Kia recommends to
contact an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
• If the smart key is in close proxim‐
ity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially im‐
portant when the phone is active
such as making call, receiving calls,
text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
smart key and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain ade‐
quate distance between the two
devices.
4-11
4
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from wa‐
ter or any liquid. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to expo‐
sure to water or liquids, it will not be
covered by your manufacturer’s ve‐
hicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
4-12
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm
system will have a label attached to the
vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide pro‐
tection from unauthorized entry into
the car. This system is operated in
three stages: the first is the "Armed"
stage, the second is the "Theft-alarm"
stage, and the third is the "Disarmed"
stage. If triggered, the system provides
an audible alarm with blinking of the
hazard warning lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tail‐
gate) and the engine hood are
closed and latched.
3. • Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handle with the smart key in
your possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
operate once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the
doors won't lock and the chime
will sound for 3 seconds. Close
the door and try again to lock the
doors.
If tailgate or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights
won't operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if the tail‐
gate and engine hood are closed,
the hazard warning lights will
blink once.
4-13
4
Features of your vehicle
• Lock the doors by pressing the
lock button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will operate once to indicate that
the system is armed.
If any door (and tailgate) or en‐
gine hood remains open, the haz‐
ard warning lights won't operate
and theft-alarm will not arm. Af‐
ter this, if all doors (and tailgate)
and engine hood are closed, the
hazard warning lights blink once.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition
switch.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tail‐
gate), the engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (and tailgate) or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights won't operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. After this,
if all doors (and tailgate) and engine
hood are closed, the hazard warn‐
ing lights blink once.
•
Do not arm the system until all pas‐
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining pas‐
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any
door, tailgate or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after en‐
tering the armed stage, the system
is disarmed to prevent unnecessary
alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A door is opened without using the
transmitter (or smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 30 seconds. To turn
off the system, unlock the doors with
the transmitter (or smart key).
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the ON po‐
sition for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started.
After the doors are unlocked, the haz‐
ard warning lights will blink twice to in‐
dicate that the system is disarmed.
Features of your vehicle
4-14
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within
30 seconds, the system will be re‐
armed.
NOTICE
n
Non-immobilizer system
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key in‐
to the ignition switch, turn the ig‐
nition switch to the ON position
and wait for 30 seconds. Then the
system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
n
Immobilizer system
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key in‐
to the ignition switch and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction. Have the system serv‐
iced by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Malfunctions caused by improper al‐
terations, adjustments or modifica‐
tions to the theft-alarm system are
not covered by your vehicle manu‐
facturer warranty.
4-15
4
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock and toward the front
of the vehicle to unlock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a
key, the doors will lock/unlock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/
unlock automatically. (if equipped)
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once to
unlock the driver’s door and once
more within 4 seconds to unlock all
doors. (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
Transmitter/Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key).
(if equipped)
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
pressing the button of the outside
door handle with the smart key in
your possession.
• From the driver's door, press the un‐
lock button once to unlock the driv‐
er's door and once more within 4 sec‐
onds to unlock all doors. (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door
locks and door mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked mul‐
tiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop op‐
erating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
WARNING
• If you don't close the door secure‐
ly, the door may open again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
Features of your vehicle
4-16
WARNING
If people must spend a longer time in
the vehicle while it is very hot or cold
outside, there is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle
from the outside when there are
people in it.
CAUTION
Do not frequently repeat opening
and closing of doors, or apply exces‐
sive force to a door while the door
closer is operating.
In case of an emergency (if
equipped)
If the power door lock switch does not
operate electrically, the only way to
lock the door(s) is with the mechanical
key from the outside key hole.
Doors without the outside key hole,
you can lock the door as follows:
1. Open the door.
2. Insert the key into the emergency
door lock hole and turn the key
horizontally to lock (1).
3. Close the door securely.
NOTICE
Once the tailgate is closed when the
power door lock switch does not op‐
erate electrically, you will not be
able to open the tailgate.
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door handle
Front door
If the inner door handle is pulled when
the door is locked, the door will unlock
and open.
4-17
4
Features of your vehicle
Rear door
If the inner door handle is pulled once
when the door is locked, the door will
unlock.
If the inner door handle is pulled once
more, the door will open.
WARNING
n
Door lock malfunction
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehicle,
try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously pull‐
ing on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out‐
side.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
WARNING
Do not pull the inner door handle of
driver's (or passenger's) door while
the vehicle is moving.
With central door lock/unlock
switch
It is operated by pressing the door lock/
unlock switch.
• When you press the central door lock
switch, all vehicle doors will lock and
the indicator light on the switch will
illuminate.
• If any front door is opened when the
switch is pressed, all doors will not
lock.
• If any door is unlocked, the indicator
of the central door lock switch will go
off.
• When you press the central door un‐
lock switch, all vehicle doors will un‐
lock.
• If one of the rear door is unlocked
while all doors are locked, the indica‐
tor will blink.
NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
transmitter or smart key, the doors
cannot be unlocked with the central
door lock/ unlock switch.
WARNING
n
Doors
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-18
(Continued)
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle
is in motion to prevent accidental
opening of the door. Locked doors
will also discourage potential in‐
truders when the vehicle stops or
slows down.
• Be careful when opening doors and
watch for vehicles, motorcycles,
bicycles or pedestrians approach‐
ing the vehicle in the path of the
door. Opening a door when some‐
thing is approaching can cause
damage or injury.
WARNING
n
Unlocked vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can in‐
vite theft or possible harm to you or
others from someone hiding in your
vehicle while you are gone. Always
remove the ignition key, engage the
parking brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving your ve‐
hicle unattended.
WARNING
n
Unattended children
An enclosed vehicle can become ex‐
tremely hot, causing death or severe
injury to unattended children or ani‐
mals who cannot escape the vehicle.
Furthermore, children might operate
features of the vehicle that could in‐
jure them, or they could encounter
other harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended
in your vehicle.
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock after
an impact causes the air bags to de‐
ploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h. And all doors will be automat‐
ically unlocked when you turn the en‐
gine off and when you remove the igni‐
tion key. (if equipped)
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally
opening the rear doors from inside the
vehicle. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children are in
the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
the hole and turn it to the lock ( )
position. When the child safety lock
is in the lock position, the rear door
will not open even though the inner
door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
4-19
4
Features of your vehicle
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be un‐
locked, the rear door will not open by
pulling the inner door handle until the
rear door child safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING
n
Rear door locks
If children accidentally open the rear
doors while the vehicle is in motion,
they could fall out and be severely
injured or killed. To prevent children
from opening the rear doors from
the inside, the rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
4-20
TAILGATE
Opening the tailgate
OYB047039D
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key)
or central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle and
pulling it up.
• When all doors are lock if the tailgate
unlock button on the smart key is
pressed for more than 1 second, the
tailgate is unlocked. Once the tailgate
is opened and then closed, the tail‐
gate is locked automatically.
❈ There is not the key hole.
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail‐
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the tailgate is not closed
prior to driving.
Closing the tailgate
OYB047016D
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
that the tailgate is securely latched.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and oth‐
er parts of your body are safely out
of the way before closing the tail‐
gate.
4-21
4
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tail‐
gate latch and striker while closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tail‐
gate's latch.
WARNING
n
Exhaust fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to vehi‐
cle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all win‐
dows open so that additional outside
air comes into the vehicle.
The tailgate lid should be always
kept completely closed while the ve‐
hicle is in motion. If it is left open or
ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness or
death may result.
WARNING
n
Rear cargo area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware of
the location of the emergency tail‐
gate safety release lever in the ve‐
hicle and how to open the tailgate
if you are accidentally locked in the
luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to occu‐
py the luggage compartment of
the vehicle at any time. The lug‐
gage compartment is a very dan‐
gerous location in the event of a
crash.
• Use the release lever for emergen‐
cies only. Use with extreme cau‐
tion, especially while the vehicle is
in motion.
Emergency tailgate safety
release
OYB047017D
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer‐
gency tailgate safety release lever lo‐
cated on the bottom of the tailgate.
When someone is inadvertently locked
in the luggage compartment.
The tailgate can be opened by doing as
follows:
1. Input the mechanical key into the
hole.
2. Push the mechanical key to the
right (1).
3. Push up the tailgate.
Features of your vehicle
4-22
WINDOWS
1. Driver’s door power window switch
2. Front passenger’s door power win‐
dow switch
3. Rear door (left) power window
switch
*
4. Rear door (right) power window
switch
*
5. Window opening and closing
6.
Automatic power window up
*
/
down
*
(Driver’s window)
7.
Power window lock switch
*
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win‐
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
Power windows (if equipped)
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
*
if equipped
4-23
4
Features of your vehicle
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The
driver has a power window lock switch
which can block the operation rear pas‐
senger windows. The power windows
can be operated for approximately
30 seconds after the ignition key is re‐
moved or turned to the ACC or LOCK
position. However, if the front doors
open, the power windows cannot be
operated within the 30 second period
after ignition key removal (if equipped).
If the window cannot be close because
it is blocked by objects, remove the ob‐
jects and close the window.
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equip‐
ped) in an open (or partially open po‐
sition), your vehicle may demon‐
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is a normal occur‐
rence and can be reduced or elimina‐
ted by taking the following actions.
If the noise occurs with one or both
of the rear windows down, partially
lower both front windows approxi‐
(Continued)
(Continued)
mately one inch. If you experience
the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sun‐
roof opening.
WARNING
Do not install any accessories in the
area of windows. It may impact jam
protection.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the cor‐
responding switch to the first detent
position (5).
Features of your vehicle
4-24
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win‐
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or lifts the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the win‐
dow is in operation, pull up or press and
release the switch to the opposite di‐
rection of the movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 sec‐
ond after the window is completely
closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window
is blocked by an object or part of the
body, the window will detect the resist‐
ance and will stop upward movement.
The window will then lower approxi‐
mately 30 cm (11.8 in.) to allow the ob‐
ject to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window will
stop upward movement then lower ap‐
proximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal feature,
the automatic window reversal will not
operate.
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for
the driver’s window is only active
when the auto up feature is used
by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not
operate if the window is raised using
the halfway position on the power
window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions be‐
fore raising any window to avoid in‐
(Continued)
4-25
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
juries or vehicle damage. If an object
less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
is caught between the window glass
and the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may not
detect the resistance and will not
stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
The automatic reverse feature
doesn't active while resetting power
window system.
Make sure body parts or other ob‐
jects are safely out of the way be‐
fore closing the windows to avoid in‐
juries or vehicle damage.
Power window lock button (if
equipped)
• The driver can disable the power win‐
dow switches on the rear passenger
doors by pressing the power window
lock button located on the driver’s
door to the LOCK position (pressed).
• When the power window lock button
is in the LOCK position (pressed), the
driver’s master control can operate
all power windows. Also, the front
passenger’s control can operate the
front passenger’s power window.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to the
power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and the
individual door window switch in
opposite directions at the same
time. If this is done, the window
will stop and cannot be opened or
closed.
WARNING
n
Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key in the
vehicle with unsupervised children,
when the engine is running.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-26
(Continued)
• NEVER leave any child unattended
in the vehicle. Even very young
children may inadvertently cause
the vehicle to move, entangle
themselves in the windows, or
otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the
way before closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the driv‐
er’s door power window lock but‐
ton in the LOCK position (pressed).
Serious injury can result from un‐
intentional window operation by
the child.
• Do not extend a face or arms out‐
side through the window opening
while driving.
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
WARNING
When opening or closing the win‐
dows, make sure your passenger's
arms, hands and body are safely out
of the way.
4-27
4
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood
OYB047022B
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P(Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the 1st
(First) gear or R (Reverse) for man‐
ual transaxle, and setting the park‐
ing brake.
OYB047023D
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the secon‐
dary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
OYB047024D
3. Pull the support rod from the hood.
4. Hold the hood open with the sup‐
port rod.
WARNING
n
Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The rubber will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is hot.
Hood open warning (if equipped)
OYB046122B
The warning message will appear on
the LCD display when hood is open.
The warning chime will operate when
the vehicle is being driven at or above
3 km/h (2 mph) with the hood open.
Features of your vehicle
4-28
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart‐
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com‐
bustible material must be re‐
moved from the engine compart‐
ment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30
cm above the closed position and
let it drop. Make sure that it locks
into place.
4. Check that the hood has engaged
properly. If the hood can be raised
slightly, it is not properly engaged.
Open it again and close it with a lit‐
tle more force.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing the
hood with an obstruction present
in the hood opening may result in
property damage or severe per‐
sonal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched be‐
fore driving away. If it is not latch‐
ed, the hood could fly open while
the vehicle is being driven, causing
a total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole provided
in the hood whenever you inspect
the engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling and
possibly injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood raised. The view will be
blocked and the hood could fall or
be damaged.
4-29
4
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
OYB047025B
The fuel-filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the
fuel-filler lid opener located on the
front floor area on the driver’s seat.
NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid will not open be‐
cause ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the lid to break the
ice and release the lid. Do not pry on
the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
OYB047026D
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull up the
fuel filler lid opener.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is se‐
curely closed.
WARNING
n
Refueling
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-30
(Continued)
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin and
thus subject you to the risk of fire
and burns. Always remove the fuel
cap carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the condi‐
tion stops before completely re‐
moving the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when re‐
fueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci‐
dent.
WARNING
n
Refueling dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable ma‐
terials. When refueling, please note
the following guidelines carefully.
Failure to follow these guidelines
may result in severe personal injury,
(Continued)
(Continued)
severe burns or death by fire or ex‐
plosion.
• Read and follow all warnings at
the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-
Off, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis‐
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle once
you have begun refueling since you
can generate static electricity by
touching, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric (polyester, sat‐
in, nylon, etc.) capable of produc‐
ing static electricity. Static elec‐
tricity discharge can ignite fuel va‐
pors resulting in rapid burning. If
you must reenter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate poten‐
tially dangerous static electricity
discharge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source.
• When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place the
container on the ground prior to
refueling. Static electricity dis‐
charge from the container can ig‐
nite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, contact
with the vehicle should be main‐
tained until the filling is complete.
Use only approved portable plastic
fuel containers designed to carry
and store gasoline.
(Continued)
4-31
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellu‐
lar phones can potentially ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are secure‐
ly closed, before starting the en‐
gine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at a
gas station especially during refu‐
eling. Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when ignited,
result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refuel‐
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi‐
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart‐
ment. Follow any safety instruc‐
tions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the Fuel require‐
ments on page 1-03 .
• If the fuel filler cap requires re‐
placement, please make sure that
you use parts designed for re‐
placement in your vehicle.
An incorrect fuel filler cap can re‐
sult in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system. For more detailed infor‐
mation, Kia recommends to con‐
tact an authorized Kia dealer/serv‐
ice partner.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an ac‐
cident.
Features of your vehicle
4-32
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with a sun‐
roof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof
with the sunroof control lever located
on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sun‐
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After a vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof be‐
fore operating it.
CAUTION
• Do not continue to move the sun‐
roof control lever after the sun‐
roof is fully opened, closed, or til‐
ted. Damage to the motor or sys‐
tem components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is open, rain or snow
may leak through the sunroof and
wet the interior as well as cause
theft.
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot slide when it is
in the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or sun‐
shade while driving. This could result
in loss of control and an accident
that may cause death, serious in‐
jury, or property damage.
WARNING
• In order to prevent accidental op‐
eration of the sunroof, especially
by a child, do not let a child oper‐
ate the sunroof.
• Do not sit on the top of the vehi‐
cle. It may cause vehicle damage.
4-33
4
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever forward.
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward
to the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will slide to the
recommended open position (about
5 cm before the maximum slide open
position).
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
push the sunroof control lever momen‐
tarily.
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward
to the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will automatical‐
ly close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
push the sunroof control lever momen‐
tarily.
NOTICE
To reduce wind noise while driving, it
is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 5cm(2in.) before the
maximum slide open position).
WARNING
Make sure heads, other body parts
or other objects are safely out of the
way before closing the window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 4 mm (0.16 inch) in
diameter caught between the sun‐
roof glass and the front window
channel may not be detected by the
(Continued)
(Continued)
automatic reverse window and the
window will not stop and reverse di‐
rection.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is de‐
tected while the sunroof is closing au‐
tomatically, it will reverse the direction,
and then stop.
Features of your vehicle
4-34
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You
should always check that all passengers
and objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
WARNING
• Never try pinching any part of
your body intentionally to activate
the Automatic reversal function.
• The Automatic reversal function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the sunroof
fully closes.
Tilting the sunroof
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
To close the sunroof, push the sunroof
lever forward until the sunroof moves
to the desired position.
WARNING
• Make sure heads, other body parts
or other objects are safely out of
the way before closing the sunroof
to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never adjust the sunroof or sun‐
shade while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control re‐
sulting in an accident.
• To avoid serious injury or death, do
not extend your head, arms or
body outside the sunroof while
driving.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the glass
or the motor could be damaged.
• While using sunroof for a long
time, a dust between sunroof and
roof panel can make a noise.
Open the sunroof and remove reg‐
ularly the dust using clean cloth.
• The sunroof is made to slide to‐
gether with sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
4-35
4
Features of your vehicle
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with the
glass panel automatically when the
glass panel is slid. You will have to close
it manually if you want it closed.
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol‐
lowings)
-
Battery is discharged or disconnected
or the related fuse has been replaced
or disconnected.
-
The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate.
1. The ignition switch must be in the
ON position.
2. Close the sunroof completely.
3. Release the control lever.
4. Push the control lever forward until
the sunroof tilts and slightly moves
up and down. Then, release lever.
5. Push the control lever forward until
the sunroof is operated as follows:
TILT OPEN
SLIDE OPEN SLIDE
CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
If the sunroof does not operate proper‐
ly after resetting, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is blown,
the sunroof may operate improper‐
ly.
Features of your vehicle
4-36
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering
Power steering uses the motor to as‐
sist you in steering the vehicle. If the
engine is off or if the power steering
system becomes inoperative, the vehi‐
cle may still be steered, but it will re‐
quire increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by the power steering con‐
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque, steering wheel position
and vehicle speed to command the mo‐
tor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and be‐
comes lighter as the vehicle’s speed de‐
creases for better control of the steer‐
ing wheel.
Should you notice any change in the ef‐
fort required to steer during normal ve‐
hicle operation, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not il‐
luminate.
• The steering effort is high imme‐
diately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the
system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
is completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or LOCK
position.
• Motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the Electric Power Steering Sys‐
tem does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer‐
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally. In
this case, have the system inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• The steering effort increases if
the steering wheel is rotated con‐
tinuously when the vehicle is not
in motion. However, after a few
minutes, it will return to its normal
conditions.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor‐
mal noise could occur. If tempera‐
ture rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
(Continued)
4-37
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When the charging system warn‐
ing light comes on or the voltage is
low (When the alternator (or bat‐
tery) does not operate normally or
it malfunctions), the steering
wheel may get heavy and become
difficult to control operate abnor‐
mally.
Tilt & telescopic steering (if
equipped)
A tilt and telescopic steering wheel al‐
lows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.
You can also raise it to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi‐
tioned so that it is comfortable for you
to drive, while permitting you to see
the instrument panel warning lights
and gauges.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be cer‐
tain it is locked in position.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1), ad‐
just the steering wheel to the desired
angle (2) and height (3, if equipped),
then pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure
to adjust the steering wheel to the de‐
sired position before driving.
Features of your vehicle
4-38
Heated steering wheel (if
equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering
wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button will
illuminate.
To turn the steering wheel off, press
the button once again. The indicator on
the button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approxi‐
mately 30 minutes after the heated
steering wheel is turned on.
If you turn off the ignition within 30
minutes after pressing the steering
wheel heater button, from next ignition
ON, the heater will be off.
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated steering
wheel, do not use an organic sol‐
vent such as paint thinner, ben‐
zene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of the
steering wheel.
• If the surface of steering wheel is
damaged by sharp object, damage
to the heated steering wheel com‐
ponents could occur.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym‐
bols on your steering wheel. Check the
horn regularly to be sure it operates
properly.
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area in‐
dicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this
area is pressed.
4-39
4
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
Features of your vehicle
4-40
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Make this adjustment before you start
driving.
WARNING
n
Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and an
accident which could cause death,
serious injury or property damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident or
deployment of the air bag.
Day/night rearview mirror (if
equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is
in the day position (1).
Pull the day/night lever toward you (2)
to reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some rear‐
view clarity in the night position.
❈ (1) : Day, (2) : Night
4-41
4
Features of your vehicle
Electrochromic mirror (ECM) (if
equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automati‐
cally controls the glare from the head‐
lights of the vehicles behind you in
nighttime or low light driving condi‐
tions. The sensor (3) mounted in the
mirror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls the
headlight glare from the vehicles be‐
hind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatical‐
ly go to the brightest setting in order
to improve the drivers view behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a pa‐
per towel or similar material damp‐
ened with glass cleaner. Do not
spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror. It may cause the liquid clean‐
er to enter the mirror housing.
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi‐
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function off.
The mirror indicator light (2) will turn
off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light (2) will illu‐
minate.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The
mirror heads can be folded back to pre‐
vent damage during an automatic car
wash or when passing in a narrow
street.
WARNING
n
Rearview mirrors
• The outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to determine
the actual distance of following
vehicles when changing lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror face;
this may damage the surface of the
glass. If ice should restrict move‐
ment of the mirror, do not force the
mirror for adjustment. To remove
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-42
(Continued)
ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi‐
ator antifreeze) to release the fro‐
zen mechanism or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle is
moving. This could result in loss of
control, and an accident which could
cause death, serious injury or prop‐
erty damage.
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the position
of the left and right outside rearview
mirrors. To adjust the position of either
mirror, the ignition switch should be in
the ACC position.
To adjust the position of either mirror,
press the R or L button (1) to select the
right side mirror or the left side mirror,
then press a corresponding point (
)
on the mirror adjustment control to po‐
sition the selected mirror up, down, left
or right.
After adjustment, press the R or L but‐
ton again to prevent the inadvertent
adjustment.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting
angles, but the motor continues to
operate while the switch is press‐
ed. Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor may be
damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out‐
side rearview mirror by hand. Do‐
ing so may damage the parts.
4-43
4
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric Type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror, de‐
press the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the ig‐
nition switch is in the OFF position.
However, to prevent unnecessary
battery discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary while
the engine is not running.
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
OYB046034B
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
4-44
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
OYB046100/OYB046101C
Type A
Type B
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to Gauges
on page 4-48.
4-45
4
Features of your vehicle
OYB047102/OYB047103
Type C
Type D
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to Gauges
on page 4-48.
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination (if equipped)
OYB047035B
Features of your vehicle
4-46
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument cluster
while driving. This could result in loss
of control and lead to an accident
that may cause death, serious in‐
jury, or property damage.
The brightness of the instrument panel
illumination is changed by pressing the
illumination control button (+ or -)
when the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is ON, or the tail
lights are turned on.
OYB046120B
Type A, B cluster
OYB046121B
Type C, D cluster
• If you hold the illumination control
button (+ or -), the brightness will
be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the max‐
imum or minimum level, an alarm will
sound.
LCD Window Control
The LCD Window modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
-
Type A
(1) TRIP: TRIP button for changing
modes.
(2) RESET:
RESET button for reset‐
ting the selected item.
-
Type B
(1)
:
MODE button for change
the LCD MODES
4-47
4
Features of your vehicle
(2) / :
MOVE scroll switch for se‐
lect the items
(3) OK: SET/RESET button for set
the items or reset the
items
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to LCD
windows on page 4-53.
Gauges
Speedometer
■ Type A (km/h)
■ Type B
(MPH, km/h)
The speedometer indicates the speed
of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles
per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per
hour (km/h).
Features of your vehicle
4-48
Tachometer
■ Type A
■ Type B
The tachometer indicates the approxi‐
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor‐
rect shift points and to prevent lugging
and/or over-revving the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within the
tachometer's RED ZONE. This may
cause severe engine damage.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
■ Type A (for Except Europe)
■ Type B (for Europe)
4-49
4
Features of your vehicle
This gauge indicates the temperature
of the engine coolant when the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop button is
ON.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
130 or H position, it indicates over‐
heating that may damage the en‐
gine.
Do not continue driving with an over‐
heated engine. If your vehicle over‐
heats, refer to If the Engine Over‐
heats on page 7-07.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. The engine coolant
is under pressure and could severely
burn. Wait until the engine is cool be‐
fore adding coolant to the reservoir.
Fuel gauge
OYB046108B
Type A (for Except Europe)
■ Type B (for Europe)
This gauge indicates the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
Recommended lubricants and ca‐
pacities on page 9-13.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or
the low fuel warning light may
come on earlier than usual due to
the movement of fuel in the tank.
WARNING
n
Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose vehi‐
cle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional
fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
0 or E (Empty) level.
Features of your vehicle
4-50
CAUTION
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag‐
ing the catalytic converter.
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis‐
tance that the vehicle has been driven
and should be used to determine when
periodic maintenance should be per‐
formed.
-
Odometer range: 0 ~ 1,599,999 km or
999,999 miles.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out‐
side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
-
Temperature range :
-
Type A : - 40°C ~ 85°C (- 40°F ~
199°F)
-
Type B : - 40°C ~ 85°C (- 40°F ~
211°F)
The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a
general thermometer to prevent the
driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit (from
°C to °F or from °F to °C)
• Type A,B Cluster
Press the TRIP button for 5 seconds
and more.
• Type C, D Cluster
The temperature unit can be changed
by using the User Settings mode of
the LCD Windows.
❈ For more details, refer to LCD Win‐
dows on page 4-53.
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
• Park :P
4-51
4
Features of your vehicle
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator in
Sports Mode (if equipped)
In the Sports Mode, this indicator in‐
forms which gear is desired while driv‐
ing to save fuel.
• Shifting up :
2
,
3
,
4
For example
:
Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or
1st gear).
When the system is not working prop‐
erly, the indicator is not displayed.
Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator (if
equipped)
OYB046137B
This indicator informs which gear is de‐
sired while driving to save fuel.
-
For 5 speed transmission
- Shifting up :
2
,
3
,
4
,
5
-
Shifting down :
3
,
4
-
For 6 speed transmission
- Shifting up :
2
,
3
,
4
,
5
,
6
-
Shifting down :
3
,
4
,
5
For example
:
Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or
1st gear).
:
Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current‐
ly the shift lever is in the 4th,
5th, or 6th gear).
When the system is not working prop‐
erly, the indicator is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
4-52
LCD WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Overview
OYB046131B
For type C, D cluster
LCD windows show the following vari‐
ous information to drivers.
-
Trip information
-
LCD modes
-
Warning messages
Trip information (Trip computer)
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system
that displays information related to
driving.
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
- For Type A, B cluster
Tripmeter [A]
Elapsed Time [A]
Average Vehicle Speed [A]
TRIP A
Tripmeter [B]
Elapsed Time [B]
Average Vehicle Speed [B]
TRIP B
Distance To Empty
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Service reminder
Service
Speed On/Off
Speed
4-53
4
Features of your vehicle
To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button.
- For Type C, D cluster
Tripmeter
Fuel Economy
Timer
Accumulated Info
Tripmeter
Fuel Economy
Timer
Digital speedometer
Drive Info
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
TRIP
To change the trip mode, scroll the
MOVE scroll switch ( / ) in the trip
computer mode.
Trip A/B (for Type A, B cluster)
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis‐
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range : 0 ~ 1599999 km
or 0 ~ 999999 mi
• To reset the tripmeter, press the RE‐
SET button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the trip‐
meter is displayed.
Elapsed Time (2)
• The elapsed time is the total driving
time since the last elapsed time re‐
set.
- Time range (hh:mm) : 00:00 ~
99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
RESET button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
Average Vehicle Speed (3)
• The average vehicle speed is calcula‐
ted by the total driving distance and
driving time since the last average
vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range : 0 ~ 250 km/h or mph
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET button on the steer‐
ing wheel for more than 1 second
when the average vehicle speed is
displayed.
Features of your vehicle
4-54
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not
displayed if the driving distance is
less than 50 meters or the driving
time is less than 10 seconds since
the ignition switch is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
Fuel Economy
OYB046128C
Type A, B cluster
OYB046127C
Type C, D cluster
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the estima‐
ted distance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 1 ~ 9,999 km or
1 ~ 9,999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will
display "---" as distance to empty.
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been in‐
terrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correct‐
ly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not regis‐
ter additional fuel if less than
6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are
added to the vehicle.
(Continued)
4-55
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehi‐
cle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcula‐
ted by the total driving distance and
fuel consumption since the last aver‐
age fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 99.9km/L,
L/100 km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be re‐
set both manually and automatically.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET (for Type A,
B cluster), OK ( for Type C, D cluster)
(reset) on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average fuel
economy is displayed.
Automatic reset (for type C, D cluster)
To make the average fuel economy be
reset automatically whenever refueling,
select the Fuel economy auto reset
mode in User Setting menu of the LCD
Windows (Refer to LCD Windows on
page 4-53).
• OFF - You may set to default man‐
ually by using the trip switch reset
button.
• When driving - The vehicle will auto‐
matically set to default once 4 hours
pass after the Ignition is in OFF.
• When refueling - After refueling
more than 6 liters and driving over
1 km/h, the vehicle will reset to de‐
fault automatically.
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis‐
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters
n
(0.03 miles)
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds
when the vehicle speed is more than
10 km/h (6.2 mph).
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 30 km/L, L/100 km or
0.0 ~ 50.0 MPG
Accumulated driving information
mode (for type C, D cluster)
OYB047139LB
Displays accumulated information
starting from mileage/fuel efficiency/
time default point.
Features of your vehicle
4-56
• Accumulated information is calcula‐
ted after the vehicle has run for more
than 300 meters.
• If you press OK button for more
than 1 second after the Cumulative
Information is displayed, the infor‐
mation will be reset.
• If the engine is running, even when
the vehicle is not in motion, the infor‐
mation will be accumulated.
One time driving information mode
(for type C, D cluster)
OYB047138LB
The vehicle will display Driving Informa‐
tion once per one ignition cycle.
• Fuel efficiency is calculated after the
vehicle has run for more than
300 meters.
• The Driving Information will be reset
4 hours after ignition has been
turned off. So, when the vehicle igni‐
tion is turned on within 4 hours, the
information will not be reset.
• If you press OK button for more
than 1 second after the Driving Infor‐
mation is displayed, the information
will be reset.
• If the engine is running, even when
the vehicle is not in motion, the infor‐
mation will be accumulated.
Digital speedometer
OYB046130B
Type A, B cluster
OYB046129B
Type C, D cluster
This mode displays the current speed
of the vehicle.
4-57
4
Features of your vehicle
LCD Modes (for type C,D cluster)
1. Trip Computer mode
This mode displays driving informa‐
tion like the tripmeter, fuel econo‐
my, and so on.
For more details, refer to Trip
computer on page 4-53.
2. Assist mode
- : This mode displays the state
of the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System, Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) and pressure
state of tire pressure.
- : This mode displays the state
of tire pressure.
3. User Setting mode
On this mode, you can change set‐
tings of the doors, lamps and so on.
4. Master warning mode
This mode informs of warning
messages related to TPMS fail, low
pressure (if equipped) or Low en‐
gine oil (if equipped) or Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)
System (if equipped) or Blind-spot
collision warning (BCW) (if equip‐
ped) failure.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, re‐
fer to LCD window Control on
page 4-47.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
System mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the‐
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System.
❈ For more information, refer to
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
System on page 6-62.
Service Mode
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance service
(mileage or days).
Features of your vehicle
4-58
If the remaining mileage or time rea‐
ches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30 days,
Service in message is displayed for
several seconds each time you set the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the already inputted serv‐
ice interval, Service required message
is displayed for several seconds each
time you set the ignition switch or En‐
gine Start/Stop Button to the ON posi‐
tion.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
• Press the RESET button for more
than 1 second. (for Type A, B cluster)
• Press the OK button (Reset) for more
than 1 second. (for Type C, D cluster)
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions oc‐
curs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
User Settings Mode (for type C,
D cluster)
On this mode, you can change setting
of the doors, lamps, and so on.
WARNING
Do not adjust the User Setting while
driving. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
Edit settings after shifting to P/
Edit settings after engaging
parking brake
This warning message appears if you
try to adjust the User Settings while
driving.
-
Automatic transaxle
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle, ap‐
plying the parking brake and moving
the shift lever to P (Park).
-
Manual transaxle
For your safety, change the User
Settings after engaging the parking
brake.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
• Driver Attention Warning (DAW) (if
equipped)
To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver
Attention Warning (DAW).
- Off/Normal/Early
❈ For more information, refer to the
Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
on page 6-66.
•
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
(FCA) (if equipped) : If this item is
checked, the FCA function will be ac‐
tivated.
❈ For more details, refer to Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) on
page 6-53.
•
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) (if
equipped) : Choose the sensitivity of
the forward collision warning.
- Late/Normal/Early
❈ For more details, refer to Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) on
page 6-53.
4-59
4
Features of your vehicle
• Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning
(RCCW) (if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the Rear
Cross-Traffic Collision Warning
(RCCW) system.
❈ For more information, refer to
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) on page 6-70.
Door
• Automatic Lock
- Disable : The auto door lock opera‐
tion will be deactivated.
- Enable on Speed : All doors will be
automatically locked when the ve‐
hicle speed exceeds 15 km/h
(9.3 mph).
- Enable on Shift : All doors will be
automatically locked if the auto‐
matic transaxle mission shift lever
is shifted from the P (Park) posi‐
tion to the R (Reverse), N (Neu‐
tral), or D (Drive) position.
•
Automatic Unlock
- Disable : The auto door unlock op‐
eration will be canceled.
- Vehicle Off/Key out (if equipped):
All doors will be automatically un‐
locked when the ignition key is re‐
moved from the ignition switch or
the Engine Star/Stop button is set
to the OFF position.
- On Shift to P : All doors will be au‐
tomatically unlocked if the auto‐
matic transaxle transmission shift
lever is shifted to the P (Park) po‐
sition.
Lights
• One Touch Turn Signal
- Off : The one touch turn signal
function will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change
signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times
when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
❈ For more details, refer to Light on
page 4-80.
•
Head Lamp Delay
- If this item checked, the head lamp
delay function will be activated.
Sound
• Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) (if
equipped)
To activate or deactivate the Blind-
Spot Collision Warning (BCW) sound.
❈ For more information, refer to
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) on page 6-71.
Convenience
• Wiper/Light Display (if equipped) : If
this item checked, the Wiper/Light
Display will be activated.
•
Gear Position Pop-up (if equipped) : If
this item checked, the gear position
pop-up display will be activated.
Service interval
• Service Interval
To activate or deactivate the service
interval function.
• Adjust Interval
To adjust the interval by mileage and
period.
• Reset
To reset the service interval function.
Other Features
• Fuel Economy Auto Reset
- Off : The average fuel economy
will not reset automatically when‐
ever refueling.
Features of your vehicle
4-60
- After Ignition : The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
whenever it has passed 4 hours
after turning OFF the engine.
- After Refueling : The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
when refueling.
• Fuel Economy Unit
To select the fuel economy unit.
(km/L ↔ L/100km, UK gallon ↔ US
gallon)
• Temperature Unit
To select the temperature unit. (°C,
°F)
Language
Choose the language
Reset
You can reset the menus in the User
Settings Mode. All menus in the User
Settings Mode are initialized, except
language and service interval.
Warning messages
Warning messages appear on the LCD
to warn the driver. It is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
The warning message may appear dif‐
ferently depending on the type of in‐
strument cluster and some may not
show the warning message at all.
The warning message is shown in ei‐
ther symbol, symbol and text, or text
type only.
Door, hood, tailgate open
• This warning is displayed indicating
which door, or the hood, or the tail‐
gate is open.
Sunroof open(if equipped)
• This warning is displayed if you turn
off the engine when the sunroof is
open.
Engine has overheated
• This warning message illuminates
when the engine coolant temperature
is above 120°C (248°F). This means
that the engine is overheated and
may be damaged.
❈ If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to Overheating on page 7-07.
4-61
4
Features of your vehicle
Shift to P (for smart key system
and automatic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine with‐
out the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop But‐
ton once more, it will turn to the ON
position).
Low Key Battery (for smart key
system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the battery of the smart key is dis‐
charged when the Engine Start/Stop
Button changes to the OFF position.
Press START button while turning
wheel (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the steering wheel does not unlock
normally when the Engine Start/Stop
Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while turn‐
ing the steering wheel right and left.
Steering wheel unlocked (for smart
key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
Check Steering Wheel Lock System
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the steering wheel does not lock nor‐
mally when the Engine Start/Stop
Button changes to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and
automatic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice by
pressing the button repeatedly with‐
out depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress the
brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and manual
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice by
pressing the button repeatedly with‐
out depressing the clutch pedal.
• It means that you should depress the
clutch pedal to start the engine.
Key not in vehicle (for smart key
system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine Start/
Stop Button.
• It means that you should always have
the smart key with you.
Key not detected (for smart key
system)
• This warning message illuminates if
the smart key is not detected when
you press the Engine Start/Stop But‐
ton.
Features of your vehicle
4-62
Press START button again (for
smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the en‐
gine by pressing the Engine Start/
Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each time
you press the Engine Start/Stop But‐
ton, have the vehicle inspected by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia deal‐
er/service partner.
Press START button with key (for
smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you press the Engine Start/Stop But‐
ton while the warning message Key
not detected is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse (for
smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
the brake switch fuse is disconnec‐
ted.
• It means that you should replace the
fuse with a new one. If that is not
possible, you can start the engine by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop But‐
ton for 10 seconds in the ACC posi‐
tion.
Shift to P or N to start engine (for
smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Check DAW System (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Driver At‐
tention Alert System. In this case, have
the vehicle inspected by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
❈ For more information, refer to
Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
on page 6-66.
Check BCW System (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Blind-Spot
Collision Warning (BCW) system. In this
case, have the vehicle inspected by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
❈ For more information, refer to
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) on page 6-70.
4-63
4
Features of your vehicle
Icy Road Warning Light (if
equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times and
then illuminates, and also warning
chime sounds once.
-
The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below approxi‐
mately 4°C (40°F).
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining
from over-speeding, rapid accelera‐
tion, sudden braking or sharp turn‐
ing, etc.
Features of your vehicle
4-64
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning lights
NOTICE
n
Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situa‐
tion that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the
SRS.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs
the driver that the seat belt
is not fastened.
❈ For more details, refer to the Seat
belts on page 3-13.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the res‐
ervoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is
low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more de‐
tails, refer to Brake Fluid on page
8-52). Then check all brake com‐
ponents for fluid leaks. If any leak
on the brake system is still found,
the warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have the vehicle towed
to a professional workshop and in‐
spected. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diag‐
onal braking systems. This means you
still have braking on two wheels even if
one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal travel
and greater pedal pressure are required
to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion of
the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving,
shift to a lower gear for additional en‐
gine braking and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
4-65
4
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
n
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light il‐
luminates with the parking brake re‐
leased, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the
ABS (the normal braking system will
still be operational without the assis‐
tance of the anti-lock brake system).
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights il‐
luminate at the same time
while driving:
• When the ABS and regular
brake system may not
work normally.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Electronic Brake force Distri‐
bution (EBD) system warning
light
(Continued)
(Continued)
When both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the brake system will not work nor‐
mally and you may experience an
unexpected and dangerous situation
during sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking.
Have the vehicle inspected by a pro‐
fessional workshop as soon as possi‐
ble. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
n
Electronic Brake force Distri‐
bution (EBD) system warning
light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripme‐
ter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-66
(Continued)
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop as
soon as possible.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- This indicator light comes on after
the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and then goes out af‐
ter approximately 3 seconds.
• When there is a malfunction with the
EPS.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with the
emission control system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
n
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction Indica‐
tor Lamp (MIL) on may cause dam‐
age to the emission control systems
which could effect drivability and/or
fuel economy.
CAUTION
n
Gasoline Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic
converter damage is possible which
could result in loss of engine power.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop as
soon as possible.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
n
Diesel Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) blinks, some error related to
the injection quantity adjustment
occurs which could result in loss of
engine power, combustion noise and
poor emission.
In this case, have the engine control
system inspected by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
4-67
4
Features of your vehicle
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with ei‐
ther the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either the
alternator or electrical charging sys‐
tem:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
In this case, have the vehicle in‐
spected by a professional workshop
as soon as possible.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to Engine oil on page
8-46). If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on af‐
ter adding oil or if oil is not availa‐
ble, have the vehicle inspected by a
professional workshop as soon as
possible. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
CAUTION
n
Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
• If the engine does not stop imme‐
diately after the Engine Oil Pres‐
sure Warning Light is illuminated,
severe damage could result.
• If the warning light stays on while
the engine is running, it indicates
that there may be serious engine
damage or malfunction. In this
case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is
low, fill the engine oil to the
proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after the
engine is started, turn the en‐
gine off immediately. In this
case, have the vehicle inspected
by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
Features of your vehicle
4-68
Engine Oil Level Warning
Light (if equipped)
The engine oil level warning
light illuminates when the
engine oil level should be checked.
If the warning light comes on, check the
engine oil level as soon as possible and
add engine oil as required.
Slowly pour the recommended oil little
by little into a funnel.(Oil refill capacity :
Approximately 0.6
l
~1.0
l
)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to Recommended lubricants and ca‐
pacities on page 9-13 .)
Do not overfill the engine oil to ensure
the oil level is not above F mark on the
dipstick.
NOTICE
• If you travel approximately 50 km
after adding the engine oil, the
warning light will go off.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON
3 times within 10 seconds, the
warning light will go off immedi‐
ately. However, when you turn off
the warning light without adding
the engine oil, the light will come
on again after traveling approxi‐
mately 50km.
CAUTION
If the light comes on continuously
after adding the engine oil and trav‐
eling approximately 50 km, have the
vehicle inspected by a professional
workshop as soon as possible. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner. Even if
this light does not come on after the
engine has started, the engine oil
should be checked and supplied peri‐
odically.
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION
n
Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel lev‐
el below 0 or E can cause the en‐
gine to misfire and damage the cat‐
alytic converter (if equipped).
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light (if
equipped)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
4-69
4
Features of your vehicle
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The loca‐
tion of the underinflated tires are
displayed on the LCD display).
❈ For more details, refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) on page 7-08.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the inter‐
vals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with the
TPMS.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop as
soon as possible.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
❈ For more details, refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) on page 7-08.
WARNING
n
Safe Stopping
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The TPMS cannot alert you to se‐
vere and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and
slowly move to a safe position off
the road.
Fuel Filter Warning Light
(Diesel Engine)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When water has accumulated inside
the fuel filter.
In this case, remove the water from
the fuel filter.
❈ For more details, refer to Fuel fil‐
ter on page 8-57.
CAUTION
n
Fuel filter warning light
• When the Fuel Filter Warning Light
illuminates, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
• If you keep driving with the warn‐
ing light on, engine parts (injector,
common rail, high pressure fuel
pump) may be damaged. If this oc‐
curs, have the vehicle inspected by
a professional workshop as soon
as possible. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA)
Warning light (if
equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with the
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
(FCA) Warning system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected
by a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Features of your vehicle
4-70
Overspeed Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• When you drive the vehi‐
cle more than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime also
sound for approximately 5 sec‐
onds.
120
km/h
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• This warning light informs
the driver the following situations
- TPMS failure, low pressure (if
equipped)
- Low engine oil (if equipped)
- Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system (if equipped) failure
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
malfunction (if equipped)
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will turn off.
Exhaust system (DPF)
warning light (Diesel
Engine)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• When there is a malfunction with Die‐
sel Particulate Filter (DPF) system.
• When this warning light illuminates, it
may turn off after driving the vehicle:
- at more than 60 km/h (37 mph), or
- at more than 2nd gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time
(for about 25 minutes).
If this warning light blinks in spite of
the procedure (at this time the LCD
warning message will be displayed),
have the DPF system checked by a pro‐
fessional workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/ service
partner.
CAUTION
n
Diesel Engine with DPF (if
equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you continue to drive with the DPF
warning light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be dam‐
aged and fuel consumption can wor‐
sen.
Door Ajar Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Tailgate Open Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
When the tailgate is not closed secure‐
ly.
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illumi‐
nates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
4-71
4
Features of your vehicle
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the
ESC system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
❈ For more details, refer to Electron‐
ic stability control (ESC) on page
6-36.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light (if
equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system
by pressing the ESC OFF button.
❈ For more details, refer to Electron‐
ic Stability Control (ESC) on page
6-36
.
Auto stop indicator (if
equipped)
This indicator will illuminate
when the engine enters the
Idle Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and
Go) system.
When the automatic starting occurs,
the auto stop indicator on the cluster
will blink for 5 seconds.
❈ For more details, refer to ISG (Idle
stop and go) system on page
6-16.
NOTICE
When the engine automatically
starts by the ISG system, some
warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF,
EPS or Parking brake warning light)
may turn on for a few seconds.
This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean
the system is malfunctioning.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart
Key)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the vehicle detects the immo‐
bilizer in your key properly while the
ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the en‐
gine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
Features of your vehicle
4-72
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with the
immobilizer system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates for up to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the smart
key in the vehicle properly while the
Engine Start/Stop Button is ACC or
ON.
- At this time, you can start the en‐
gine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few sec‐
onds:
• When the smart key is not in the ve‐
hicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect the
smart key which is in the vehicle
while the Engine Start/Stop Button is
ON.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key is
weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
Starting the Engine on page
6-07).
• When there is a malfunction with the
immobilizer system.
In this case, have the vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn
signal light on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may a malfunction with the turn signal
system. In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
- The indicator light does not blink but
illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more rapid‐
ly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate
at all.
Low Beam Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the headlights are on.
High beam assist
indicator (if equipped)
This warning light illumi‐
nates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light position.
4-73
4
Features of your vehicle
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the high beam as‐
sist system will switch the high beam
to low beam automatically.
❈ For more details, refer to High
beam assist on page 4-88.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the tail lights or
headlights are on.
Front Fog Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Rear Fog Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the rear fog lights are on.
Glow Indicator Light
(Diesel Engine)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the engine is being preheated
with the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button in the ON position.
- The engine can be started after
the glow indicator light goes off.
- The illumination time varies with
the engine coolant temperature,
air temperature, and battery con‐
dition.
If the indicator light remains on or
blinks after the engine has warmed up
or while driving, there may a malfunc‐
tion with the engine preheating sys‐
tem.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected
by a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
NOTICE
n
Engine Preheating
If the engine does not start within
10 seconds after the preheating is
completed, set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the
LOCK or OFF position for 10 seconds
and then to the ON position in order
to preheat the engine again.
Cruise Indicator Light (if
equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the cruise control
system is enabled.
❈ For more details, refer to Cruise
control system on page 6-43.
CRUISE
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
❈ For more details, refer to Cruise
Control System on page 6-43.
SET
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Indicator Light (if
equipped)
This indicator light illumi‐
nates:
• [White] When the lane departure
warning system does not detect the
lane line.
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by press‐
ing the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) button.
Features of your vehicle
4-74
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction
with the lane departure warning sys‐
tem.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected
by a professional workshop as soon as
possible.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
❈ For more details, refer to Lane De‐
parture Warning (LDW) system on
page 6-62.
4-75
4
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYB047450D
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement
of the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm
(47 in.) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it re‐
place the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The sensing
range and objects detectable by the
back sensors (➀) are limited. Whenever
backing-up, pay as much attention to
what is behind you as you would in a
vehicle without a rear parking assist
system.
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the area
behind the vehicle before and while
backing up.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when back‐
ing up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation
is approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
Indicator
*
When an object is 120 cm
to 61 cm (47 in. to 24 in.)
from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermit‐
tently.
When an object is 60 cm
to 31 cm (23 in. to 12 in.)
from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more fre‐
quently.
When an object is within
30 cm (11 in.) of the rear
bumper:
Buzzer sounds continu‐
ously.
*
if equipped
NOTICE
The indicator may differ from the il‐
lustration as objects or sensors sta‐
tus.
If the indicator blinks, have the sys‐
tem checked by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Features of your vehicle
4-76
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi‐
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gra‐
dient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle en‐
gines, or truck air brakes) are with‐
in range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing.
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign
matter such as snow or water. (The
sensing range will return to normal
when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is ex‐
tremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 in.) in height and narrower
than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound consistently depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-fac‐
tory installed equipment or accesso‐
ries may also interfere with the sen‐
sor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize ob‐
jects less than 30 cm (12 in.) from
the sensor, or it may sense an incor‐
rect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains
are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors; It can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located be‐
(Continued)
4-77
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
tween sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the ve‐
hicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehicle
is driven close to objects on the road,
particularly pedestrians, and espe‐
cially children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by the
sensors, due to the object’s distance,
size or material, all of which can lim‐
it the effectiveness of the sensor.
Always perform a visual inspection
to make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving the
vehicle in any direction.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit‐
tently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system. If this occurs, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu‐
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
Features of your vehicle
4-78
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
OYB047401D
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the navigation display while backing-
up.
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibili‐
ty of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and while backing up be‐
cause there is a dead zone that
can't be seen through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for‐
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
4-79
4
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre‐
vent the battery from being dis‐
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will be turned off automatically if the
driver parks on the side of road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
(smart key: turns off the engine) per‐
form the following:
1. Open the driver-side door.
2. Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight escort function (if
equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) will
remain on for approximately 5 minutes
after the ignition key is removed when
the engine is turned off. However, if
the driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans‐
mitter (or smart key) twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off au‐
tomatically. Therefore, it causes the
battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Headlight welcome function (if
equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON
or AUTO position and all doors (and tail‐
gate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the trans‐
mitter (or smart key), the headlights
will come on for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate
at night.
At this time, if you press the door un‐
lock button again or door lock button
on the transmitter (or smart key), the
headlights will turn off immediately.
Features of your vehicle
4-80
Lighting control
■ Type A
■ Type B
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
1. Off position
2. Auto light position (if equipped)
3. Parking light position
4. Headlight position
Parking light position( )
■ Type A
■ Type B
4-81
4
Features of your vehicle
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (2nd position), the tail po‐
sition, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
Headlight position( )
■ Type A
■ Type B
When the light switch is in the head‐
light position (3rd position), the head,
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights are ON.
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the
ON position to turn on the head‐
lights.
Features of your vehicle
4-82
Auto light position (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head‐
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto‐
matically depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument pan‐
el, this will ensure better auto-
light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a win‐
dow cleaner, the cleanser may
leave a light film which could inter‐
fere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work prop‐
erly.
High beam operation
■ Type A
■ Type B
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
4-83
4
Features of your vehicle
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a prolonged time while the engine is
not running.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high beam
could obstruct the other driver's vi‐
sion.
■ Type A
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor‐
mal (low beam) position when released.
The headlight switch does not need to
be on to use this flashing feature .
Turn signals and lane change
signals
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-84
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A).
The green arrow indicators on the in‐
strument panel indicate which turn sig‐
nal is operating. They will self-cancel
after a turn is completed.
If the indicator continues to flash after
a turn, manually return the lever to the
off position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in posi‐
tion (B). The lever will return to the off
position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function (if
equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec‐
tion in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
4-85
4
Features of your vehicle
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to
fog, rain or snow, etc. The fog lights
will turn on when the fog light switch
(1) is turned on after the parklight is
turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
Rear fog light (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
rear fog light switch (1) to the on posi‐
tion when the headlight is turned on.
Also, the rear fog lights turn on when
the rear fog light switch is turned on
after the front fog light switch (if
equipped) is turned on and the head‐
light switch is in the parklight position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the
rear fog light switch to the on position
again.
NOTICE
Rear fog light is only on the driver’s
side (if equipped).
Static bending light (if equipped)
While driving the corner, for your sight
and safety, the static bending light is
turned on automatically. The system
will operate automatically as follows.
• When turning the headlight on
• When the angle of steering wheel is
over 35~40 (it is differed from vehicle
speed)
• When the vehicle speed is over
3 km/h
• When driving forward or backward.
Features of your vehicle
4-86
Daytime running light (if
equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The headlight switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
3. The front fog light is on.
4. Engaging the Parking Brake
Headlight leveling device (if
equipped)
OYB047426
To adjust the headlight beam level ac‐
cording to the number of the passen‐
gers and loading weight in the luggage
area, turn the beam leveling switch.
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam
at the proper leveling position, or head‐
lights may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of prop‐
er switch settings. For loading condi‐
tions other than those listed below, ad‐
just the switch position so that the
beam level may be the nearest as the
condition obtained according to the list.
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front
passenger
0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers
(including driver) +
Maximum permis‐
sible loading
2
Driver + Maximum
permissible load‐
ing
3
4-87
4
Features of your vehicle
High beam Assist (if equipped)
OYB047504
The High Beam Assist is a system that
automatically adjusts the headlamp
range (switches between high beam
and low beam) according to the bright‐
ness of other vehicles and road condi‐
tions.
Operating condition
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The High Beam Assist ( ) indicator
will illuminate.
3. The High Beam Assist will turn on
when vehicle speed is above 45 kph
(28 mph).
• If the lever is pushed away when
the High Beam Assist is operat‐
ing, the High Beam Assist will
turn off and the high beam will
be on continuously. The High
Beam Assist ( ) indicator will
turn off.
• If the lever is pulled towards you
when the high beam is on with
operating High Beam Assist, the
High Beam Assist will turn off.
4. If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the High Beam
Assist will turn off and the low
beam will be on continuously.
The high beam switches to low beam in
the below conditions.
- When the High Beam Assist is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected from
the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected from
the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not needed.
- When streetlights or other lights are
detected.
- When vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
(22 mph).
- When headlamp/taillamp of bicycle/
motorcycle is detected.
CAUTION
The system may not operate nor‐
mally in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-com‐
ing or front vehicle is not detected
because of lamp damage, hidden
from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-coming
or front vehicle is covered with
dust, snow or water.
• When the light from the on-com‐
ing or front vehicle is not detected
because of exhaust fume, smoke,
fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered
with foreign matters such as ice,
dust, fog, or is damaged.
• When there is a similar shape lamp
with the front vehicle’s lamps.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-88
(Continued)
• When it is hard to see because of
fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not repaired
or replaced at an authorized deal‐
er.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow curved
road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad or
curved road.
• When there is a traffic light, re‐
flecting sign, flashing sign or mir‐
ror.
• When the road conditions are bad
such as being wet or covered with
snow.
• When the front vehicle’s head‐
lamps are off but the fog lamps
on.
• When a vehicle suddenly appears
from a curve.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the vehicle is tilted from a
flat tire or being towed.
• When the LDWS (lane departure
warning system) or LKAS (lane
keeping assist system) warning
light illuminates. (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield.
• Have the windshield glass replaced
from an authorized dealer.
• Do not remove or impact related
parts of the High Beam Assist sys‐
tem.
• Be careful that water doesn’t get
into the High Beam Assist unit.
• Do not place objects on the dash‐
board that reflects light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys‐
tem may malfunction if sunlight is
reflected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• At times, the High Beam Assist
system may not work properly, al‐
ways check the road conditions for
your safety. When the system
does not operate normally, man‐
ually change between the high
beam and low beam.
4-89
4
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Front
Rear (if equipped)
■ Type A■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
■ Type B
■ Type C
A: Wiper speed control (front)
1. 2/HI – High wiper speed
2. 1/LO – Low wiper speed
3. ---/INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO
*
– Automatic control wipe
4. O/OFF – Off
5.
/1X – Single wipe
B: Intermittent control wipe time ad‐
justment
C: Wash with brief wipes (front)
*
D: Rear wiper/washer control
*
6. 2 – Continuous wipe
7. 1/ON – Intermittent wipe
8. O/OFF – Off
E: Wash with brief wipes (rear)
Windshield wipers (front)
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
1. 2/HI : Fast wiper speed
2. 1/LO :Normal wiper speed
3. ---/INT : Wiper operates intermit‐
tently at the same wiping intervals.
Use this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob.
*
: if equipped
Features of your vehicle
4-90
4. O/OFF : Wiper is not in operation
5. /1X : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this position and
release it. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is held in
this position.
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, de‐
frost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice
is removed before using the wind‐
shield wipers to ensure proper oper‐
ation. If you do not remove the snow
and/or ice before using the wiper
and washer, it may damage the wip‐
er and washer system.
AUTO (Automatic) control (if
equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the
wiping cycle for the proper interval.
The more it rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain stops, the wip‐
er stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wip‐
er will operate once to perform a self-
check of the system. Set the wiper to
off position when the wiper is not in
use.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is placed
in the AUTO mode, use caution in the
following situations to avoid any in‐
jury to the hands or other parts of
the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind‐
shield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the off position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam‐
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover lo‐
cated on the upper end of the pas‐
senger side windshield glass. Dam‐
(Continued)
4-91
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
age to system parts could occur and
may not be covered by your vehicle
warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the off posi‐
tion. Otherwise, wipers may operate
and ice may damage the windshield
wiper blades. Always remove all
snow and ice and defrost the wind‐
shield properly prior to operating the
windshield wipers.
Windshield washers (front)
In the O (Off) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer flu‐
id on the windshield and to run the wip‐
ers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield
is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con‐
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is
not sufficient, you will need to add ap‐
propriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your vi‐
sion.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to the
wipers or windshield, do not oper‐
ate the wipers when the wind‐
shield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline, kero‐
sene, paint thinner, or other sol‐
vents on or near them.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-92
(Continued)
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to the
wipers and washer system, use
anti-freezing washer fluids in the
winter season or cold weather.
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wip‐
er and washer switch lever. Turn the
switch to desired position to operate
the rear wiper and washer.
6. 2 - Normal wiper operation
7. 1/ON - Intermittent wipe
8. O - Wiper is not in operation
■ Type A
■ Type B
4-93
4
Features of your vehicle
Push the lever away from you or turn
the wiper lever switch upwards twice
to spray rear washer fluid and to run
the rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue until
you release the lever.
Features of your vehicle
4-94
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for ex‐
tended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Map lamp
■ Type A
■ Type B
• (1) : Press the lamps to turn the
front map lamps on and off.
• (2):
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approxi‐
mately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 mi‐
nutes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON posi‐
tion or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode, press
the DOOR button (2) once again
(not pressed).
4-95
4
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
The DOOR mode and ROOM mode
can not be selected at a time.
Front Map Lamp:
• Type A
(3): Press this switch to turn the
front map lamps on.
(4): Press this switch to turn the
front map lamps off.
• Type B
(3): Press this switch to turn the
front map lamps on and off.
Room lamp
• : The light stays on at all times.
Luggage room lamp (if
equipped)
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the trunk (tailgate) is opened.
CAUTION
The luggage room lamp comes on as
long as the trunk (tailgate) opens. To
prevent unnecessary charging sys‐
tem drain, close the trunk (tailgate)
(Continued)
(Continued)
securely after using the luggage
room.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
: The lamp will turn on if this but‐
ton is pressed.
: The lamp will turn off if this button
is pressed.
Features of your vehicle
4-96
CAUTION
n
Vanity mirror lamp
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is
closed without the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage the
sunvisor.
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box se‐
curely after using the glove box.
4-97
4
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc‐
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp in‐
struments or window cleaners con‐
taining abrasives to clean the win‐
dow.
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to Wind‐
shield defrosting and defogging on
page 4-118 .
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to re‐
move frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is run‐
ning.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster but‐
ton.
The indicator on the rear window de‐
froster button illuminates when the de‐
froster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
on the rear window, brush it off before
operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati‐
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out‐
side rearview mirror defrosters, they
will operate at the same time you turn
on the rear window defroster
Features of your vehicle
4-98
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni‐
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to discharge.
Operate the blower when the engine
is running.
4-99
4
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi‐
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning (if equipped)
system on.
Features of your vehicle
4-100
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the
ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash‐
board outlets, or windshield. Five sym‐
bols are used to represent Face, Bi-Lev‐
el, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
position.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each outlet
can be controlled to direct the air dis‐
charged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D,
E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
OYB047304
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb‐
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it
downward to the maximum position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the
vent control lever as shown.
4-101
4
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the knob
to the right position for warm and hot
air or left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recir‐
culated air position.
To change the air intake control posi‐
tion, press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat‐
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas‐
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces‐
sively dry air in the passenger com‐
partment.
Features of your vehicle
4-102
WARNING
• Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air posi‐
tion may allow humidity to in‐
crease inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure vis‐
ibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air posi‐
tion can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle con‐
trol. Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position as
much as possible while driving.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you
to control the fan speed of the air flow‐
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the fan speed, turn the knob to
the right for higher speed or left for
lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the 0 position turns off the fan.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the 0 position.
4-103
4
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (A/C)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator light
will illuminate). Press the button again
to turn the air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircula‐
ted air position. Be sure to return the
control to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed to keep
fresh air in the vehicle. This will help
the driver to stay alert and comfort‐
able.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care should
be taken that these are not blocked
by leaves, snow, ice or other obstruc‐
tions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind‐
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to the de‐
sired temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly refriger‐
ant
*
.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con‐
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
*
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula‐
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which air
conditioning refrigerant is applied
your vehicle at the label inside of en‐
gine room. Refer to Refrigerant la‐
bel on page 9-22 for more detail
location of air conditioning refriger‐
ant label.
Features of your vehicle
4-104
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi‐
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should on‐
ly be serviced by trained and certi‐
fied technicians to insure proper
and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be re‐
paired or replaced with one re‐
moved from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement MAC
evaporators shall be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard
J2842.
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills
or in heavy traffic when outside
temperatures are high. Air condi‐
tioning system operation may
cause engine overheating. Contin‐
ue to use the blower fan but turn
the air conditioning system off if
the temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in hu‐
mid weather air conditioning may
create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condition‐
ing should only be used with the
windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in di‐
rect sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time to
let the hot air inside the vehicle es‐
cape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days, de‐
crease the humidity inside the vehicle
by operating the air conditioning sys‐
tem.
• During air conditioning system opera‐
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to en‐
sure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys‐
tem, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side of
the vehicle. This is a normal system
operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position pro‐
vides maximum cooling, however,
continual operation in this mode may
cause the air inside the vehicle to be‐
come stale.
• During cooling operation, you may oc‐
casionally notice a misty air flow be‐
cause of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system oper‐
ation characteristic.
4-105
4
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter (if
equipped)
A : Outside air
B : Recirculated air
C : Climate control air filter
D : Blower
E : Evaporator core
F : Heater core
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the ve‐
hicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may de‐
crease, resulting in moisture accumula‐
tion on the inside of the windshield
even when the outside (fresh) air posi‐
tion is selected. If this happens, have
the climate control air filter replaced by
a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in se‐
vere conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, have the system
checked by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
■ Example
Type A
Type B
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refriger‐
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Features of your vehicle
4-106
Each symbols and specification on air
conditioning refrigerant label means as
below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri‐
cant
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at
the label inside of the engine room.
Refer to Refrigerant label on page
9-22 for more detailed location of the
air conditioning refrigerant label.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning
is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad in‐
fluence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by a
professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Vehicles equipped with
R-134a
*
Because the refrigerant is
at very high pressure, the
air conditioning system
should only be serviced
by trained and certified
technicians.
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
*
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula‐
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which air
conditioning refrigerant is applied
your vehicle at the label inside of en‐
gine room. Refer to Refrigerant la‐
bel on page 9-22 for more detail
location of air conditioning refriger‐
ant label.
WARNING
n
Vehicles equipped with
R-1234yf
*
Because the refrigerant is
mildly inflammable and at
very high pressure, the
air conditioning system
should only be serviced
by trained and certified
technicians.
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
*
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula‐
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which air
conditioning refrigerant is applied
your vehicle at the label inside of en‐
gine room. Refer to Refrigerant la‐
bel on page 9-22 for more detail
location of air conditioning refriger‐
ant label.
4-107
4
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Climate control display
4. Fan speed control knob
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Mode selection button
9. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
10. Air intake control button
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni‐
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to discharge.
Operate the blower when the engine
is running.
Features of your vehicle
4-108
Automatic heating and air
conditioning
1. Push the AUTO button. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-con‐
ditioning will be controlled auto‐
matically according to the temper‐
ature setting.
2. Set the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Front windshield defroster but‐
ton (Press the button one more
time to deselect the front wind‐
shield defroster function. The
AUTO sign will illuminate on the
information display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con‐
trolled manually while other func‐
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to im‐
prove the effectiveness of the cli‐
mate control, use the AUTO but‐
ton and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
4-109
4
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen‐
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat‐
ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air
conditioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this
case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons selec‐
ted.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except the AUTO button
while using automatic operation, the
functions not selected will be controlled
automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi‐
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con‐
vert to full automatic control of the
system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the
ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Refer to the illustration in the Manual
climate control system on page 4-99 .
Features of your vehicle
4-110
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each outlet
can be controlled to direct the air dis‐
charged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Defrost mode
When you select the defrost mode, the
following system settings will be made
automatically:
• The air conditioning system will be
turned on.
• The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected.
• The fan speed will be set to the high
speed.
To turn the defrost mode off, press the
mode button or defrost button again or
AUTO button.
Instrument panel vents
OYB047304
The outlet port can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb‐
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it
downward to the maximum position. To
open the vent, rotate it upward to the
desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the
vent control lever as shown.
4-111
4
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the left extremely.
When turning the knob, the tempera‐
ture will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/
1°F. When set to the lowest tempera‐
ture setting, the air conditioning will
operate continuously.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows:
While pressing the OFF button, press
the AUTO button for 4 seconds or
more.
The display will change from Centi‐
grade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit
to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi‐
tion, press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat‐
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas‐
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-112
(Continued)
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces‐
sively dry air in the passenger com‐
partment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to in‐
crease inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure vis‐
ibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle con‐
trol. Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position as
much as possible while driving.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by operating the fan speed con‐
trol knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the more
air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning (A/C)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator light
will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
4-113
4
Features of your vehicle
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you
can still operate the air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircula‐
ted air position. Be sure to return the
control to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed to keep
fresh air in the vehicle. This will help
keep the driver alert and comforta‐
ble.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care should
be taken that these are not blocked
by leaves, snow, ice or other obstruc‐
tions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind‐
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly refriger‐
ant
*
.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con‐
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
*
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula‐
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which air
conditioning refrigerant is applied
your vehicle at the label inside of en‐
gine room. Refer to Refrigerant la‐
bel on page 9-22 for more detail
location of air conditioning refriger‐
ant label.
Features of your vehicle
4-114
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi‐
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should on‐
ly be serviced by trained and certi‐
fied technicians to insure proper
and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be re‐
paired or replaced with one re‐
moved from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement MAC
evaporators shall be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard
J2842.
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills
or in heavy traffic when outside
temperatures are high. Air condi‐
tioning system operation may
cause engine overheating. Contin‐
ue to use the blower fan but turn
the air conditioning system off if
the temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in hu‐
mid weather air conditioning may
create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condition‐
ing should only be used with the
windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in di‐
rect sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time to
let the hot air inside the vehicle es‐
cape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days, de‐
crease the humidity inside the vehicle
by operating the air conditioning sys‐
tem.
• During air conditioning system opera‐
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to en‐
sure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys‐
tem, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side of
the vehicle. This is a normal system
operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position pro‐
vides maximum cooling, however,
continual operation in this mode may
cause the air inside the vehicle to be‐
come stale.
• During cooling operation, you may oc‐
casionally notice a misty air flow be‐
cause of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system oper‐
ation characteristic.
4-115
4
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter (if
equipped)
A : Outside air
B : Recirculated air
C : Climate control air filter
D : Blower
E : Evaporator core
F : Heater core
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the ve‐
hicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may de‐
crease, resulting in moisture accumula‐
tion on the inside of the windshield
even when the outside (fresh) air posi‐
tion is selected. If this happens, have
the climate control air filter replaced by
a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in se‐
vere conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, have the system
checked by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
■ Example
Type A
Type B
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refriger‐
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Features of your vehicle
4-116
Each symbols and specification on air
conditioning refrigerant label means as
below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri‐
cant
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at
the label inside of the engine room.
Refer to Refrigerant label on page
9-22 for more detailed location of the
air conditioning refrigerant label.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning
is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad in‐
fluence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by a
professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Vehicles equipped with
R-134a
*
Because the refrigerant is
at very high pressure, the
air conditioning system
should only be serviced
by trained and certified
technicians.
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
*
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula‐
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which air
conditioning refrigerant is applied
your vehicle at the label inside of en‐
gine room. Refer to Refrigerant la‐
bel on page 9-22 for more detail
location of air conditioning refriger‐
ant label.
WARNING
n
Vehicles equipped with
R-1234yf
*
Because the refrigerant is
mildly inflammable and at
very high pressure, the
air conditioning system
should only be serviced
by trained and certified
technicians.
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
*
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regula‐
tion in your country at the time of
producing. You can find out which air
conditioning refrigerant is applied
your vehicle at the label inside of en‐
gine room. Refer to Refrigerant la‐
bel on page 9-22 for more detail
location of air conditioning refriger‐
ant label.
4-117
4
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING
n
Windshield heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in extreme‐
ly humid weather. The difference be‐
tween the temperature of the out‐
side air and that of the windshield
could cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the mode
selection knob or button to the
position and fan speed control knob
or button to the lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window,
outside rear view mirrors, and all side
windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to im‐
prove heater and defroster efficiency
and to reduce the probability of fog‐
ging up the inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except 0 po‐
sition.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Select the
or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con‐
ditioning will be selected automati‐
cally.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected au‐
tomatically, press the corresponding
button manually.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the ex‐
treme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con‐
ditioning will be selected automati‐
cally.
Features of your vehicle
4-118
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi‐
ent temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected au‐
tomatically, adjust the corresponding
button manually. If the
position is
selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to
a higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the ex‐
treme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi‐
ent temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air in‐
take or air conditioning are controlled
automatically according to certain con‐
ditions such as or position. To
cancel or return to the defogging logic,
do the following.
Manual climate control system
4-119
4
Features of your vehicle
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake con‐
trol button will blink 3 times. It indi‐
cates that the defogging logic is can‐
celed or returned to the programmed
status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Automatic climate control system
(if equipped)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defrost position pressing
defrost button ( ).
3. While holding the air conditioning
button (A/C) pressed, press the air
intake control button at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times. It indi‐
cates that the defogging logic is can‐
celed or returned to the programmed
status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it is reset to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system (Only for
automatic climate control system,
if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility
of fogging up the inside of the wind‐
shield by automatically sensing the
moisture of inside the windshield and
air flow toward the windshield can in‐
crease.
The auto defogging system operates
when the AUTO mode is on.
For Europe
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically
activated when the conditions are met.
Features of your vehicle
4-120
When the auto fogging system senses
moisture inside of the windshield, air
flow towards the windshield can in‐
crease.
However, if you would like to deactivate
the auto defogging system, keep the
front defroster button pressed longer
than 3 seconds.
The ADS OFF symbol will be shown in
the climate display to inform you that
the system is deactivated.
To re-activate the auto defogging sys‐
tem again, follow the procedure men‐
tioned above and the ADS OFF symbol
will disappear.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog‐
ging status.
Except Europe
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, high‐
er steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically
activated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to deactivate
the auto defogging system, keep the
front defroster button pressed longer
than 3 seconds.
The ADS OFF symbol will be shown in
the climate display to inform you that
the system is deactivated.
To re-activate the auto defogging sys‐
tem again, follow the procedure men‐
tioned above and the ADS OFF symbol
will disappear.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog‐
ging status.
4-121
4
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage compart‐
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover cannot close securely.
WARNING
n
Flammable materials
Do not store cigarette lighters, pro‐
pane cylinders, or other flammable/
explosive materials in the vehicle.
These items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is exposed to
hot temperatures for extended peri‐
ods.
Center console storage (if
equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the center console storage pull
up the lever .
Glove box
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an ac‐
cident or sudden stop, always keep
the glove box door closed while driv‐
ing.
Features of your vehicle
4-122
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box for
a long time.
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses with the lenses
facing out. To close the sunglass holder,
push it up.
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun‐
glasses inside the sunglass holder.
Such objects can be thrown from
the holder in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident, possibly injur‐
ing the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle can
be blocked by an opened sunglass
holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly into
a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of the
glasses. It may cause personal in‐
jury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
the holder.
Luggage net holder (if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the car‐
go area, you can use the 4 holders loca‐
ted in the cargo area to attach the lug‐
gage net.
If necessary, Kia recommends to con‐
tact an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky ob‐
jects in the luggage compartment.
4-123
4
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch
the luggage net, ALWAYS keep your
face and body out of the luggage
net’s recoil path. DO NOT use when
the strap has visible signs of wear or
damage.
Luggage board (if equipped)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector
triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy
access.
1. Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
2. Fold the rear part of luggage board
frontward.
3. Lift up luggage board frontward
(Luggage board stand itself)
Increase cargo space (if
equipped)
Features of your vehicle
4-124
If you want to increase cargo space,
1. Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it
2. Fold the rear part of the luggage
board frontward
3. Pull the luggage board hinge to the
end of sliding slot and it will fall
down lower to increase cargo
space.
4. Slide it frontward (refer to the
above pictures)
4-125
4
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC posi‐
tion or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all
the way into its socket. When the ele‐
ment has heated, the lighter will pop
out to the ready position.
Kia recommends to use parts for re‐
placement from an authorized Kia deal‐
er/service partner.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it is
already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects into
the socket of the cigarette lighter.
It may damage the cigarette light‐
er.
CAUTION
The use of plug-in accessories (sha‐
vers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee
pots, etc.) may damage the socket
or cause electrical failure.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it
out.
Use the ashtray by leaning it to the cup
holder right beside.
WARNING
n
Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-126
(Continued)
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in
an ashtray with other combustible
materials may cause a fire.
Cup holder
WARNING
n
Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups with
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehi‐
cle.
• To reduce the risk of personal in‐
jury in the event of sudden stop or
collision, do not place uncovered or
unsecured bottles, glasses, cans,
etc., in the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may ex‐
plode.
NOTICE
• Keep your drinks sealed while driv‐
ing to prevent spilling your drink. If
liquid spills, it may get into the ve‐
hicle's electrical/electronic system
and damage electrical/ electronic
parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
4-127
4
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
OUB041156B
4
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win‐
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the side
(2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
The ticket holder (4) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct
your vision when using the sunvisor.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
■ Front seat
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON posi‐
tion, push either of the switches to
warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi‐
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you press the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
- Front seat
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is turned on.
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automati‐
cally depending on the seat temper‐
ature.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
4-128
(Continued)
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions or
seat covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp ob‐
jects on seats equipped with seat
warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
WARNING
n
Seat warmer burns
Passengers should use extreme cau‐
tion when using seat warmers due
to the possibility of excess heating
or burns. The seat warmer may
cause burns even at low tempera‐
tures, especially if used for long pe‐
riods of time. In particular, the driver
must exercise extreme care for the
following types of passengers:
(Continued)
(Continued)
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehi‐
cle electrical systems. The devices
should draw less than 10 amps with
the engine running.
4-129
4
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine off
could cause the battery to dis‐
charge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heat‐
er to the lowest operating level
when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when plug‐
ged into a vehicle’s power outlet.
These devices may cause exces‐
sive audio static and malfunctions
in other electronic systems or de‐
vices used in your vehicle.
• Using electrical products which ex‐
ceed the limited capacity might
cause heating to the power outlet
and wiring that could lead to an
electrical breakdown.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always make sure the electrical
part is firmly plugged into the
power outlet. Incomplete plugging
may cause electrical breakdown.
• Electrical products with a built-in
battery might cause current flow,
which could lead to malfunction of
the electric/ electronic device in
your vehicle. Only use electrical
products which include reverse
current prevention.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele‐
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
USB charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is designed to re‐
charge batteries of small size electrical
devices using a USB cable. The electrical
devices can be recharged when the En‐
gine Start/Stop button is in ACC/ON/
START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the USB
port after use.
• Some devices are not supported for
fast charging but will be charged with
normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the engine
is running to prevent battery dis‐
charge.
Features of your vehicle
4-130
• Only devices that fits the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only for
battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be charged.
Floor mat anchor(s) (if
equipped)
OYB047448
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub‐
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was man‐
ufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
Shopping bag holder
CAUTION
• Do not hang a bag weighing more
than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause
damage to the shopping bag hold‐
er.
• Do not hang the frail objects when
you drive rough road, the objects
may be damaged.
4-131
4
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the upper
portion of hanger.
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects such as
hangers or hard objects except
clothes. Also, do not put heavy,
sharp or breakable objects in the
clothe pockets. In an accident or
when the curtain air bag is inflated,
it may cause vehicle damage or per‐
sonal injury.
Features of your vehicle
4-132
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)
OYB047503
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
Crossbars and fixing components nee‐
ded to install the roof rack on your ve‐
hicle may be obtained from an author‐
ized Kia dealer or other qualified shop.
NOTICE
• The crossbars (if equipped) should
be placed in the proper load carry‐
ing positions prior to placing items
onto the roof rack.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, be sure not to position
cargo onto the roof rack in such a
way that it could interfere with
sunroof operation.
• When the roof rack is not being
used to carry cargo, the crossbars
may need to be repositioned if
wind noise is detected.
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau‐
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehi‐
cle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When carrying large objects on the
roof rack, make sure they do not
exceed the overall roof length or
width.
• When you are carrying cargo on
the roof rack, do not operate the
sunroof (if equipped).
WARNING
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be loa‐
ded onto the roof rack. Distribute
the load as evenly as possible
across the crossbars (if equipped)
and roof rack and secure the load
firmly.
ROOF
RACK
75 kg (165 lbs.) EVEN‐
LY DISTRIBUTED
Loading cargo or luggage in excess
of the specified weight limit on the
roof rack may damage your vehi‐
cle.
(Continued)
4-133
4
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor‐
ners carefully when carrying items
on the roof rack. Severe wind up‐
drafts, caused by passing vehicles
or natural causes, can cause sud‐
den upward pressure on items loa‐
ded on the roof rack. This is espe‐
cially true when carrying large, flat
items such as wood panels or mat‐
tresses. This could cause the items
to fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or others
around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of car‐
go while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make
sure the items on the roof rack are
securely fastened.
Side seal molding (if equipped)
OYB087006
CAUTION
Don’t step up the side seal molding
on the frame. Heavy loads on the
molding can cause deformation and
damage.
Features of your vehicle
4-134
Audio system............................................................................. 5-02
Antenna.................................................................................. 5-02
AUX, USB port .......................................................................5-03
How vehicle audio works......................................................5-03
Audio system
5
AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Roof antenna
OYB046453B
Type A
OYB047453B
Type B
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type.
To remove the antenna, turn it coun‐
terclockwise. To install the antenna,
turn it clockwise.
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash, re‐
move surely the antenna by rotat‐
ing it counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight‐
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep‐
tion. But it could be folded or re‐
moved when parking the vehicle or
when loading cargo on the roof
rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
Audio system
5-02
AUX, USB port (if equipped)
You can use the AUX port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to plug
in a USB device or iPod
®
.
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
❈
iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
How vehicle audio works
FM reception
IONOSPHERE
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted
by the radio antenna on your vehicle.
This signal is then received by the radio
and sent to your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best
possible quality reproduction. However,
in some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as the
distance from the radio station, close‐
ness of other strong radio stations or
the presence of buildings, bridges or
other large obstructions in the area.
AM reception
IONOSPHERE
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can
follow the curvature of the earth rath‐
er than travelling straight out into the
atmosphere. In addition, they curve
around obstructions so that they can
provide better signal coverage.
5-03
5
Audio system
Mountains
Buildings
Unobstructed
area
Iron bridges
FM radio station
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow
the earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build‐
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening
conditions which might lead you to be‐
lieve a problem exists with your radio.
The following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that
you select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis‐
turb the signal causing static or flut‐
tering noises to occur. Reducing the
treble level may lessen this effect un‐
til the disturbance clears.
Station 2
88.1Mhz
Station 2
88.3Mhz
• Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig‐
nal near the same frequency may be‐
gin to play. This is because your radio
is designed to lock onto the clearest
signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig‐
nals being received from several di‐
rections can cause distortion or flut‐
tering. This can be caused by a direct
and reflected signal from the same
station, or by signals from two sta‐
tions with close frequencies. If this
occurs, select another station until
the condition has passed.
Audio system
5-04
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from
the audio system. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cel‐
lular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
CAUTION
When using a communication sys‐
tem such as a cellular phone or a ra‐
dio set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi‐
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone while
driving. Stop at a safe location to use
a cellular phone.
5-05
5
Audio system
Engine exhaust can be dangerous!........................................ 6-03
Before driving............................................................................ 6-04
Before entering vehicle........................................................ 6-04
Necessary inspections..........................................................6-04
Before starting......................................................................6-04
Key positions..............................................................................6-06
Ignition switch position........................................................ 6-06
Starting the engine...............................................................6-07
ENGINE START/STOP button ..................................................6-10
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button..........................6-10
ENGINE START/STOP button position............................... 6-10
Starting the engine...............................................................6-12
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system ............................................... 6-16
Auto stop................................................................................6-16
Auto start...............................................................................6-17
Condition of ISG system operation.................................... 6-18
ISG system deactivation...................................................... 6-18
ISG system malfunction.......................................................6-19
Manual transaxle ......................................................................6-20
Manual transaxle operation................................................ 6-20
Good driving practices..........................................................6-22
Automatic transaxle................................................................. 6-24
Automatic transaxle operation...........................................6-24
Good driving practices..........................................................6-28
Brake system.............................................................................6-30
Power brakes.........................................................................6-30
Parking brake.........................................................................6-31
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ........................................... 6-34
Electronic stability control (ESC) ....................................... 6-36
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ............................................6-39
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ............................... 6-39
ESS : Emergency Stop Signal ............................................. 6-40
Good braking practices.........................................................6-41
Cruise control system ............................................................. 6-43
Cruise control switch............................................................6-44
To set cruise control speed:................................................ 6-44
To increase cruise control set speed:................................ 6-46
To decrease the cruising speed:......................................... 6-46
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:.... 6-47
To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:........... 6-47
To resume cruising speed at more than approxi‐
mately 30 km/h (20 mph):.................................................. 6-48
To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:........ 6-49
Speed limit control system .................................................... 6-50
Speed limit control switch................................................... 6-50
To set speed limit:.................................................................6-50
To turn off the speed limit control, do one of
the following:......................................................................... 6-51
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) System .............6-53
System setting and activation............................................6-53
FCA warning message and system control......................6-54
Brake operation.....................................................................6-55
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle
in front (front radar)............................................................ 6-56
System malfunction............................................................. 6-57
Limitation of the system.....................................................6-58
Recognizing pedestrians...................................................... 6-60
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System ..............................6-62
Warning indicator..................................................................6-64
Driving your vehicle
6
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System
does not operate when:.......................................................6-64
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System
may not warn you even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if the vehicle does
not leave the lane when:......................................................6-64
Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system (if equipped) ..... 6-66
System setting and activation............................................6-66
Resetting the system.......................................................... 6-67
System standby.................................................................... 6-67
System malfunction............................................................. 6-68
Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) ...................................... 6-70
BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warning) / LCA (Lane
Change Assist)....................................................................... 6-71
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning.................................6-73
Driver's attention.................................................................. 6-75
Economical operation............................................................... 6-76
Special driving conditions.........................................................6-78
Hazardous driving conditions..............................................6-78
Rocking the vehicle............................................................... 6-78
Smooth cornering................................................................. 6-79
Driving at night......................................................................6-79
Driving in the rain..................................................................6-80
Driving in flooded areas....................................................... 6-80
Driving off-road.................................................................... 6-81
Highway driving.....................................................................6-81
Winter driving............................................................................ 6-82
Snowy or icy conditions....................................................... 6-82
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant...........................6-84
Check battery and cables.................................................... 6-84
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary...................... 6-84
Check spark plugs and ignition system.............................6-84
To keep locks from freezing................................................6-85
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system.... 6-85
Don't let your parking brake freeze...................................6-85
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath.............. 6-85
Carry emergency equipment.............................................. 6-85
Trailer towing (for Europe)......................................................6-86
Hitches.................................................................................... 6-87
Safety chains......................................................................... 6-87
Trailer brakes.........................................................................6-88
Driving with a trailer.............................................................6-88
Maintenance when trailer towing...................................... 6-91
If you do decide to pull a trailer..........................................6-91
Vehicle weight............................................................................6-94
Base curb weight.................................................................. 6-94
Vehicle curb weight...............................................................6-94
Cargo weight..........................................................................6-94
GAW (Gross axle weight)..................................................... 6-94
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating).......................................6-94
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)................................................ 6-94
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)..................................6-94
Overloading............................................................................ 6-94
6
ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
WARNING
n
ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the
windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyx‐
iation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you
hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle,
have the system checked by a professional workshop. Kia recommends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in
your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open
area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interi‐
or.
If you must drive with the tailgate/trunk open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the wind‐
shield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
6-03
6
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign
of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on
the fluid. Further details are provided in
Maintenance on page 8-07.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
a loss of vehicle control, that may
lead to an accident, severe personal
injury, and death. The driver's pri‐
mary responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and use
of any handheld devices, other
equipment, or vehicle systems which
(Continued)
(Continued)
take the driver's eyes, attention and
focus away from the safe operation
of a vehicle or which are not permis‐
sible by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls
are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rear‐
view mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes
out.
For safe operation, be sure you are fa‐
miliar with your vehicle and its equip‐
ment.
WARNING
All passengers must be properly bel‐
ted whenever the vehicle is moving.
Refer to Seat belts on page 3-13
for more information on their proper
use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people, espe‐
cially children, before putting a car
into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
WARNING
n
Driving under the influence of
alcohol or drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one con‐
tributor to the highway death toll
each year. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes, per‐
ceptions and judgment. Driving while
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-04
(Continued)
under the influence of drugs is as
dangerous or more dangerous than
driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or take
drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver or
call a cab.
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the acceler‐
ator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely stor‐
ed.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be careful
when operating what may disturb
driving such as audio or heater. It
is the responsibility of the driver
to always drive safely.
6-05
6
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS
Ignition switch position
LOCK
OYB057001B
Type A
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
■ Type B
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning
the ignition switch to the ACC posi‐
tion, turn the key while turning the
steering wheel right and left to re‐
lease the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked be‐
fore the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the en‐
gine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The engine
will crank until you release the key;
then it returns to the ON position. The
brake warning light can be checked in
this position.
WARNING
n
Ignition switch
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an ac‐
cident.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-06
(Continued)
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver’s seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in 1st
gear for the manual transaxle or P
(Park) for the automatic transaxle,
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions are
not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion. The pres‐
ence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci‐
dent.
Starting the engine
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle. Un‐
suitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal, and the clutch
(if equipped).
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor‐
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake pedal is released
when the rpm is high.
NOTICE
n
Kick down mechanism (if
equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
(Continued)
(Continued)
pedal, it prevents you from driving
at full throttle unintentionally by
making the driver require increased
effort to depress the accelerator
pedal. However, if you depress the
pedal more than approximately 80%,
the vehicle can be at full throttle and
the accelerator pedal will be easier
to depress. This is not a malfunction
but a normal condition.
Starting the gasoline engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is ap‐
plied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal de‐
pressed while turning the ignition
switch to the start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park). De‐
press the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
6-07
6
Driving your vehicle
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without de‐
pressing the accelerator pedal.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta‐
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and de‐
celerating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle is
still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
• Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the en‐
gine stalls or fails to start, wait 5
to 10 seconds before re-engaging
the starter. Improper use of the
starter may damage it.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the en‐
gine running. It may damage the
starter.
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the en‐
gine is cold, it has to be pre-heated be‐
fore starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to
drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is ap‐
plied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal de‐
pressed while turning the ignition
switch to the start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park). De‐
press the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N(neutral)
position.
W-60
Glow indicator light
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position to pre-heat the engine.
Then the glow indicator light will il‐
luminate.
Driving your vehicle
6-08
4. If the glow indicator light goes out,
turn the ignition switch to the
START position and hold it there
until the engine starts (a maximum
of 10 seconds), then release the
key.
NOTICE
If the engine is not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is com‐
pleted, turn the ignition switch once
more to the LOCK position during 10
seconds, and then to the ON posi‐
tion, in order to preheat again.
Starting and stopping the engine
for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the en‐
gine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrica‐
tion is ensured in the turbocharger
unit.
2. After high speed or extended driv‐
ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
idle the engine about 1 minute be‐
fore turning it off.
This idle time will allow the turbo‐
charger to cool prior to shutting off
the engine.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immedi‐
ately after it has been subjected to a
heavy load. Doing so may cause se‐
vere damage to the engine or turbo‐
charger unit.
6-09
6
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP
button
Whenever the front door is opened, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will illumi‐
nate for your convenience. The light will
go off after about 30 seconds when the
door is closed. It will also go off imme‐
diately when the theft-alarm system is
armed.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine
(START/RUN position) or ve‐
hicle power (ON position),
stop the vehicle then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN po‐
sition) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the shift lever in the P (Park) posi‐
tion. When you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the EN‐
GINE START/STOP button will not
change to the OFF position but to the
ACC position.
Also, the steering wheel locks when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is in the
OFF position to protect you against
theft. It locks when the door is opened.
Not illuminated
Vehicles equipped with anti-theft
steering column lock
The steering wheel locks when the en‐
gine start/stop button is in the OFF po‐
sition to protect you against theft. It
locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked prop‐
erly when you open the driver's door,
the warning chime will sound. If the
problem is not solved, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the OFF position after the
driver's door is opened, the steering
wheel will not lock and the warning
chime will sound. In such a situation,
close the door. Then the steering wheel
will lock and the warning chime will
stop.
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the ENGINE START/STOP
button will not work. Press the EN‐
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-10
(Continued)
GINE START/STOP button while
turning the steering wheel right and
left to release the tension.
• If difficulty is experienced turning
the engine start/stop button to
the ACC position, turn the steering
wheel right and left to release the
tension while pressing the engine
start/stop button.
• When you turn off the engine, the
vehicle should be stopped.
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in mo‐
tion. In an emergency situation while
the vehicle is in motion, you are able
to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
(Continued)
(Continued)
without depressing the brake pedal
by pressing the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position.
ACC (Accessory)
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop
button when the button is
in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and electri‐
cal accessories are operational.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC position for more than 1 hour,
the button is turned off automatically
to prevent battery discharge.
Orange
ON
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop
button when the button is
in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
Red
With automatic transaxle
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked be‐
fore the engine is started. Do not leave
the ENGINE START/STOP button in the
ON position for a long time. The bat‐
tery may discharge, because the engine
is not running.
START/RUN
With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress
the clutch pedal and brake
pedal, then press the engine
start/stop button with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For
your safety, start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Not illuminated
6-11
6
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE
If you press the ENGINE START/
STOP button without depressing the
clutch pedal for manual transaxle
vehicles or without depressing the
brake pedal for automatic transaxle
vehicles, the engine will not start
and the engine start/stop button
changes as follow:
OFF ➔ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ACC or ON position for
a long time, the battery will dis‐
charge.
WARNING
• Never press the ENGINE START/
STOP button while the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an ac‐
cident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver's seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Unexpec‐
ted and sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions are
not taken.
• Never reach for the ENGINE
START/STOP button or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion. The presence of your hand or
arm in the area could cause loss of
vehicle control, an accident and se‐
rious bodily injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci‐
dent.
Starting the engine
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle. Un‐
suitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor‐
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake pedal is released
when the rpm is high.
Driving your vehicle
6-12
NOTICE
n
Kick down mechanism (if
equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving
at full throttle unintentionally by
making the driver require increased
effort to depress the accelerator
pedal. However, if you depress the
pedal more than approximately 80%,
the vehicle can be at full throttle and
the accelerator pedal will be easier
to depress. This is not a malfunction
but a normal condition.
Starting the gasoline engine
1. Carry the smart key or leave it in‐
side the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal de‐
pressed while starting the engine.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park). De‐
press the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
It should be started without de‐
pressing the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta‐
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and de‐
celerating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the engine
running. It may damage the starter.
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the en‐
gine is cold, it has to be pre-heated be‐
fore starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to
drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is ap‐
plied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal de‐
pressed while pressing the engine
start/stop button to the START po‐
sition.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park). De‐
press the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
6-13
6
Driving your vehicle
W-60
Glow indicator light
3. Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake ped‐
al until the illuminated glow indica‐
tor goes off. (approximately 5 sec‐
onds)
5. The engine starts running when
the glow indicator goes off.
NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is
pressed once more while the engine
is pre-heating, the engine may start.
Starting and stopping the engine for
turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the en‐
gine immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrica‐
tion is ensured in the turbocharger
unit.
2. After high speed or extended driv‐
ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
idle the engine about 1 minute be‐
fore turning it off.
This idle time will allow the turbo‐
charger to cool prior to shutting off
the engine.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immedi‐
ately after it has been subjected to a
heavy load. Doing so may cause se‐
vere damage to the engine or turbo‐
charger unit.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP but‐
ton is in the ACC position or above, if
any door is opened, the system
checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the
or
KEY
OUT
indicator will blink or
the warning "Key is not in vehicle" will
illuminate on the LCD display. And if
all doors are closed, the chime will
sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or
warning will turn off while the vehicle
is moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the ENGINE START/STOP but‐
ton or related parts.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi‐
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-14
(Continued)
tion. If the traffic and road condi‐
tions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and press
the ENGINE START/STOP button in
an attempt to restart the engine.
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
• When the brake switch fuse is
blown, you can't start the engine
normally. Replace the fuse with a
new one. If it is not possible, you
can start the engine by pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button
for 10 seconds while it is in the
ACC position. The engine can start
without depressing the brake ped‐
al. But for your safety always de‐
press the brake pedal before
starting the engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec‐
onds except when the stop lamp
fuse is blown.
6-15
6
Driving your vehicle
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ISG system, which reduces fuel con‐
sumption by automatically shutting
down the engine, when the vehicle is at
a standstill. (For example : red light,
stop sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as
soon as the starting conditions are
met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the en‐
gine is running.
NOTICE
When the engine automatically
starts by the ISG system, some
warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF,
EPS or Parking brake warning light)
may turn on for a few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop
mode
• Manual transaxle
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 5 km/h.
2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
• Automatic transaxle
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 5 km/h.
2. Press the brake pedal.
The engine will stop and the green AU‐
TO STOP indicator (
) on the instru‐
ment cluster will illuminate. If your ve‐
hicle is equipped with a supervision
cluster, the notice will illuminate on the
LCD display.
Driving your vehicle
6-16
NOTICE
• You must reach a speed of at least
10 km/h since last idle stop.
• If you unfasten the seat belt or
open the driver’s door (engine
hood) in auto stop mode, the light
on the ISG OFF button will illumi‐
nate and ISG system is deactiva‐
ted. If your vehicle is equipped
with a supervision cluster, the no‐
tice will illuminate on the LCD dis‐
play. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position to start the
engine manually.
Auto start
To restart the engine from idle stop
mode
• Manual transaxle
- Press the clutch pedal when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) po‐
sition.
• Automatic transaxle
- Release the brake pedal.
The engine will start and the green AU‐
TO STOP indicator (
) on the instru‐
ment cluster will go out. If your vehicle
is equipped with a supervision cluster,
the notice will illuminate on the LCD
display.
6-17
6
Driving your vehicle
The engine will also restart
automatically without the driver's
any actions if the following occurs:
-
The fan speed of manual climate con‐
trol system is set above the 3rd posi‐
tion when the air conditioning is on.
-
The fan speed of automatic climate
control system is set above the 6th
position when the air conditioning is
on.
-
When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control sys‐
tem on.
-
When the defroster is on.
-
The brake vacuum pressure is low.
-
The battery charging status is low.
-
The vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h.
The green AUTO STOP indicator (
) on
the instrument cluster will blink for 5
seconds.
Condition of ISG system
operation
The ISG system will operate under
the following condition:
-
The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
-
The driver’s door and hood are closed.
-
The brake vacuum pressure is ade‐
quate.
-
The battery is sufficiently charged.
-
The outside temperature is more
than -2°C (28.4°F).
-
The outside temperature is under
32°C (89.6°F).
-
The engine coolant temperature is
not too low.
NOTICE
• If the ISG system does not meet
that operation condition, the ISG
system is deactivated. The light on
the ISG OFF button will illuminate.
• If the light comes on continuously,
please check the operation condi‐
tion.
ISG system deactivation
• If you want to deactivate the ISG
system, press the ISG OFF button.
The light on the ISG OFF button will il‐
luminate.
Driving your vehicle
6-18
• If you press the ISG OFF button again,
the system will be activated and the
light on the ISG OFF button will turn
off.
ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate
when:
-
The ISG related sensors or system
error occurs.
The yellow AUTO STOP indicator (
)
on the instrument cluster will stay on
after blinking for 5 seconds and the
light on the ISG OFF button will illumi‐
nate.
NOTICE
• If the ISG OFF button light is not
turned off by pressing the ISG OFF
button again or if the ISG system
continuously does not work cor‐
rectly, have your vehicle inspected
by a professional workshop as
soon as possible.
Kia recommends to contact an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• When the ISG OFF button light
comes on, it may stop illuminating
after driving your vehicle at ap‐
proximately 80 km/h for a maxi‐
mum of two hours and setting the
fan speed control knob below the
2nd position. If the ISG OFF button
light continues to be illuminated in
spite of the procedure, have your
vehicle inspected by a professional
workshop as soon as possible. Kia
recommends to contact an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
NOTICE
If you want to use the ISG function,
the battery sensor needs to be cali‐
brated for approximately 4 hours
with the ignition off and then, turn
the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.
WARNING
When the engine is in Idle Stop
mode, it's possible to restart the en‐
gine without the driver taking any
action.
Before leaving the car or doing any‐
thing in the engine room area, stop
the engine by turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK(OFF) position or
removing the ignition key.
6-19
6
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The button (1) should be pressed when
moving the shift lever into reverse.
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling the button (1).
■ Type A
■ Type B
The manual transaxle has 5 (or 6) for‐
ward gears.
Driving your vehicle
6-20
This shift pattern is imprinted on the
shift knob. The transaxle is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
Depress the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an igni‐
tion lock switch, the engine will not
start when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal. (if equip‐
ped)
The shift lever must be returned to the
neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Push the button located immediately
below the shift knob and pull the gear‐
shift lever to the left sufficiently, and
then shift into reverse (R) gear position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Re‐
verse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth gear
to fourth gear, caution should be
taken not to inadvertently press
the shift lever sideways in such a
manner that the second gear is
engaged. Such a drastic downshift
may cause the engine speed to in‐
crease to the point that the tach‐
ometer will enter the red-zone.
Such over-revving of the engine
and transaxle may possibly cause
engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high speed
(5,000 RPM or higher). Such a
downshifting may damage the en‐
gine, clutch and the transaxle.
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant
is warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop
and it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Re‐
verse), leave the shift lever at N(Neu‐
tral) position and release the clutch.
Press the clutch pedal back down,
and then shift into 1st or R(Reverse)
gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch to
hold the vehicle stopped on an up‐
hill grade, while waiting for a traf‐
fic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this can
result in premature wear of the
transaxle shift forks.
• To prevent possible damage to the
clutch system, do not start with
the 2nd (second) gear engaged ex‐
cept when you start on a slippery
road.
6-21
6
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat, al‐
ways set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill grade,
and shifted into R (Reverse) on a
downhill grade. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can oc‐
cur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.
• Do not use the engine brake (shift‐
ing from a high gear to lower gear)
rapidly on slippery roads.
The vehicle may slip causing an ac‐
cident.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released while driving.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This can cause un‐
necessary wear. Do not partially en‐
gage the clutch to hold the vehicle on
an incline. This causes unnecessary
wear. Use the foot brake or parking
brake to hold the vehicle on an incline.
Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly
and repeatedly.
CAUTION
When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully. If
you don’t press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged or
noise may occur.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
labor. Downshifting reduces the chance
of stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is ex‐
tremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc‐
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, shift to a lower gear.
When you do this, engine braking will
help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better
control of your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
6-22
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into reverse. The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not.
• Exercise extreme caution when driv‐
ing on a slippery surface. Be especial‐
ly careful when braking, accelerating
or shifting gears. On a slippery sur‐
face, an abrupt change in vehicle
speed can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle to go out
of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted oc‐
cupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering
or turning.
• Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lane
changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly in‐
creased if you lose control of your
vehicle at highway speeds.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Loss of control often occurs if two
or more wheels drop off the road‐
way and the driver oversteers to
reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
6-23
6
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Button
Shift lever
- (DOWN)
- (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the button when shifting.
+ (UP)
+ (UP)
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 4 (6
*
) for‐
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected au‐
tomatically, depending on the position
of the shift lever.
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnec‐
ted, may be somewhat abrupt. This
is a normal condition, and the shift‐
ing sequence will adjust after shifts
are cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or PCM
(Powertrain Control Module).
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N (Neu‐
tral) to a forward or reverse gear.
WARNING
n
Automatic transaxle
(Continued)
*
if equipped
Driving your vehicle
6-24
(Continued)
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before shifting
a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat, al‐
ways make sure the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position; then set
the parking brake fully and shut
the engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can oc‐
cur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.
• Do not use the engine brake (shift‐
ing from a high gear to lower gear)
rapidly on slippery roads.
The vehicle may slip causing an ac‐
cident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your trans‐
axle, do not accelerate the engine
in R (Reverse) or any forward gear
position with the brakes on.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle stationary with
engine power.
Use the service brake or the park‐
ing brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse)
when the engine is above idle
speed.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position
locks the transaxle and prevents the
drive wheels from rotating.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the ve‐
hicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in
place of the parking brake. Always
make sure the shift lever is latch‐
ed in the P (Park) position and set
the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in a
vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the ve‐
hicle is in motion.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
6-25
6
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop be‐
fore shifting into or out of R (Re‐
verse); you may damage the trans‐
axle if you shift into R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is in motion, except
as explained in Rocking the vehicle
on page 6-78.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not en‐
gaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the park‐
ing brake or service brakes are applied.
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
The engine brake will not work and
lead to an accident.
- Parking in N (Neutral) gear
Follow below steps when parking and
you want the vehicle to move when
pushed.
1. After parking your vehicle, step on
the brake pedal and move the shift
lever to [P] with the ignition button
in [ON] or while the engine is run‐
ning.
2. If the parking brake is applied un‐
lock the parking brake.
3. While pressing the brake pedal,
turn the ignition button [OFF].
- For smart key equipped vehicles,
the ignition switch can be moved to
[OFF] only when the shift lever is in
[P].
4. Change the gear shift lever to [N]
(Neutral) while pressing the brake
pedal and pushing [SHIFT LOCK RE‐
LEASE] button or inserting, press‐
ing down a tool (e.g. flathead
screw-driver) into the [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] access hole at the same
time. Then, the vehicle will move
when external force is applied.
CAUTION
• With the exception of parking in
neutral gear, always park the vehi‐
cle in [P] (Park) for safety and en‐
gage the parking brake.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before parking in [N] (Neutral)
gear, first make sure the parking
ground is level and flat. Do not
park in [N] gear on any slopes or
gradients.
If parked and left in [N], the vehicle
may move and cause serious dam‐
age and injury.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi‐
tion. The transaxle will automatically
shift through a 4-gear or 6-gear se‐
quence, providing the best fuel econo‐
my and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift
to the lower gear.
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop be‐
fore shifting into D (Drive).
Driving your vehicle
6-26
Sports mode (if equipped)
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports
mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation,
push the shift lever back into the main
gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you
to make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast
to a manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Using the shift lever
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one
gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below
the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 4 or 6
forward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
or P (Park) position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the ve‐
hicle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto‐
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer‐
tain gearshifts when the shift lev‐
er is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the +(up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic trans‐
axle has a shift lock system which pre‐
vents shifting the transaxle from P
(Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake
pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) in‐
to R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
6-27
6
Driving your vehicle
2. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly de‐
pressed and released with the shift lev‐
er in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake pedal
before and while shifting out of the
P (Park) position into another posi‐
tion to avoid inadvertent motion of
the vehicle which could injure per‐
sons in or around the car.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other po‐
sition with the accelerator pedal de‐
pressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be ex‐
tremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc‐
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift
to a lower gear. When you do this,
engine braking will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driv‐
ing on a slippery surface. Be especial‐
ly careful when braking, accelerating
or shifting gears. On a slippery sur‐
face, an abrupt change in vehicle
speed can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle to go out
of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly de‐
pressing and releasing the accelera‐
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted oc‐
cupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering
or turning.
• Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lane
changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly in‐
creased if you lose control of your
vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if two
or more wheels drop off the road‐
way and the driver over-steers to
reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving your vehicle
6-28
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may
attempt to rock the vehicle free by
moving it forward and backward. Do
not attempt this procedure if people
or objects are anywhere near the ve‐
hicle. During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move for‐
ward of backward as it becomes un‐
stuck, causing injury or damage to
nearby people or objects.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake pedal,
shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select
the appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing
the service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten‐
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will help
prevent the vehicle from rolling back‐
wards.
6-29
6
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through nor‐
mal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying
greater force to the brake pedal than
you normally would. The stopping dis‐
tance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the re‐
serve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when nec‐
essary to maintain steering control on
slippery surfaces.
WARNING
n
Brakes
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. This will create
abnormal high brake tempera‐
tures, excessive brake lining and
pad wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid
continuous application of the
brakes. Continuous brake applica‐
tion will cause the brakes to over‐
heat and could result in a tempo‐
rary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi‐
cle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will in‐
dicate whether they have been af‐
fected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To dry
the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance re‐
turns to normal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator and
brake pedal before driving, you
may depress the accelerator in‐
stead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can make
an emergency stop with the parking
brake. The stopping distance, however,
will be much greater than normal.
WARNING
n
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving at normal speeds
can cause a sudden loss of control of
the vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehicle,
use great caution in applying the
brake.
Driving your vehicle
6-30
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear a
high-pitched warning sound from your
front brakes or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it may
occur whenever you depress the brake
pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal
and does not indicate a problem with
your brakes.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING
n
Brake wear
(Continued)
(Continued)
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service. If
you ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking perform‐
ance, which could lead to a serious
accident.
Rear drum brakes (if equipped)
Your rear drum brakes do not have
wear indicators. Therefore, have the
rear brake linings inspected if you hear
a rear brake rubbing noise. Also have
your rear brakes inspected each time
you change or rotate your tires and
when you have the front brakes re‐
placed.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then pull up the
parking brake lever as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that
when parking the vehicle on a incline,
the shift lever should be in a low gear
on manual transaxle vehicles or in the P
(Park) position on automatic transaxle
vehicles.
6-31
6
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake ap‐
plied will cause excessive brake
pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly depress
the release button (1) and lower the
parking brake lever (2) while holding
the button.
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, have the
system checked by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an au‐
tomatic transaxle, don't let your vehi‐
cle creep forward. To avoid creeping
forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the vehicle is stop‐
ped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle). or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away
from the curb to help keep the vehi‐
cle from rolling. If there is no curb or
if it is required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
Driving your vehicle
6-32
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi‐
tion. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk that the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the shift lever in P (au‐
tomatic transaxle) or in first or re‐
verse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the up‐
grade with the accelerator pedal. This
can cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or park‐
ing brake.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move‐
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the gear‐
shift lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake AND
make sure the gearshift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park) for
automatic transaxle equipped ve‐
hicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfa‐
miliar with the vehicle to touch the
parking brake. If the parking brake
is released unintentionally, serious
injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have the
parking brake fully engaged when
parking to avoid inadvertent
movement of the vehicle which
can injure occupants or pedes‐
trians.
WK-23-TF
Check the brake warning light by turn‐
ing the ignition switch ON (do not start
the engine). This light will be illumina‐
ted when the parking brake is applied
with the ignition switch in the START or
ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may be a
malfunction in the brake system. Im‐
mediate attention is necessary.
6-33
6
Driving your vehicle
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi‐
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating
the vehicle and only continue to drive
the vehicle until you can reach a safe
location or repair shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if
equipped)
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci‐
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though ve‐
hicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and ob‐
jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during extreme
road conditions.
The braking distance for cars equip‐
ped with an anti-lock braking sys‐
tem (or Electronic Stability Control
system) may be longer than for
those without it in the following
road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface is
pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not be
tested by high speed driving or cor‐
nering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going
to lock, the ABS system repeatedly
modulates the hydraulic brake pressure
to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a tik-tik’’ sound from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding sen‐
sation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa‐
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the sit‐
uation warrants and allow the ABS to
control the force being delivered to the
brakes.
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi‐
cle begins to move after the engine
is started. These conditions are nor‐
mal and indicate that the anti-lock
brake system is functioning proper‐
ly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys‐
tem, your vehicle still requires suffi‐
cient stopping distance. Always main‐
tain a safe distance from the vehicle
in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from ex‐
cessive speeds.
Driving your vehicle
6-34
• On loose or uneven road surfaces, op‐
eration of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis‐
tance than for vehicles equipped with
a conventional brake system.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev‐
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. In this
case, have the system checked by
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu‐
ously, the ABS will be active con‐
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
system is normal. Otherwise, you
may have a problem with the ABS.
In this case, have the system
checked by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens be‐
cause of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS is malfunc‐
tioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
6-35
6
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control (ESC)
(if equipped)
OYB057062
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the ve‐
hicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC
checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going.
ESC applies the brakes at individual
wheels and intervenes in the engine
management system to stabilize the
vehicle.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor‐
nering. Electronic stability Control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents. Ex‐
cessive speed in turns, abrupt ma‐
neuvers and hydroplaning on wet
surfaces can still result in serious ac‐
cidents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by
avoiding maneuvers that cause the
vehicle to lose traction. Even with
ESC installed, always follow all the
normal precautions for driving - in‐
cluding driving at safe speeds for the
conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system de‐
signed to help the driver maintain vehi‐
cle control under adverse conditions. It
is not a substitute for safe driving
practices. Factors including speed, road
conditions and driver steering input can
all affect whether ESC will be effective
in preventing a loss of control. It is still
your responsibility to drive and corner
at reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a tik-tik’’ sound from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding sen‐
sation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi‐
cle begins to move after the engine
is started. These conditions are nor‐
mal and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function‐
ing properly.
Driving your vehicle
6-36
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
-
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indica‐
tor lights illuminate for ap‐
proximately 3 seconds, then
ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
after turning the ignition ON
to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF in‐
dicator will illuminate). To
turn the ESC on, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF in‐
dicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per‐
forming an automatic sys‐
tem self-check and does not
indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
the ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating proper‐
ly, you can feel a slight pul‐
sation in the vehicle. This is
only the effect of brake con‐
trol and indicates nothing
unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slippery
road, the engine rpm (revo‐
lution per minute) may not
be increased even if you
press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain
the stability and traction of
the vehicle and does not in‐
dicate a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light and message illumi‐
nates). At this state, the engine control
function does not operate. In other
words, the traction control function
does not operate but only the brake
control function operates.
6-37
6
Driving your vehicle
• State 2
Press the ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light
and message illuminates and ESC OFF
warning chime will sound. At this state,
the engine control function and brake
control function does not operate. In
other words, the vehicle stability con‐
trol function does not operate any
more.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off, ESC
remains off. Upon restarting the en‐
gine, the ESC will automatically turn on
again.
Indicator light
ESC indicator light
ESC OFF indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operating
normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESC is turned off with the button.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
(Continued)
(Continued)
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys‐
tem is only a driving aid; use precau‐
tions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy roads.
Drive slowly and don’t attempt to
accelerate whenever the ESC indica‐
tor light is blinking, or when the road
surface is slippery.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on a
flat road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button while
ESC is operating (ESC indicator light
blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat‐
ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.
Driving your vehicle
6-38
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light il‐
luminated).
• Turning the ESC off does not af‐
fect ABS or brake system opera‐
tion.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if
equipped)
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort
function. The main intend is to prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards
while driving off uphill on an inclined
surface. HAC holds the braking pressure
builtup by driver during stopping proce‐
dure for 2 seconds after releasing
brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the ac‐
celerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as
soon as the system detects the driver’s
intention to drive off.
WARNING
The HAC is usually activated only for
2 seconds. The driver should be
careful from the rolling backward
causing the accident with behind ob‐
jects or human, when the driver may
feel the unintended rolling backward
while driving off on hill due to insuf‐
ficient brake hold pressure built-up
by driver during stopping procedure.
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti‐
vate when the ESC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhance‐
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction be‐
tween right wheels and left wheels
when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC indi‐
cator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is
only the effect of brake control and in‐
dicates nothing unusual.
6-39
6
Driving your vehicle
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light (
) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the in‐
strument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn
off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel
and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) il‐
luminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by
pressing the ESC OFF button. It indi‐
cates that a malfunction has been de‐
tected somewhere in the Electric Pow‐
er Steering system or VSM system.
If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS
warning light remains on, have the sys‐
tem checked by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9
mph) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have
different friction forces.
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen‐
tary function only. It is the respon‐
sibility of the driver to always
check the speed and the distance
to the vehicle ahead. Always hold
the steering wheel firmly while
driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in‐
clement weather and on a slippery
road.
• Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the
same size as your original tires.
ESS : Emergency Stop Signal (if
equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking the
stop light when the vehicle suddenly
stops or when the ABS activates in a
stop. (The system activates when the
vehicle speed is over 55km/h and the
vehicle deceleration is over 7m/s² or the
ABS activates when the vehicle emer‐
gency braking.)
When the vehicle speed is under 40
km/h and the ABS deactivates or the
sudden stop situation is over, the stop
light blinking will stop.
Driving your vehicle
6-40
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal system
will not work if the hazard warning
flasher is already on.
Good braking practices
WARNING
• Whenever leaving vehicle or park‐
ing, always set the parking brake
as far as possible and fully engage
the vehicle's transaxle into the
park position. Vehicles not fully en‐
gaged in park with the parking
brake set are at risk for moving in‐
advertently and injuring yourself
or others.
• All vehicles should always have the
parking brake fully engaged when
parking to avoid inadvertent
movement of the car which can in‐
jure occupants or pedestrians.
• After parking the vehicle, check to be
sure the parking brake is not engaged
and that the parking brake indicator
light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times. If the brak‐
ing action does not return to normal,
stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
have your vehicle inspected by a pro‐
fessional workshop.
Kia recommends to call an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
• Don't coast down hills with the car
out of gear. This is extremely hazard‐
ous. Keep the car in gear at all times,
use the brakes to slow down, then
shift to a lower gear so that engine
braking will help you maintain a safe
speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while
driving can be dangerous because it
can result in the brakes overheating
and losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com‐
ponents.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv‐
ing, apply the brakes gently and keep
the car pointed straight ahead while
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do
so, pull off the road and stop in a
safe place.
• If your car is equipped with an auto‐
matic transaxle, don't let your car
creep forward. To avoid creeping for‐
ward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (Park). If
your car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels into the curb to help
keep the car from rolling. If your car
is facing uphill, turn the front wheels
away from the curb to help keep the
car from rolling. If there is no curb or
if it is required by other conditions to
keep the car from rolling, block the
wheels.
6-41
6
Driving your vehicle
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi‐
tion. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk that the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the shift lever in P
(Park) and block the rear wheels so
the car cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the up‐
grade with the accelerator pedal. This
can cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or park‐
ing brake.
Driving your vehicle
6-42
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con‐
stant speed without pressing the accel‐
erator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20
mph).
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the in‐
strument cluster illuminated) the
cruise control can be switched on
accidentally. Keep the cruise con‐
trol system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise control
is not in use, to avoid inadvertent‐
ly setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways
in good weather.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the cruise control when
it may not be safe to keep the car
at a constant speed, for instance,
driving in heavy or varying traffic,
or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-
covered) or winding roads or over
6% uphill or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever using
the cruise control system.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depressing
the clutch pedal, since the engine
will be over-revved. If this happens,
depress the clutch pedal or release
the cruise control ON-OFF switch.
NOTICE
During normal cruise control opera‐
tion, when the SET switch is activa‐
ted or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener‐
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
NOTICE
To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the ON
position or starting the engine. This
is to check if the brake switch which
is important part to cancel cruise
control is in normal condition.
6-43
6
Driving your vehicle
Cruise control switch
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
O / CANCEL: Cancels cruise control op‐
eration.
/ CRUISE / : Turns cruise control
system on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise con‐
trol speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control
speed.
To set cruise control speed:
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
6-44
■ Type C
1. Press the cruise /CRUISE/ but‐
ton on the steering wheel, to turn
the system on. The cruise indicator
light will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
NOTICE
n
Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
■ Type A
■ Type B
3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
cruise set indicator light will illumi‐
nate. Release the accelerator pedal
at the same time. The desired
speed will automatically be main‐
tained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
6-45
6
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
■ Type A
■ Type B
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Re‐
lease the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and re‐
lease it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) each time you move the lever
up (to RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising speed:
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
6-46
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) each time you move the lever
down (to SET-) in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on, depress
the accelerator pedal. Increased speed
will not interfere with cruise control op‐
eration or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
■ Type A
■ Type B
6-47
6
Driving your vehicle
■ Type C
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if equipped
with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) if equipped with
an automatic transaxle.
• Press the O/CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 20 km/h
(12 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 30 km/h (20
mph).
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the cruise set indica‐
tor light will go off), but it will not turn
the system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move up the
lever (to RES+) located on your steering
wheel. You will return to your previous‐
ly preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30
km/h (20 mph):
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
6-48
If any method other than the cruise /
CRUISE/ button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the vehi‐
cle speed has dropped below approxi‐
mately 30 km/h (20 mph).
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the cruise /CRUISE/ button
(the cruise indicator light will be turn
off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con‐
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the
steps provided in To set cruise control
speed on page 6-44.
6-49
6
Driving your vehicle
SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can set the speed limit when you
do not want to drive over a specific
speed.
If you drive over the preset speed limit,
the warning system operates (set
speed limit will blink and chime will
sound) until the vehicle speed returns
within the speed limit.
NOTICE
While speed limit control is in opera‐
tion, the cruise control system can‐
not be activated.
Speed limit control switch
O: Cancels set speed limit.
:
Turns speed limit control sys‐
tem on or off.
RES+ :
Resumes or increases speed
limit control speed.
SET- :
Sets or decreases speed limit
control speed.
To set speed limit:
1. Press the speed limit button
twice on the steering wheel, to
turn the system on.
The speed limit indicator light will
illuminate.
2. Move the lever down (to SET-).
Driving your vehicle
6-50
3. Move the lever up (to RES+) or
down (to SET-), and release it at
the desired speed. Move the lever
up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) and
hold it. The speed will increase or
decrease by 5 km/h (3 mph).
The set speed limit will be displayed.
To drive over the preset speed limit you
must depress hard on the accelerator
pedal (more than approximately 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise. Then the set
speed limit will blink and chime will
sound until you return the vehicle
speed within the speed limit.
NOTICE
• Depressing the accelerator pedal
less than approximately 50%, the
vehicle will not speed over the pre‐
set speed limit but maintain the
vehicle speed within the speed lim‐
it.
• A clicking noise heard from the
kick down mechanism by depress‐
ing the accelerator pedal fully is a
normal condition.
To turn off the speed limit
control, do one of the following:
6-51
6
Driving your vehicle
• Press the speed limit switch once
again.
• Press the cruise switch (If you press
cruise switch, the cruise system will
turn on)
If you press the O switch once, the set
speed limit will cancel, but it will not
turn the system off. If you wish to re‐
set the speed limit, move the lever up
(to RES+) or down (to SET-) to the de‐
sired speed.
CAUTION
The "OFF" indicator will blink if there
is a problem with speed limit control
system.
If this occurs, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
Driving your vehicle
6-52
FORWARD COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST (FCA) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The FCA system is to reduce or to avoid
accident risk. It recognizes the distance
from the vehicle ahead or the pedes‐
trian through the sensors (i.e. radar
and camera), and, if necessary, warns
the driver of accident risk with the
warning message or the warning
alarms.
WARNING
Take the following precautions when
using the Forward Collision-Avoid‐
ance Assist (FCA) System:
• This system is only a supplemen‐
tal system and it is not intended
to, nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and ob‐
jects detectable by the sensors are
limited. Pay attention to the road
conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance
with the road conditions or while
cornering.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always drive cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situations
from occurring. FCA does not stop
the vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
System setting and activation
System setting
The driver can activate the FCA by plac‐
ing the ignition switch to the ON posi‐
tion and by selecting 'User Settings',
'Driving Assist', and 'Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA)'. The FCA deac‐
tivates, when the driver cancels the
system setting.
The warning light illuminates
on the LCD display, when you
cancel the FCA system.
The driver can monitor the FCA
ON/OFF status on the LCD display.
When the warning light remains ON
with the FCA activated, have the sys‐
tem checked by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
The driver can select the initial warning
activation time in the User Settings and
Driving Assist in the instrument cluster
LCD display. The options for the initial
Forward Collision Warning include the
following:
• EARLY - When this condition is se‐
lected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activa‐
ted earlier than normal.
This setting maximizes
the amount of distance
between the vehicle or
pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
• NORMAL -
When this condition is se‐
lected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activa‐
ted normally. This setting
allows for a nominal
amount of distance be‐
tween the vehicle or pe‐
destrian ahead before the
initial warning occurs.
• LATE - When this condition is se‐
lected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activa‐
ted later than normal.
This setting reduces the
amount of distance be‐
6-53
6
Driving your vehicle
tween the vehicle or pe‐
destrian ahead before the
initial warning occurs.
Prerequisite for activation
The FCA gets ready to be activated,
when the FCA is selected on the LCD
display, and when the following prereq‐
uisites are satisfied.
-
The ESC is activated.
-
The driving speed is over 10km/h.
(However, FCA is activated within cer‐
tain driving speed.)
-
When recognizing the vehicle or the
pedestrian in front. (However, FCA
does not activate according to condi‐
tions in front and vehicle systems,
but it notices only certain warnings.)
WARNING
• The FCA automatically activates
upon placing the ignition switch to
the ON position. The driver can de‐
activate the FCA by canceling the
system setting on the LCD display.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The FCA automatically deactivates
upon cancelling the ESC, even with
the FCA system ON, and the driver
will not be able to activate the FCA
on the LCD display.
• Set or cancel FCA with controlling
switches on steering wheel after
stopping the vehicle in the safe
place for your safety.
FCA warning message and
system control
The FCA produces warning messages
and warning alarms in accordance with
the collision risk levels of followings like
vehicle’s sudden braking in front or lack
of vehicle to vehicle distance or collision
to pedestrians. Also, it controls the
brakes in accordance with the collision
risk levels.
Forward warning (1st warning)
The warning message appears on the
LCD display with the warning alarms.
Driving your vehicle
6-54
Collision warning (2nd warning)
• The warning message appears on the
LCD display with a warning alarm.
• The vehicle will reduce its speed to a
certain limit.
- The brake activates gradually for
vehicles ahead.
- The brake control activates within
an arranged limit to ease the im‐
pact from a collision.
Emergency braking (3rd warning)
• The warning message appears on the
LCD display with a warning alarm.
• The vehicle will reduce its speed to a
certain limit.
- The brake control activates within
an arranged limit to ease the im‐
pact from a collision. Maximum
brake control is activated just be‐
fore the collision.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the driv‐
er’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The FCA provides additional braking
power for optimum braking perform‐
ance, when the driver depresses the
brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically
deactivated, when the driver sharply
depresses the brake pedal, or when
the driver abruptly operates the
steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatically
canceled, when risk factors disappear.
CAUTION
The driver should always pay great
caution to vehicle operation, even
though there is no warning message
or warning alarm.
WARNING
The FCA cannot avoid all collisions.
The FCA might not completely stop
the vehicle before collision, due to
ambient, weather and road condi‐
tions. The driver has the responsibili‐
ty to drive safely and control the ve‐
hicle.
6-55
6
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
The FCA operates in accordance with
the risk levels, such as the distance
from the vehicle/passer-by in front,
the speed of the vehicle/passer-by
in front, and the driver's vehicle op‐
eration.
Sensor to detect the distance
from the vehicle in front (front
radar)
OYB057063D
The sensor is to maintain a certain dis‐
tance from the vehicle in front. Howev‐
er, the smudged sensor lens with for‐
eign substances, such as snow and rain,
adversely affects the sensing perform‐
ance. It may even temporarily cancel
the FCA. Always keep the sensor lens
clean.
Warning message and warning light
OYB057090L
When the sensor cover or the sensor
lens is smudged with the foreign sub‐
stances, such as snow or rain, the FCA
operation may temporarily stop. In this
case, the warning message appears to
warn the driver.
This is not a malfunction with the FCA.
To operate the FCA again, remove the
foreign substances.
If the sensor is smudged entirely or no
object is sensed (in an open terrain
etc.), The FCA might not operate nor‐
mally.
Driving your vehicle
6-56
NOTICE
• Do not install any accessories,
such as license plate molding or
sticker, on the sensor area. Nor ar‐
bitrarily replace the bumper.
Those may adversely affect the
sensing performance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only soft clothes to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly-
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessa‐
ry force on the frontal sensor
area. When the sensor moves out
of the correct position due to ex‐
ternal force, the system may not
normally operate even without the
warning light or message. In this
case, have the vehicle inspected by
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not arbitrarily apply
paint on the sensor cover.
System malfunction
OYB057091L
• When the FCA is not working proper‐
ly, the FCA warning light ( ) will illu‐
minate and the warning message will
appear for a few seconds.
After the message disappears, the
master warning light ( ) will illumi‐
nate. In this case, have the vehicle in‐
spected by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
• The FCA warning message may ap‐
pear along with the illumination of
the ESC warning light.
WARNING
• The FCA is only a supplemental
system for the driver’s conven‐
ience. The driver should hold the
responsibility to control the vehicle
operation. Do not solely depend on
the FCA system. Rather, maintain
a safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake ped‐
al to lower the driving speed.
• The FCA may unnecessarily pro‐
duce the warning message and the
warning alarms. Also, due to the
sensing limitation, the FCA may
not produce the warning message
and the warning alarm at all.
• When there is a malfunction with
the FCA, the braking control does
not operate upon detecting a colli‐
sion risk even with other braking
systems normally operating.
(Continued)
6-57
6
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• The FCA operates only for the ve‐
hicle / pedestrian in front, while
driving forward. It does not oper‐
ate for any animals or vehicles in
the opposite direction.
• The FCA does not recognize the
vehicle, which horizontally drives
across the crossroad, or the vehi‐
cle, which is parked in the horizon‐
tal direction.
Limitation of the system
The FCA is an assistant system for a
driver in a certain risky driving condition
and it does not take every responsibili‐
ty for all risks from driving condition.
The FCA monitors the driving situations
through the radar and the camera sen‐
sor. Thus, for a situation out of the
sensing range, the FCA may not nor‐
mally operate. The driver should pay
great caution in the following situa‐
tions. The FCA operation may be limi‐
ted.
Recognizing vehicles
-
The radar or the camera is contami‐
nated with foreign substances.
-
It heavily rains or snows.
-
There is interruption by electric
waves.
-
There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar.
-
The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motor cycle and bicycle)
-
The driver’s view is unclear due to
the backlight, the reflected light, or
darkness.
-
The camera cannot contain the full
image of the vehicle in front.
-
The vehicle in front is a special vehi‐
cle, such as a heavily-loaded truck or
a trailer.
The vehicle in front does not turn ON
the rear lights, does not have rear
lights, has asymmetric rear lights, or
has rear lights out of angle.
-
The outside brightness is greatly
changed, such as entering/exiting the
tunnel.
-
The vehicle driving is unstable.
-
The radar/camera sensor recognition
is limited.
-
Driving on unpaved and uneven road
surfaces, or through sudden gradient
changes.
-
In construction zones or on railroad
tracks, or there are metallic objects
on the road.
-
Driving indoors such as in an under‐
ground parking lot.
-
Driving on a curve
The FCA performance decreases
while driving on a curve. The FCA may
not recognize the vehicle in front
even in the same lane. It may unnec‐
essarily produce the warning mes‐
sage and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes‐
sage and the warning alarm at all.
While driving on a curve, pay great
caution, and, if necessary, depress
the brake pedal.
Driving your vehicle
6-58
-
While driving on a curve, the FCA may
recognize the vehicle in front in the
next lane. Pay great caution, and, if
necessary, depress the brake pedal.
Or, depress the accelerator pedal to
maintain the driving speed. Always,
take a look around the vehicle for
your safety.
-
Driving on a slope
The FCA performance decreases
while driving upward or downward on
a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in
front in the same lane. It may unnec‐
essarily produce the warning mes‐
sage and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes‐
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the FCA suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing over
a slope, you may experience sharp
deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal.
-
Changing lanes
Even though the vehicle in the next
lane enters into your lane, it may not
be recognized by the FCA, until it en‐
ters the FCA sensing range.
Especially when the vehicle in the
next lane abruptly enters into your
lane, it is more likely not be recog‐
nized. Always pay great attention.
6-59
6
Driving your vehicle
-
When the stopped vehicle in front
gets out of the lane, it may not be
recognized by your FCA. Always pay
great attention.
-
Recognizing the vehicle
When the vehicle in front has heavy
loading extended rearward, or when
the vehicle in front has higher ground
clearance, it may induce a hazardous
situation.
Recognizing pedestrians
-
The pedestrian is not fully captured
by the camera sensor, or the pedes‐
trian does not walk in the upright po‐
sition.
-
The pedestrian moves very fast.
-
The pedestrian abruptly appears in
front.
-
The pedestrian wears clothes in the
color similar to the background.
-
The outside is too bright or too dark.
-
The vehicle drives at night or in the
darkness.
-
There is an item similar to a person’s
body structure.
-
The pedestrian is small.
-
The pedestrian has impaired mobility.
-
It is difficult to distinguish the pedes‐
trian from the surroundings.
-
The sensor recognition is limited.
-
There is a group of pedestrians.
WARNING
• Cancel the FCA in the User Set‐
tings on the LCD display, before
towing another vehicle. While tow‐
ing, the brake application may ad‐
versely affect your vehicle safety.
• Pay great caution to the vehicle in
front, when it has heavy loading
extended rearward, or when it has
higher ground clearance.
• The sensor only detects pedes‐
trian, not carts, bicycles, motorcy‐
cles, luggage bags, or strollers.
• The FCA does not operate in a cer‐
tain situation. Thus, never test-
operate the FCA against a person
or an object. It may cause a severe
injury or even death.
• When reinstalling the windshield or
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
camera after replacement or re‐
moval, have the vehicle inspected
by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Driving your vehicle
6-60
NOTICE
The system may temporarily cancel
due to the strong electric waves.
6-61
6
Driving your vehicle
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYB057066D
This system detects the lane with the
sensor at the front windshield and
warns you when your vehicle leaves the
lane.
WARNING
• The Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the driv‐
er's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not turn the steering wheel
suddenly, when the Lane Depar‐
ture Warning (LDW) System warns
you that your vehicle is leaving the
lane.
• If the sensor can not detect the
lane or if the vehicle speed does
not exceed 60km/h, the Lane De‐
parture Warning (LDW) System
won't warn you even though the
vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating and acces‐
sory on the front windshield, the
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
System may not work properly.
• Do not let water or any kind of liq‐
uid come in contact with the Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) System
sensor.
• Do not remove the Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) System parts and
do not affect the sensor by a
strong impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect
light on the dash board.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-62
(Continued)
• Always check road conditions be‐
cause you may not hear the warn‐
ing chime because of audio and ex‐
ternal conditions.
To operate the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System, press the switch with
the ignition in the ON position. The indi‐
cator illuminates white on the cluster.
To cancel the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System, press Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) System button again.
The indicator on the cluster will go off.
If you select trip display, the Lane De‐
parture Warning (LDW) System mode
on the LCD display will appear.
If your vehicle leaves the lane when the
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System
is operating and vehicle speed exceeds
60 km/h, the warning operates as fol‐
lows:
■ Left lane departure warning
■ Right lane departure warning
1. Visual warning
If you leave a lane, the lane you
cross will blink (yellow) and Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) System
indicator will blink green on LCD
during max 3 seconds.
6-63
6
Driving your vehicle
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates for maximum
3 seconds.
The color of symbol will change de‐
pend on the condition of Lane De‐
parture Warning (LDW) System
system.
• White
color:
When you activate the lane
departure warning system
by pressing the Lane Depar‐
ture Warning (LDW) System
button, system operating
conditions are not satisfied
or the sensor does not de‐
tect the lane line.
• Green
color:
When you activate the lane
departure warning system
by pressing the Lane Depar‐
ture Warning (LDW) System
button, system operating
conditions are satisfied and
the sensor detect the lane
line.
• Yellow
color:
When there is a malfunction
with the lane departure
warning system.
Warning indicator
OYB057092L
When the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System is not working properly,
the warning light will illuminate and the
warning message will come on for a
few second. After the message disap‐
pears, the master warning light will illu‐
minate.
In this case, have the system checked
by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
The Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal or
the hazard warning flasher to change
lane.
• Driving on the lane line.
NOTICE
To change lanes, operate the turn
signal switch, then change the lane.
The Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) System may not warn
you even if the vehicle leaves
the lane, or may warn you even
if the vehicle does not leave the
lane when:
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or many other
things.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly.
• The headlights are off at night or in a
tunnel.
Driving your vehicle
6-64
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.
• Light reflects from the water on the
road.
• The lens or windshield is stained with
foreign matter.
• The sensor can not detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or heavy
snow.
• The surrounding temperature of the
inside rear view mirror is high due to
a direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indistinct.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead hides
the lane line.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or decrea‐
ses or the lane lines are crossing
complicatedly.
• Putting something on the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• The lane line is more than two in ei‐
ther side (Left/Right).
• The windshield is fogged by humid air
in the vehicle.
• The driver turns the wiper switch to
HI mode.
6-65
6
Driving your vehicle
DRIVER ATTENTION WARNING (DAW) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system displays the condition of the
driver's fatigue level and inattentive
driving practices.
System setting and activation
System setting
• The Driver Attention Warning system
is set to be in the OFF position, when
your vehicle is first delivered to you
from the factory.
• To turn ON the Driver Attention
Warning system, turn on the engine,
and then select 'User Settings
Driving Assist Driver Attention
Warning Normal/Early' on the LCD
display.
• The driver can select the Driver At‐
tention Warning system mode.
- Off: The Driver Attention Warning
system is deactivated.
- Normal: The Driver Attention
Warning system alerts the driver
of his/her fatigue level or inatten‐
tive driving practices.
- Early: The Driver Attention Warn‐
ing system alerts the driver of
his/her fatigue level or inattentive
driving practices faster than Nor‐
mal mode.
• The set-up of the Driver Attention
Warning system will be maintained,
as selected, when the engine is re‐
started.
Display of the driver's attention
level
OYB057087L
System off
OYB057078L
Attentive driving
OYB057077L
Inattentive driving
• The driver can monitor their driving
conditions on the LCD display.
The DAW screen will appear when
you select the ASSIST mode tab ( )
on the LCD display if the system is
activated. (For more information, re‐
fer to LCD Modes on page 4-58.)
• The driver's attention level is dis‐
played on the scale of 1 to 5. The
lower the number is, the more inat‐
tentive the driver is.
• The number decreases when the
driver does not take a break for a
certain period of time.
• The number increases when the driv‐
er attentively drives for a certain pe‐
riod of time.
Driving your vehicle
6-66
• When the driver turns on the system
while driving, it displays 'Last Break
time' and level.
Take a break
OYB057079L
• The "Consider taking a break" mes‐
sage appears on the LCD display and
a warning sounds in order to suggest
the driver to take a break, when the
driver's attention level is below 1.
• The Driver Attention Warning system
does not suggest the driver to take a
break, when the total driving time is
shorter than 10 minutes.
Resetting the system
• The last break time is set to 00:00
and the driver's attention level is set
to 5 (very attentive) when the driver
resets the Driver Attention Warning
system.
• The Driver Attention Warning system
resets the last break time to 00:00
and the driver's attention level to 5 in
the following situations.
- The engine is turned OFF.
- The driver unfastens the seat belt
and then opens the driver's door.
- The engine has been idled continu‐
ously over 10 minutes.
• The Driver Attention Warning system
operates again, when the driver re‐
starts driving.
System standby
OYB057088L
The Driver Attention Warning system
enters the ready status and displays
the 'Standby' screen in the following
situations.
-
The camera does not detect the
lanes.
-
Driving speed remains under 60 km/h
(40 mph) or over 200 km/h
(125 mph).
6-67
6
Driving your vehicle
System malfunction
OYB057089L
When the "Check Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system" warning mes‐
sage appears, the system is not work‐
ing properly. In this case, have the vehi‐
cle inspected by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
• The Driver Attention Warning sys‐
tem is not a substitute for safe
driving practices, but a conven‐
ience function only. It is the re‐
sponsibility of the driver to always
drive cautiously to prevent unex‐
pected and sudden situations from
occurring. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• The system may suggest a break
according to the driver's driving
pattern or habits even if the driver
doesn't feel fatigue.
• The driver, who feels fatigued,
should take a break, even though
there is no break suggestion by
the Driver Attention Warning sys‐
tem.
NOTICE
The Driver Attention Warning sys‐
tem utilizes the camera sensor on
the front windshield for its opera‐
tion. To keep the camera sensor in
(Continued)
(Continued)
the best condition, you should ob‐
serve the followings:
• NEVER install any accessories or
stickers on the front windshield,
nor tint the front windshield.
• NEVER locate any reflective ob‐
jects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over
the dashboard. Any light reflection
may cause a malfunction of the
Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera sensor out of water.
• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the
camera assembly, nor apply any
impact on the camera assembly.
CAUTION
The Driver Attention Warning sys‐
tem may not properly operate with
limited alerting in the following sit‐
uations:
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-68
(Continued)
• The vehicle is violently driven or is
abruptly turned for obstacle
avoidance (e.g. construction area,
other vehicles, fallen objects, bum‐
py road).
• Forward drivability of the vehicle is
severely undermined (possibly due
to wide variation in tire pressures,
uneven tire wear-out, toe-in/toe-
out alignment).
• The vehicle drives on a curvy road.
• The vehicle drives through a windy
area.
• The vehicle is controlled by the fol‐
lowing driving assist systems:
- Forward Collision-Avoidance As‐
sist (FCA) System
- Smart Cruise Control (SCC) Sys‐
tem
CAUTION
Playing the vehicle audio system at
high volume may offset the Driver
Attention Warning system warning
sounds.
6-69
6
Driving your vehicle
BLIND-SPOT COLLISION WARNING (BCW) (IF EQUIPPED)
ODE056063L
The Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system uses a radar sensor to alert the
driver while driving.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides information to the
driver.
1. Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
Warning range is dependent on
your vehicle speed. However, if the
speed of your vehicle is faster by
10km/h or more than other nearby
vehicles, the warning is not operat‐
ed.
2. Lane change assist (LCA)
When vehicles are approaching to
your vehicle at high speed, the
warning is operated.
3. Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning
(RCCW)
When your vehicle moves back‐
ward, the sensor detects approach‐
ing vehicles to the left or right side
direction and warning is operated.
WARNING
• Always check the road condition
while driving for unexpected situa‐
tions even though the Blind-Spot
Collision Warning (BCW) system is
operating.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system is a system made for con‐
venience. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
to drive safely.
Driving your vehicle
6-70
BCW (Blind-Spot Collision
Warning) / LCA (Lane Change
Assist)
Operating conditions
OYB057086
The indicator on the switch will illumi‐
nate when the Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system switch is press‐
ed with the ignition switch ON. If the
vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h
(18.6 mph), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF and
ON the system returns to the previous
state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by pressing the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for
3 seconds on the outside rearview mir‐
ror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on
2. Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h
(18.6 mph)
3. Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
ODE056033
1st stage
If a vehicle is detected within the boun‐
dary of the system, a warning light will
illuminate on the outside rearview mir‐
ror.
If the detected vehicle is not in detec‐
tion range, the warning will be turned
off.
6-71
6
Driving your vehicle
ODE056034
2nd stage
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1. The first stage alert is on
2. The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is activa‐
ted, a warning light will be blinking on
the outside rearview mirror and an
alarm will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
origin position, the second stage alert
will be deactivated.
-
The second stage alarm can be deac‐
tivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode
Sound and select Blind-Spot Collision
Warning Sound on the LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm :
Go to the User Settings Mode
Sound and deselect Blind-Spot Colli‐
sion Warning Sound on the LCD dis‐
play.
CAUTION
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary.
Detecting sensor
OYB057087D
The sensors are located inside the rear
bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean for
the system to work properly.
Warning message
The message (Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system disabled. Radar
blocked) will appear to notify the driv‐
er if there are foreign substances on
the rear bumper or it is hot near the
rear bumper. The light on the switch
and the system will be turned off auto‐
matically.
Remove the foreign substance on the
rear bumper.
Driving your vehicle
6-72
After the foreign substance is removed,
if you drive for approximately
10 minutes, the system will work nor‐
mally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substance is
removed, take your vehicle to a profes‐
sional workshop and have the system
checked. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
It is possible to get the message with
no foreign substance on the rear
bumper, for example, when driving in
sparse rural or open area, such as des‐
ert, where there is insufficient data for
operation.
This message may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray.
In this case, the vehicle does not need
service.
If the system does not work properly, a
warning message
(Check Blind-Spot
Collision Warning (BCW) system) will
appear and the light on the switch will
turn off. The system will turn off auto‐
matically.
In this case, have the system checked
by a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning
ODE056064
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor de‐
tects approaching vehicles to the left or
right side direction and gives informa‐
tion to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Go to the User Settings Mode Driv‐
ing Assist Rear Collision Warning
and select "Rear Cross-Traffic Colli‐
sion Warning" on the LCD display. The
system will turn on and stand by to
be activated.
• Select Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning again, to turn the system
off.
• If the vehicle is turned off and on
again, the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning system will return to the
state right before the vehicle was
turned off. Turn the Rear Cross-Traf‐
fic Collision Warning system off when
not in use.
• The system is operated when the ve‐
hicle speed is below 10km/h with the
shift lever in R (Reverse).
• The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning detection range is
0.5m~20m based on side direction. If
an approaching vehicle speed is 4 km/
h~36 km/h in detection range, the
warning is on. However, the system
sensing range is different based on
conditions. Always pay attention to
surrounding.
6-73
6
Driving your vehicle
Warning type
OQLE055130
OYB057083LOYB057082L
• If an approaching vehicle detected by
sensors, the warning is chime and the
warning light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is out of de‐
tection range, moving away in the
opposite direction or moving slow,
the warning is cancelled.
• The system may not be operating
properly due to other factors or cir‐
cumstances, so always pay attention
to your surrounding.
❈ If the bumper on either side is
blocked by a barrier or vehicles, the
system sensing ability may be de‐
teriorated.
WARNING
• The warning light on the outside
rearview mirror will illuminate
whenever a vehicle is detected at
the rear side by the system.
To avoid accidents, do not focus
only on the warning light and ne‐
glect to see the surrounding of the
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Drive safely even though the vehi‐
cle is equipped with a Blind-Spot
Collision Warning (BCW) system.
Do not solely rely on the system
but check for yourself before
changing lanes.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so al‐
ways check the surroundings while
driving.
CAUTION
• The system may not work proper‐
ly if the bumper has been replaced
or if a repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs accord‐
ing to the roads width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the second next
lane.
• On the contrary, if the road is very
wide the system may not detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
6-74
(Continued)
• The system might be turned off
due to strong electromagnetic
waves.
Non-operating condition
Outside rearview mirror may not alert
the driver when:
-
The outside rearview mirror housing
is damaged or covered with debris.
-
The window is covered with debris.
-
The windows are severely tinted.
Driver's attention
The driver must be cautious in the be‐
low situations, because the system
may not detect other vehicles or ob‐
jects in certain circumstances.
-
The vehicle drives on a curved road or
through a tollgate.
-
The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
-
The rear bumper, in which the sensor
is located, is covered or blocked with
a foreign matter such as a sticker, a
bumper guard, a bicycle stand, etc.
-
The rear bumper is damaged, or the
sensor is out of the original default
position.
-
The vehicle height gets lower or high‐
er due to heavy loading in a tailgate,
abnormal tire pressure, etc.
-
The vehicle drives in a bad weather
such as heavy rain or snow.
-
There is a fixed object near the vehi‐
cle, such as a guardrail.
-
A big vehicle is near such as a bus or
truck.
-
A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
-
A flat trailer is near.
-
If the vehicle has started at the same
time as the vehicle next to you and
has accelerated.
-
When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
-
While changing lanes.
-
When going down or up a steep, un‐
even road.
-
When the other vehicle approaches
very close.
-
When a trailer or carrier is installed.
-
When the temperature of the rear
bumper is very high or low.
-
When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
-
When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
-
If there are small things like shopping
cart and baby carriage.
-
If there is low height vehicle like sport
vehicle.
-
When other vehicles are close to your
vehicle.
-
When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you OR
when the vehicle two lanes away
moves to the next lane from you.
-
When driving through a narrow road
with many plants.
-
When driving on wet surface.
6-75
6
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many kilometers (miles) you can get
from a liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as possi‐
ble, use the following driving sugges‐
tions to help save money in both fuel
and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a mod‐
erate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit"
starts or full-throttle shifts and
maintain a steady cruising speed.
Don't race between stoplights. Try to
adjust your speed to the traffic so
you don't have to change speeds un‐
necessarily. Avoid heavy traffic
whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid un‐
necessary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The fast‐
er you drive, the more fuel your vehi‐
cle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway, is
one of the most effective ways to re‐
duce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot
resting on the brake pedal may cause
the brakes to overheat, which re‐
duces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres‐
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unneces‐
sary tire wear. Check the tire pres‐
sures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can re‐
sult from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor
alignment causes faster tire wear
and may also result in other prob‐
lems as well as greater fuel con‐
sumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in Maintenance on page
8-07. If you drive your car in severe
conditions, more frequent mainte‐
nance is required (see Maintenance
on page 8-07 for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials.
It is especially important that mud,
dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accu‐
mulate on the underside of the car.
This extra weight can result in in‐
creased fuel consumption and also
contribute to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessa‐
ry weight in your car. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
• Remember, your vehicle does not re‐
quire extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine
to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to
placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting in the engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing the
engine beyond its safe limit. This can
be avoided by shifting at the recom‐
mended speeds.
Driving your vehicle
6-76
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is oper‐
ated by engine power so your fuel
economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can re‐
duce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some
of this loss, slow down when driving
in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econo‐
my and safety. Therefore, have the
system serviced by a professional
workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function prop‐
erly without the engine running. In‐
stead, keep the engine on and down‐
(Continued)
(Continued)
shift to an appropriate gear for en‐
gine braking effect. In addition, turn‐
ing off the ignition while driving
could engage the steering wheel lock
resulting in loss of vehicle steering
which could cause serious injury or
death.
6-77
6
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis‐
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
WARNING
n
ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING
n
Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident. The
sudden change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. Be careful
when downshifting on slippery sur‐
faces.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first
turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around your front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth be‐
tween 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in ve‐
hicles equipped with a manual transaxle
or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in
vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle. Do not race the engine, and
spin the wheels as little as possible. If
you are still stuck after a few tries,
have the vehicle pulled out by a tow ve‐
hicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause engine
over-heating, transaxle damage or
failure, and tire damage.
WARNING
n
Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially at
speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station‐
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
NOTICE
The ESC system (if equipped) should
be turned OFF prior to rocking the
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
6-78
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may
attempt to rock the vehicle free by
moving it forward and backward. Do
not attempt this procedure if people
or objects are anywhere near the ve‐
hicle. During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move for‐
ward of backward as it becomes un‐
stuck, causing injury or damage to
nearby people or objects.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor‐
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be
held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to re‐
member:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
6-79
6
Driving your vehicle
• Keep your headlights clean and prop‐
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more
difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head‐
lights of oncoming vehicles. You could
be temporarily blinded, and it will
take several seconds for your eyes to
readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre‐
pared for the slick pavement. Here are
a few things to consider when driving in
the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip‐
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pave‐
ment can cause a skid and possibly
lead to an accident. Be sure your tires
are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud‐
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to drive
through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking op‐
eration returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas un‐
less you are sure the water is no higher
than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slow‐
ly.
Driving your vehicle
6-80
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you are
going to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres‐
sures will result in overheating and pos‐
sible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction or
tire failure.
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire in‐
flation pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated tires
can cause poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents, inju‐
ries, and even death. Always check
tires for proper inflation before
driving. For proper tire pressures,
refer to Tires and wheels on
page 9-06.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi‐
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out
tires can result in loss of vehicle
control, collisions, injury, and even
death. Worn-out tires should be
replaced as soon as possible and
should never be used for driving.
Always check the tire tread before
driving your car. For further infor‐
mation and tread limits, refer to
Tires and wheels on page 9-06.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may re‐
sult in overheating of the engine.
6-81
6
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
More severe weather conditions of win‐
ter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize winter driving
problem, you should follow these sug‐
gestions:
❈ Snow tires and tire chains for the
national language (Icelandic, Bul‐
garian) see the Appendix to chapter
10.
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires or
to install tire chains on your tires. If
snow tires are needed, it is necessary
to select tires equivalent in size and
type of the original equipment tires.
Failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accelera‐
tion, sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns are potentially very haz‐
ardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake ap‐
plications on snowy or icy roads may
cause skids to occur. You need to keep
sufficient distance between the vehicle
in operation in front and your vehicle.
Also, apply the brake gently. It should
be noted that installing tire chains on
the tire will provide a greater driving
force, but will not prevent side skids.
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all coun‐
tries. Check the country laws before
fitting tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi‐
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions. Keep
in mind that the traction provided by
snow tires on dry roads may not be as
high as your vehicle's original equip‐
ment tires.You should drive cautiously
even when the roads are clear. Check
with the tire dealer for maximum
speed recommendations.
WARNING
n
Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stand‐
ard tires. Otherwise, the safety and
handling of your vehicle may be ad‐
versely affected.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal
regulations for possible restrictions
against their use.
Driving your vehicle
6-82
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of snow
chains. Do not mount tire chains on ve‐
hicles equipped with aluminum wheels;
snow chains may cause damage to the
wheels. If snow chains must be used,
use wire-type chains with a thickness
of less than 12 mm (0.47 in). Damage
to your vehicle caused by improper
snow chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front
tires.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are the
correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac‐
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the tire.
Make sure the snow chains are
SAE class S certified.
• Always check chain installation for
proper mounting after driving ap‐
proximately 0.5 to 1 km
(0.3 to 0.6 miles) to ensure safe
mounting. Retighten or remount
the chains if they are loose.
• Even with the appropriate chain
installed, do not make a full
turn(turn the steering wheel fully
to one side) when driving the vehi‐
cle. (If you are making a full turn,
drive with the speed below
10 km/h.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your vehicle has 205/55R17 and
205/45R17 size tires, do not use
tire chain; they can damage your
vehicle (wheel, suspension and
body).
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the man‐
ufacturer's instructions and mount
them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chassis,
stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until it stops.
Remove the chains as soon as you be‐
gin driving on cleared roads.
WARNING
n
Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle if available. Al‐
(Continued)
6-83
6
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
ways place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
WARNING
n
Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec‐
ommended speed limit, whichever
is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road
hazards, which may cause the ve‐
hicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel
braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspen‐
sion, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quali‐
ty ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant
that should be used because it helps
prevent corrosion in the cooling sys‐
tem, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or
replenish your coolant in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
Cooling system on page 8-42.
Before winter, have your coolant tested
to assure that its freezing point is suf‐
ficient for the temperatures anticipa‐
ted during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the
battery and cables as described in
8-63. Have the level of charge in your
battery checked by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
Recommendations on page 9-15. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, Kia recommends to consult
an authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
8-42 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and com‐
ponents to be sure they are not
cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
Driving your vehicle
6-84
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt
an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine
into the key opening. If a lock is covered
with ice, squirt it with an approved de-
icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock
is frozen internally, you may be able to
thaw it out by using a heated key. Han‐
dle the heated key with care to avoid
injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window wash‐
er system from freezing, add an ap‐
proved window washer anti-freeze sol‐
ution in accordance with instructions on
the container. Window washer anti-
freeze is available from an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner and most au‐
to parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze as
these may damage the paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi‐
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lev‐
er in P (automatic transaxle) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow
accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and in‐
terfere with the steering. When driving
in severe winter conditions where this
may happen, you should periodically
check underneath the car to be sure
the movement of the front wheels and
the steering components is not ob‐
structed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropriate
emergency equipment. Some of the
items you may want to carry include
tire chains, tow straps or chains, flash‐
light, emergency flares, sand, shovel,
jumper cables, window scraper, gloves,
ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
6-85
6
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)
If you are considering towing with your
car, you should first check with your
country’s Department of Motor Vehi‐
cles to determine their legal require‐
ments.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Kia
recommends to ask an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equip‐
ment and drive improperly, you can
lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well
- or even at all. You and your pas‐
sengers could be seriously or fatally
injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section.
WARNING
n
Weight limits
(Continued)
(Continued)
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
NOTICE
n
For Europe
• The technically permissible maxi‐
mum load on the rear axle(s) may
be exceeded by not more than
15 % and the technically permissi‐
ble maximum laden mass of the
vehicle may be exceeded by not
more than 10 % or 100 kg
(220.4 lbs), whichever value is low‐
er. In this case, do not exceed
100 km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of
category M1 or 80 km/h
(49.7 mph) for vehicle of category
N1.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When towing a trailer, the addi‐
tional load imposed at the trailer
coupling device may cause the
rear tire maximum load ratings to
be exceeded, but not by more
than 15%. In such a case, do not
exceed 100 km/h, and the rear tire
pressure should be at least 20 kPa
(0.2 bar) above the tire pressure(s)
as recommended for normal use
(i.e. without a trailer attached).
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can dam‐
age your vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by your warran‐
ty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identi‐
fy what the vehicle trailering capacity is
for your vehicle, you should read the in‐
formation in Weight of the trailer on
page 6-92.
Driving your vehicle
6-86
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Success‐
ful, safe trailering requires correct
equipment, and it has to be used prop‐
erly.
This section contains many time-tes‐
ted, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for
your safety and that of your passen‐
gers. Please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies,
and tires are forced to work harder
against the load of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at
relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads. This additional burden
generates extra heat. The trailer also
considerably adds wind resistance, in‐
creasing pulling requirements.
OYB057089D
NOTICE
n
Location of trailer mounting
CUV
After removing rear bumper and
back beam, hitch equipment can be
installed. The rear bumper should be
reinstalled after completion of hitch
equipment installation.
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few
reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install
a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure
to seal the holes later when you re‐
move the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle, as well as
dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Kia trailer hitch accessary is available
at an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains be‐
tween your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue
will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch.
6-87
6
Driving your vehicle
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation
for attaching safety chains. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your trailer. And, never allow safe‐
ty chains drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating cor‐
rectly.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer
brakes loaded, then it needs its own
brakes and they must be adequate. Be
sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able
to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake
system.
WARNING
n
Trailer brakes
(Continued)
(Continued)
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi‐
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get to
know your trailer. Acquaint yourself
with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehi‐
cle you are driving is now a good deal
longer and not nearly so responsive as
your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This lets you check
your electrical connection at the same
time.
During your trip, check occasionally to
be sure that the load is secure, and
that the lights and trailer brakes are
still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when driv‐
ing your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that re‐
quire heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer.
And, because of the increased vehicle
length, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you
can return to your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trail‐
er to the left, just move your hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right. Al‐
ways back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Driving your vehicle
6-88
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do this
so your trailer won’t strike soft should‐
ers, curbs, road signs, trees, or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu‐
vers. Signal well in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green ar‐
rows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected, the
trailer lights will also flash to alert oth‐
er drivers you’re about to turn, change
lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green ar‐
rows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing
your signals when, in fact, they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still work‐
ing. You must also check the lights ev‐
ery time you disconnect and then re‐
connect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting sys‐
tem. Use only an approved trailer wir‐
ing harness.
Have yourself assisted by a professio‐
nal workshop in installing the wiring
harness.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam‐
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
Driving on grades
Reduce the speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h
(45 mph) to reduce the possibility of
engine and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer
brakes and you have an automatic
transaxle, you should drive in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat. If the
needle of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial to‐
wards H (HOT) (or 130°C /
260°F), pull over and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so, and allow the
engine to idle until it cools down.
You may proceed once the engine
has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide the driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibili‐
ty of engine and transaxle over‐
heating.
6-89
6
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached
to your vehicle, you should not park
your vehicle on a hill. People can be se‐
riously or fatally injured, and both your
vehicle and the trailer can be damaged
if unexpectedly roll down hill.
WARNING
n
Parking on a hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause serious
injury or death, should the trailer
break loose.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed down hill, left if headed up
hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual trans‐
axle, place the car in neutral. If the
vehicle has an automatic transaxle,
place the car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the brakes
until the trailer chocks absorb the
load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to R (Reverse) for manual transaxle
or P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING
n
Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or fatal‐
ly injured.
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neu‐
tral or automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Driving your vehicle
6-90
Maintenance when trailer
towing
Your vehicle will need service more of‐
ten when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular at‐
tention to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cool‐
ing system fluid. Brake condition is an‐
other important item to frequently
check. Each item is covered in this man‐
ual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a
good idea to review these sections be‐
fore you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trail‐
er and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably,
conduct the check at the start of each
day’s driving. Most importantly, all
hitch nuts and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur in
hot days or during uphill driving. If
the coolant gauge indicates over‐
heating, switch off the A/C and
stop the vehicle in a safe area to
cool down the engine.
• When towing, check the transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with
an air conditioner, you should in‐
stall a condenser fan to improve
engine performance when towing
a trailer.
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your car
during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)
in order to allow the engine to prop‐
erly break in. Failure to heed this cau‐
tion may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, Kia recom‐
mends that you consult an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner on ad‐
ditional requirements such as a tow‐
ing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moder‐
ate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted tow‐
ing speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important consid‐
erations that have to do with weight:
For Europe
Item
1.0L T-GDI 1.2L MPI 1.4L MPI 1.6L Diesel
6M/T 5M/T 6M/T 6M/T
Maximum
trailer
weight
Without brake System 450 (992) 450 (992) 450 (992) 450 (992)
6-91
6
Driving your vehicle
Item
1.0L T-GDI 1.2L MPI 1.4L MPI 1.6L Diesel
6M/T 5M/T 6M/T 6M/T
kg (Ibs.)
With brake System 1,110 (2,447) 910 (2,006) 1,000 (2,204)
1,110
(2,447)
Maximum permissible static vertical
load on the coupling device
75 (165)
kg (Ibs.)
Recommended distance from rear
wheel center to coupling point
805 (32)
mm (inch)
Weight of the trailer
A : Tongue Load
B : Total Trailer Weight
What is the maximum safe weight of a
trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be too
heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude,
road grades, outside temperature and
how often your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. The ideal trail‐
er weight can also depend on any spe‐
cial equipment that you have on your
vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
A : Gross Axle Weight
B : Gross Vehicle Weight
Driving your vehicle
6-92
The tongue load of any trailer is an im‐
portant weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight in‐
cludes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a max‐
imum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maxi‐
mum trailer tongue load permissible.
After you've loaded your trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue, sepa‐
rately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be able to cor‐
rect them simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
WARNING
n
Trailer
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the to‐
tal trailer load; the rear should be
loaded with approximately 40% of
the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail‐
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal injury.
Check weights and loading at a
commercial scale or highway pa‐
trol office equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
6-93
6
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, to keep your
loaded vehicle weight within its design
rating capability. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
the vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize your‐
self with the following terms for deter‐
mining your vehicle's weight ratings,
from the vehicle's specifications and
the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle includ‐
ing a full tank of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include passen‐
gers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle
(front or rear). These numbers are
shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight
rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer‐
tification label located on the driver’s
(or front passenger’s) door sill.
Overloading
WARNING
n
Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(Continued)
(Continued)
(GVWR) for your vehicle are on the
certification label attached to the
driver's (or front passenger’s) door.
Exceeding these ratings can cause
an accident or vehicle damage. You
can calculate the weight of your load
by weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your vehi‐
cle.
Driving your vehicle
6-94
Road warning.............................................................................7-02
Hazard warning flasher........................................................7-02
In case of an emergency while driving.................................. 7-03
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing.................7-03
If you have a flat tire while driving.................................... 7-03
If the engine stalls while driving.........................................7-03
If the engine will not start.......................................................7-04
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly......7-04
If the engine turns over normally but does not start.... 7-04
Emergency starting..................................................................7-05
Jump starting.........................................................................7-05
Push-starting........................................................................ 7-06
If the engine overheats............................................................ 7-07
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........................... 7-08
System Overview.................................................................. 7-08
TPMS Setting......................................................................... 7-08
Indication of Low Tire Pressure..........................................7-09
Tire Pressure Monitoring System malfunction................7-10
Reference : Indicator Light Status..................................... 7-11
If You Have A Flat Tire (With Spare Tire).............................. 7-12
Jack and tools........................................................................ 7-12
Removing and storing the spare tire.................................7-12
Changing tires........................................................................7-13
Jack label.................................................................................7-18
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack.............................. 7-19
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit)........................7-20
Introduction............................................................................7-21
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)......................7-22
Using the Tire Mobility Kit...................................................7-23
Distributing the sealant....................................................... 7-24
Checking the tire inflation pressure...................................7-24
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit................ 7-25
Technical data........................................................................7-25
Towing.........................................................................................7-26
Towing service....................................................................... 7-26
Removable towing hook ..................................................... 7-27
Emergency towing................................................................7-27
Emergency commodity ........................................................... 7-30
Fire extinguisher................................................................... 7-30
First aid kit............................................................................. 7-30
Triangle reflector.................................................................. 7-30
Tire pressure gauge .............................................................7-30
What to do in an emergency
7
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise ex‐
treme caution when approaching, over‐
taking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the ve‐
hicle is stopped near the edge of a
roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ig‐
nition switch in any position. The flash‐
er switch is located in the center con‐
sole switch panel. All turn signal lights
will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or
not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the ve‐
hicle is being towed.
What to do in an emergency
7-02
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a
crossroad or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2 (second) or 3
(third) gear and then turning the
starter without depressing the clutch
pedal.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
apply the brakes immediately or
attempt to pull off the road as this
may cause a loss of control. When
the vehicle has slowed down to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash‐
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (automatic
transaxle) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided If you
have a flat tire on page 7-12.
If the engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep‐
ing a straight line. Move cautiously
off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If
your vehicle does not start, consult
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to consult an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
7-03
7
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the
light dims or goes out when you
operate the starter, the battery is
discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for Jump
starting on page 7-05.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be overloaded
and create a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over
normally but does not start
1. Check the fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at the
ignition coils and spark plugs. Re‐
connect any that may be discon‐
nected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to call an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
What to do in an emergency
7-04
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting pro‐
cedures. If in doubt, we strongly rec‐
ommend that you have a competent
technician or towing service jump start
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by use
of a 24- volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING
n
Battery
Never attempt to check the electro‐
lyte level of the battery as this may
cause the battery to rupture or ex‐
plode causing serious injury.
WARNING
n
Battery
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol‐
lowed exactly, serious personal in‐
jury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure how
to follow this procedure, seek
qualified assistance. Automobile
batteries contain sulfuric acid. This
is poisonous and highly corrosive.
When jump starting, wear protec‐
tive glasses and be careful not to
get acid on yourself, your clothing
or on the vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery is
frozen or if the electrolyte level is
low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-) jumper
cables to touch. It may cause
sparks.
• The battery may rupture or ex‐
plode when you jump start with a
low or frozen battery.
7-05
7
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi‐
nal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
come in contact.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus‐
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi‐
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal on the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, sta‐
tionary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not con‐
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat‐
tery when making connections.
CAUTION
n
Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter‐
minal of the discharged battery. This
can cause the discharged battery to
overheat and crack, releasing bat‐
tery acid.
Make sure to connect one end of the
jumper cable to the negative termi‐
nal of the booster battery, and the
other end to a metallic point, far
away from the battery.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run
at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine
of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging
is not apparent, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehi‐
cle should not be push-started because
it might damage the emission control
system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
Jump starting on page 7-05
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it be‐
cause the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
7-06
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you will experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or knock‐
ing, the engine is probably too hot. If
this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking
brake. If the air conditioning is on,
turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out un‐
der the vehicle or steam is coming
out from the hood, stop the engine.
Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the
steaming has stopped. If there is no
visible loss of engine coolant and no
steam, leave the engine running
and check to be sure the engine
cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight.
If the drive belt seems to be satis‐
factory, check for coolant leaking
from the radiator, hoses or under
the vehicle. (If the air conditioning
had been in use, it is normal for
cold water to be draining from it
when you stop).
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is bro‐
ken or engine coolant is leaking out,
stop the engine immediately and
call a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to call an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can al‐
low coolant to blow out of the open‐
ing and cause serious burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor‐
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser‐
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert
for further signs of overheating. If
overheating happens again, call a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to call an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
• Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling sys‐
tem. In this case, have the sys‐
tem checked by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
7-07
7
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OYB067019B
OYB067018
Low tire pressure telltale (1) / TPMS
SET switch (2)
System Overview
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) senses change in radius of the
tire. If the tire pressure decreases be‐
low the recommended pressure, the
system warning light will be illumina‐
ted.
For the system to function properly, it
is the driver’s responsibility to set the
system by following accurate proce‐
dure and set current tire pressure.
The warning light will illuminate on the
cluster when one or more of your tires
is under-inflated after the TPMS is set.
The warning light will also illuminate to
warn the driver of system malfunction.
Please refer to the above image (1) for
further information.
TPMS Setting
The driver can set the TPMS by follow‐
ing procedures below:
1. Inflate all tires to the recommen‐
ded pressure.
2. Start the engine, make sure the ve‐
hicle is not moving, and press the
TPMS switch (2) left side on the
driver’s seat for over 3 seconds.
3. Check if the ( ) warning indicator
blinks for 4 seconds.
4. Check if following message appears
on the cluster (if equipped).
❈ If the warning light does not blink
or the message does not pop up,
perform the process again from 2.
For recommended tire pressure of this
vehicle, refer to Tire and wheels on
page 9-06or the tire pressure label on
the driver’s door.
For proper function of the TPMS, the
driver must set the system in following
situations.
❈ Situation requiring TPMS setting
• If the tire or wheel is repaired or re‐
placed
• If the tire or wheel is repositioned.
• If the tire pressure is adjusted.
What to do in an emergency
7-08
• If the low pressure light is illumina‐
ted.
• If the suspension or ABS has been re‐
placed.
CAUTION
If the system is set without adjust‐
ing tire pressure, false alarm could
occur or the telltale will not be dis‐
played even though the vehicle is
significantly under-inflated.
Make sure all tires are properly ad‐
justed to the recommended pressure
when setting.
If the system is not set even in re‐
quired situations, false alarm could
occur or the telltale will not be dis‐
played even though the vehicle is
significantly under-inflated.
The system will not be set if you
press the SET switch (2) while driv‐
ing. Make sure to stop the vehicle
and press the switch (2) for over 3
seconds.
• Be sure the tire is cold before in‐
flating the pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours or driven
within 1.6km (1mile).
Indication of Low Tire Pressure
OYB066021L
The ( ) warning light will illuminate
when an under-inflated tire is indica‐
ted. In certain types, the above mes‐
sage might be displayed on the cluster.
If the warning light illuminates, reduce
your speed, avoid hard cornering and
rapid braking. Have your vehicle inspec‐
ted by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
Check the pressure of all tires and in‐
flate to the proper pressure according
to procedures, and if required, replace
or repair the tires.
If you cannot reach a close service sta‐
tion, stop the vehicle at a safe place,
check all tires and operate the TPMS
setting procedure. If you are unable to
adjust the tire pressure, use the repair
tools to repair or change to spare tire
and contact a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to call an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
You may not be able to identify low tire
pressure visually. Use precise tools to
measure and adjust tire pressure.
Please note that a tire that is hot due
to prolonged driving, therefore will have
high pressure. We recommend you to
measure and adjust the tire pressure
after the vehicle has driven for less
than 1.6 km (1 mile) within 3 hours.
CAUTION
• The indicator may remain illumina‐
ted after changing to a spare tire,
because radius of spare tire is dif‐
ferent. Be sure to change to a reg‐
ular tire.
(Continued)
7-09
7
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• For safe driving, please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, and all tires
should be checked monthly to
maintain the recommended pres‐
sure.
• The warning light may illuminate if
the system is not set in required
situations.
• In cold weather, the low tire pres‐
sure warning light may illuminate
even if the tire was adjusted to
the proper pressure. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased tempera‐
ture leads to a lowering of tire
pressure. Check the tires and ad‐
just to the recommended pressure.
• System performance may reduce
in the following situations.
- Improper system setting
- Using tires on the market (Origi‐
nal tire recommended)
- Driving on snowy, slippery, or
unpaved roads
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Hard cornering, rapid accelerat‐
ing and braking repeatedly
- Driving too slow or fast
- If the vehicle is overloaded
- If a spare tire or snow chain is
installed
• When filling tires with more air,
conditions to turn off the low tire
pressure telltale may not be met.
This is because a tire inflator has a
margin of error in performance.
The low tire pressure telltale will
be turned off if the tire pressure is
above the recommended tire infla‐
tion pressure.
WARNING
• Driving with an under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and
lead to tire failure. It also reduces
tire tread life, handling of the vehi‐
cle, braking ability, and fuel effi‐
ciency, causing instability of the
vehicle. In this case, contact pro‐
fessional workshop to maintain
proper tire pressure. Kia recom‐
mends to contact an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
• Sudden damage to the tire caused
by external factors may not be in‐
dicated immediately. If the vehicle
is unstable, immediately remove
your foot off the accelerator ped‐
al, move the vehicle to a safe posi‐
tion for inspection.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System malfunction
The TPMS malfunction indicator will il‐
luminate ( ) after it blinks for approx‐
imately 1 minute when there is a prob‐
lem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
What to do in an emergency
7-10
If the indicator remains illuminated or
illuminates even after TPMS setting,
have the system checked by a profes‐
sional workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, low tire pressure will not be
indicated. In this case, have the
system serviced by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
• If the system does not work due
to TPMS removal or installation of
related parts with different speci‐
fication, it might be a problem
when the vehicle is being regularly
inspected.
• When repairing TPMS related
parts, be sure to replace them to
parts with original specification or
those which satisfy the TPMS reg‐
ulation.
- TPMS related parts : tire, wheel,
ABS unit, suspension
WARNING
n
FOR EUROPE
Do not modify the vehicle. It may in‐
terfere with the TPMS function.
❈ All vehicles sold in the EUROPE
market during below period must be
equipped with TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2014~(Based on vehicle registra‐
tions)
Reference : Indicator Light
Status
Status Symbol
Low Pressure
Illuminates
System Malfunc‐
tion
Illuminates after blinking
(60 seconds)
Setting
Turns off after blinking
(4 seconds)
7-11
7
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
OYB067003D
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage com‐
partment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to reach
this equipment.
1. Jack handle
2. Jack
3. Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency tire
changing only.
To prevent the jack from rattling
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING
n
Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road or
highway.
• Always move the vehicle com‐
pletely off the road and onto the
shoulder before trying to change a
tire. The jack should be used on
firm level ground. If you cannot
find a firm level place off the road,
call a towing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct front
and rear jacking positions on the
vehicle; never use the bumpers or
any other part of the vehicle for
jacking support.
• The vehicle can roll off the jack
causing serious injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the
road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
What to do in an emergency
7-12
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
If it is hard to loosen the tire holddown
wing bolt by hand, you can loosen it
easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of the
tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack han‐
dle.
WARNING
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center of
the spare tire to prevent the spare
tire from rattling.
Otherwise, it may cause the spare
tire to fall off the carrier and lead to
an accident.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R (Re‐
verse) with manual transaxle or P
(Park) with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash‐
er.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite to
the jack position.
7-13
7
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
n
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always set
the parking brake fully, and al‐
ways block the wheel diagonally
opposite the wheel being
changed.
• We recommend that the wheels
of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person remain in a vehi‐
cle that is being jacked.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter‐
clockwise one turn each, but do not
remove any nut until the tire has
been raised off the ground.
OYB067005D
OYB067006D
7. Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place the
jack at the designated locations un‐
der the frame. The jacking posi‐
tions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to index with the jack.
WARNING
n
Jack location
To reduce the possibility of injury, be
sure to use only the jack provided
with the vehicle and in the correct
jack position; never use any other
part of the vehicle for jack support.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is ap‐
proximately 30 mm (1.2 in). Before
What to do in an emergency
7-14
removing the wheel lug nuts, make
sure the vehicle is stable and that
there is no chance for movement or
slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat
so it cannot roll away. To put the
wheel on the hub, pick up the spare
tire, line up the holes with the
studs and slide the wheel onto
them.
If this is difficult, tip the wheel
slightly and get the top hole in the
wheel lined up with the top stud.
Then jiggle the wheel back and
forth until the wheel can be slid
over the other studs.
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges. Han‐
dle them carefully to avoid possible
severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that inter‐
feres with the wheel from fitting
solidly against the hub.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If there is, remove it. If there is not
good contact on the mounting sur‐
face between the wheel and hub,
the wheel nuts could come loose and
cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a
wheel may result in loss of control of
the vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible with
your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown in
the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated com‐
pletely over the nut. Do not stand on
the wrench handle or use an extension
pipe over the wrench handle. Go around
the wheel tightening every other nut
until they are all tight. Then double-
check each nut for tightness. After
changing wheels, have the system
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
11~13kgf·m (79~94lb·ft)
7-15
7
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure. If
the pressure is lower than recommen‐
ded, drive slowly to the nearest service
station and inflate to the correct pres‐
sure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is
correct. Always reinstall the valve cap
after checking or adjusting tire pres‐
sure. If the cap is not replaced, air may
leak from the tire. If you lose a valve
cap, buy another and install it as soon
as possible.
After you have changed wheels, always
secure the flat tire in its place and re‐
turn the jack and tools to their proper
storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads on
the wheel studs and nuts. Make cer‐
tain during wheel removal that the
same nuts that were removed are
reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts
with metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used. In‐
stallation of a non-metric thread nut
on a metric stud or vice-versa will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the stud so
that it must be replaced.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use ex‐
treme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket
lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, con‐
sult a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to consult an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they may
lose their ability to retain the wheel.
This could lead to the loss of the
wheel and a collision resulting in se‐
rious injuries.
To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel
lug nut wrench and spare tire from rat‐
tling while the vehicle is in motion,
store them properly.
WARNING
n
Inadequate spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
Tires and wheels on page 9-06.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare tire. This compact spare tire
takes up less space than a regular-size
tire. This tire is smaller than a conven‐
tional tire and is designed for tempora‐
ry use only.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully when
the compact spare is in use. The
compact spare should be replaced
by the proper conventional tire
and rim at the first opportunity.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
7-16
(Continued)
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for emer‐
gency use only. Do not operate your
vehicle on this compact spare at the
speed over 80 km/h (50 mph). The
original tire should be repaired or re‐
placed as soon as possible to avoid
failure of the spare possibly leading
to personal injury or death.
The compact spare should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi).
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after in‐
stalling the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire, ob‐
serve the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should you
exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a higher
speed could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough
to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could se‐
riously damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of ve‐
hicle control, and possible personal in‐
jury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum
load rating or the load-carrying ca‐
pacity shown on the sidewall of the
compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is small‐
er than the diameter of a convention‐
al tire and reduces the ground clear‐
ance approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch),
which could result in damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not take the vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com‐
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the tempo‐
rary compact tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the vehi‐
cle and result in loss of the chain.
• Temporary compact tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or on
ice.
• Do not use the temporary compact
tire on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially for
your vehicle.
• The temporary compact tire tread
life is shorter than a regular tire. In‐
spect your temporary compact tire
regularly and replace worn compact
spare tires with the same size and
design, mounted on the same wheel.
• The temporary compact tire should
not be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the temporary compact spare
wheel. If such use is attempted, dam‐
age to these items or other car com‐
ponents may occur.
• Do not use more than one temporary
compact tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the tempo‐
rary compact tire is installed.
7-17
7
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
Type A
Type B
Type C
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer
to the label attached to the jack.
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your park‐
ing brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the en‐
gine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under the
frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of the jack must be ver‐
tical under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and ad‐
dress
What to do in an emergency
7-18
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack
OUM074110L
7-19
7
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
OYB067009D
Please read the instructions before us‐
ing the Tire Mobility Kit.
1. Compressor
2. Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix
to the tire and have the tire inspected
by a professional workshop as soon as
possible. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
n
One sealant for one tire
(Continued)
(Continued)
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the supported one sealant of Tire
Mobility Kit is only used for one flat
tire.
WARNING
n
Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to
repair punctures in the tire walls.
This can result in an accident due to
tire failure.
WARNING
n
Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire may lose air pres‐
sure at any time after inflating with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
CAUTION
• When replacing or repairing the
tire after using tire sealant, make
certain to remove the sealant at‐
tached to the inner part of the tire
and wheel. If the sealant is not re‐
moved, noise and vibration may
occur.
• We recommend to use original Kia
manufactured sealant.
• If the TPMS warning light illumi‐
nates after using the TMK, have
your vehicle inspected by a profes‐
sional workshop. Kia recommends
to contact an authorized Kia deal‐
er/service partner.
What to do in an emergency
7-20
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) you
stay mobile even after experiencing a
tire puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing
compound effectively and comfortably
seals most punctures in a passenger
car tire caused by nails or similar ob‐
jects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is prop‐
erly sealed you can drive cautiously on
the tire (up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a
max. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) in or‐
der to reach a vehicle or tire dealer to
have the tire replaced.
It is possible that some tires, especially
with larger punctures or damage to the
sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may ad‐
versely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving ma‐
neuvers, especially if the vehicle is
heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.
The TMK is not designed or intended as
a permanent tire repair method and is
to be used for one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by step
how to temporarily seal the puncture
simply and reliably.
Read the section Notes on the safe
use of the TMK on page 7-25.
WARNING
Do not use the TMK if a tire is se‐
verely damaged by driving run flat or
with insufficient air pressure.
Only punctured areas located within
the tread region of the tire can be
sealed using the TMK.
7-21
7
What to do in an emergency
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)
1. Speed restriction label
2. Sealant bottle and label with speed
restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
4. Connectors and cable for the power
outlet direct connection
5. Holder for the sealant bottle
6. Compressor
7. On/off switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
9. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
Connectors, cable and connection hose
are stored in the compressor housing.
WARNING
Before using the Tire Mobility Kit,
follow the instructions on the seal‐
ant bottle.
Remove the label with the speed re‐
striction from the sealant bottle and
apply it to the steering wheel.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
7-22
(Continued)
Please note the expiry date on the
sealant bottle.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(1) from the sealant bottle (2), and
place it in a highly visible place in‐
side the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver
not to drive too fast.
2. Filling the sealant Strictly follow
the specified sequence, otherwise
the sealant may escape under high
pressure.
3. Shake the sealant bottle.
4. Connect the filling hose (3) onto the
connector of the sealant bottle (A).
5. Ensure that the button (9) on the
compressor is not pressed.
6. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw the filling hose (3) of the
sealant bottle onto the valve.
7. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor so that
the bottle is upright (B).
8. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
9. Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet using the
cable and connectors.
NOTICE
Only use the front passenger side
power outlet.
10. With the ignition switched on or en‐
gine start/stop button position on:
Switch on the compressor and let it
run for approximately 3 minutes to
fill the sealant. The inflation pres‐
sure of the tire after filling is unim‐
portant.
11. Switch off the compressor.
7-23
7
What to do in an emergency
12. Detach the hose from the sealant
bottle connector and from the tire
valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor‐
age location in the vehicle.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide poisoning and suf‐
focation is possible if the engine is
left running in a poorly ventilated or
unventilated location (such as inside
a building).
Distributing the sealant
13. Immediately drive approximately
7~10km (4~6miles or, about 10min)
to evenly distribute the sealant in
the tire.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a speed of 60 km/h
(35 mph). If possible, do not fall be‐
low a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
(Continued)
(Continued)
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance
or noise, reduce your speed and
drive with caution until you can
safely pull off of the side of the
road. Call for road side service or
towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the wheel may be stained by seal‐
ant. Therefore, remove the wheel
stained by sealant and have the ve‐
hicle inspected at a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
1. After driving approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or about
10 minutes), stop at a suitable lo‐
cation.
2. Connect the filling hose (3) of the
compressor (clip mounted side) di‐
rectly and then connect the filling
hose (3) (opposite side) to the tire
valve.
3. Connect between compressor and
the vehicle battery using the cable
and connectors.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
200 kPa (29 psi). With the ignition
switched on, proceed as follows.
-
To increase the inflation pressure:
Switch on the compressor, position I.
To check the current inflation pres‐
sure setting, briefly switch off the
compressor.
WARNING
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may be
damaged.
-
To reduce the inflation pressure:
Press the button (9) on the compres‐
sor.
What to do in an emergency
7-24
CAUTION
If the inflation pressure is not main‐
tained, drive the vehicle a second
time, refer to Distributing the seal‐
ant on page 7-24. Then repeat
steps 1 to 4.
Use of the TMK may be ineffectual
for tire damage larger than approxi‐
mately 4 mm (0.16 in).
Contact a professional workshop if
the tire cannot be made roadworthy
with the Tire Mobility Kit. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
WARNING
The tire inflation pressure must be
at least 200 kPa (29 psi). If it is not,
do not continue driving. Call for road
side service or towing.
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the road
so that you can work with the TMK
away from moving traffic. Place your
warning triangle in a prominent place
to make passing vehicles aware of
your location.
• To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you're on fairly level
ground, always set your parking
brake.
• Only use the TMK for sealing/inflation
passenger car tires. Do not use on
motorcycles, bicycles or any other
type of tires.
• Do not remove any foreign objects -
such as nails or screws - that have
penetrated the tire.
• Before using the TMK, read the pre‐
cautionary advice printed on the seal‐
ant bottle!
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise oper‐
ating the compressor may eventually
drain the car battery.
• Never leave the TMK unattended
while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running
for more than 10 min. at a time or it
may overheat.
• Do not use the TMK if the ambient
temperature is below -30°C (-22°F).
• When the tire and wheel are dam‐
aged, do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
Technical data
System voltage: DC 15 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 10 A
Suitable for use at temperatures: -30 ~
+70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure: 6 bar (87 psi)
Size Compressor: 161 x 150 x 55.8 mm
(6.3 x 5.9 x 2.2 in.)
Sealant bottle: 81 x 85.5 ø mm (3.2 x
3.4 ø in.)
Compressor weight: 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs)
Sealant volume: 200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)
❈ Sealant and spare parts can be ob‐
tained and replaced at an author‐
ized vehicle or tire dealer. Empty
sealant bottles may be disposed of
at home. Liquid residue from the
sealant should be disposed of by
your vehicle or tire dealer or in ac‐
cordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
7-25
7
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an au‐
thorized Kia dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and
towing procedures are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle. The use
of wheel dollies (1) or flatbed is recom‐
mended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground (without
dollies) and the front wheels off the
ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen‐
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing
dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should al‐
ways be lifted, not the rear.
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause damage
to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip‐
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
When towing your vehicle in an emer‐
gency without wheel dollies:
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter‐
nal damage to the transaxle.
What to do in an emergency
7-26
Removable towing hook (if
equipped)
OYB067016D
Front
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
upper (front) part of the cover on
the bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing
OYB067022D
Front
OYB066024D
Rear
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck
service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem‐
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle
to steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done on‐
ly on hard-surfaced roads for a short
distance and at low speed. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre‐
quently.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
(Continued)
7-27
7
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• Using a portion of the vehicle oth‐
er than the tow hooks for towing
may damage the body of your ve‐
hicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi‐
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook provi‐
ded.
• Before emergency towing, check if
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain se‐
curely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily
and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical an‐
gle. Always pull straight ahead.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic driv‐
ing maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing cable
or chain may break and cause seri‐
ous injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable to
be moved, do not forcibly continue
the towing. We recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck
service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide)
in the middle of the strap for easy
visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
What to do in an emergency
7-28
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per‐
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
CAUTION
n
Automatic transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu‐
tral. Be sure the steering is un‐
locked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A driver
must be in the towed vehicle to
operate the steering and brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the ve‐
hicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile)
when towing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before towing, check the auto‐
matic transaxle for fluid leaks un‐
der your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, flatbed
equipment or a towing dolly must
be used.
7-29
7
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodi‐
ties in the vehicle to help you respond
to the emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is a small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, take
the following steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extin‐
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of
the fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze
the handle to discharge the extin‐
guisher. If you release the handle,
the discharge will stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at
the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch it careful‐
ly since it may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape etc. in the
kit to give first aid to an injured person.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road
to warn oncoming vehicles during
emergencies, such as when the vehicle
is parked by the roadside due to any
problems.
Tire pressure gauge (if
equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-to-
day use, and you may have to add a
few pounds of air periodically and it is
not usually a sign of a leaking tire, but
of normal wear. Always check tire pres‐
sure when the tires are cold because
tire pressure increases with tempera‐
ture.
To check the tire pressure, take the fol‐
lowing steps;
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the
tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will escape
as you begin and more will escape
if you don't press the gauge in
firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will acti‐
vate the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to know whether the tire
pressure is low or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the
specified pressure. Refer to Tires
and wheels on page 9-06.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
What to do in an emergency
7-30
Engine compartment................................................................8-04
Maintenance services............................................................... 8-07
Owner’s responsibility..........................................................8-07
Owner maintenance precautions....................................... 8-07
Owner maintenance................................................................. 8-09
Owner maintenance schedule.............................................8-09
Scheduled maintenance service............................................. 8-11
Scheduled maintenance service precaution..................... 8-11
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline
Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]................................. 8-12
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline
Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)] (continued)............ 8-14
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions -
For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)].......... 8-17
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline
Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]........................8-19
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline
Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] (con‐
tinued).....................................................................................8-21
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions -
For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including
Russia)]................................................................................... 8-25
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel En‐
gine [For Europe (Except Russia)]...................................... 8-28
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel En‐
gine [For Europe (Except Russia)] (continued).................8-30
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions -
For Diesel Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]...............8-32
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel En‐
gine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]............................ 8-34
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel En‐
gine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] (continued).......8-36
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions -
For Diesel Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]..... 8-39
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items..................... 8-41
Engine oil and filter...............................................................8-41
Drive belts.............................................................................. 8-41
Fuel filter cartridge (for diesel).......................................... 8-41
Fuel filter (for gasoline)....................................................... 8-41
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections.............................. 8-41
Vapor hose (for gasoline engine) and fuel filler cap........8-42
Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses ................................8-42
Air cleaner filter.....................................................................8-42
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine).......................................8-42
Valve clearance (for Kappa 1.0L T-GDI engine)............... 8-42
Cooling system...................................................................... 8-42
Coolant....................................................................................8-42
Manual transaxle fluid .........................................................8-42
Automatic transaxle fluid ...................................................8-42
Brake hoses and lines...........................................................8-43
Brake/Clutch fluid ................................................................ 8-43
Parking brake.........................................................................8-43
Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors............................... 8-43
Suspension mounting bolts................................................. 8-43
Steering gear box linkage & boots/lower arm
ball joint.................................................................................. 8-43
Drive shafts and boots.........................................................8-43
Air conditioning refrigerant ................................................8-43
Engine oil (Gasoline)..................................................................8-44
Checking the engine oil level................................................8-44
Maintenance
8
Changing the engine oil and filter...................................... 8-45
Engine oil (Diesel)...................................................................... 8-46
Checking the engine oil level................................................8-46
Changing the engine oil and filter...................................... 8-46
Engine coolant........................................................................... 8-48
Checking the coolant level................................................... 8-48
Changing the coolant............................................................8-51
Brake/Clutch fluid .....................................................................8-52
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level................................. 8-52
Automatic transaxle fluid ....................................................... 8-53
Checking the automatic transaxle fluid level .................. 8-53
Changing the automatic transaxle fluid............................8-54
Washer fluid............................................................................... 8-55
Checking the washer fluid level.......................................... 8-55
Parking brake.............................................................................8-56
Checking the parking brake.................................................8-56
Fuel filter (for diesel)................................................................8-57
Draining water from the fuel filter....................................8-57
Fuel filter cartridge replacement....................................... 8-57
Air cleaner.................................................................................. 8-58
Filter replacement.................................................................8-58
Climate control air filter...........................................................8-59
Filter inspection.....................................................................8-59
Wiper blades...............................................................................8-60
Blade inspection.................................................................... 8-60
Blade replacement................................................................8-60
Battery........................................................................................8-63
For best battery service...................................................... 8-63
Battery capacity label.......................................................... 8-64
Battery recharging................................................................8-65
Reset items............................................................................8-65
Tires and wheels....................................................................... 8-67
Tire care..................................................................................8-67
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.....................8-67
Checking tire inflation pressure..........................................8-68
Tire rotation...........................................................................8-69
Wheel alignment and tire balance......................................8-70
Tire replacement...................................................................8-70
Wheel replacement...............................................................8-72
Tire traction........................................................................... 8-72
Tire maintenance.................................................................. 8-72
Tire sidewall labeling............................................................ 8-72
Low aspect ratio tire ........................................................... 8-75
Fuses........................................................................................... 8-77
Inner panel fuse replacement.............................................8-79
Engine compartment fuse replacement........................... 8-80
Fuse/relay panel description...............................................8-82
Light bulbs................................................................................8-104
Bulb replacement precaution............................................8-104
Light bulb position (Front).................................................8-106
Light bulb position (Rear).................................................. 8-107
Light bulb position (Side)................................................... 8-108
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb Replacement........8-108
Side repeater lamp (bulb type) bulb Replacement....... 8-109
Headlamp (Low/High beam) bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type A)............................................................. 8-109
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement (Head‐
lamp Type A)........................................................................8-110
Position lamp / Day time running lamp bulb re‐
placement (Headlamp Type A)......................................... 8-110
8
Headlamp (Low/High beam) bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type B)............................................................. 8-111
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement (Head‐
lamp Type B)........................................................................8-112
Static bending light replacement (Headlamp Type B).... 8-112
Position lamp / Day time running lamp (LED
type) replacement (Headlamp Type B)...........................8-113
Front fog lamp bulb replacement.................................... 8-113
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement........................ 8-114
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement...............................8-115
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement.................................8-116
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement.......... 8-116
Back up lamp bulb replacement....................................... 8-117
Rear fog lamp bulb replacement......................................8-117
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement...................8-117
License plate lamp bulb replacement..............................8-118
Map lamp bulb replacement............................................. 8-118
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement.............................8-119
Room lamp bulb replacement...........................................8-119
Glove box lamp bulb replacement....................................8-120
Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement............................ 8-120
Headlamp and front fog lamp aiming (for Europe)...... 8-121
Appearance care..................................................................... 8-128
Exterior care........................................................................8-128
Interior care......................................................................... 8-132
Emission control system ...................................................... 8-134
Crankcase emission control system................................8-134
Evaporative emission control system.............................8-134
Exhaust emission control system....................................8-134
Lean NOx trap .................................................................... 8-136
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Maintenance
8-04
■ Kappa 1.2L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.4L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
11. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick
8-05
8
Maintenance
U-II 1.4/1.6L Engine (Diesel)
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYB076003B
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Maintenance
8-06
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and in‐
jury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce‐
dures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational
problems with your vehicle that could
lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or
personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record Re‐
tention are the owner's responsibili‐
ty.
Have your vehicle serviced by a profes‐
sional workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been per‐
formed on your vehicle in accordance
with the scheduled maintenance serv‐
ice charts shown on the following pa‐
ges.
You need this information to establish
your compliance with the servicing and
maintenance requirements of your ve‐
hicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provi‐
ded in your Warranty & Maintenance
book.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a
lack of required maintenance are not
covered when your vehicle is covered by
warranty.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may re‐
sult in problems. This section gives in‐
structions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Mainte‐
nance book provided with the vehi‐
cle. If you're unsure about any serv‐
icing or maintenance procedure,
have the system serviced by a pro‐
(Continued)
(Continued)
fessional workshop. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
WARNING
n
Maintenance work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while per‐
forming some maintenance proce‐
dures. If you lack sufficient knowl‐
edge and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have the system serviced by
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
(Continued)
8-07
8
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It be‐
comes even more dangerous when
you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled in
moving parts and result in injury.
Therefore, if you must run the en‐
gine while working under the hood,
make certain that you remove all
jewelry (especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose
clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
CAUTION
• Do not put heavy objects or apply
excessive force on top of the en‐
gine cover (if equipped) or fuel re‐
lated parts.
• When you inspect the fuel system
(fuel lines and fuel injection devi‐
ces), contact a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not drive long time with the en‐
gine cover (if equipped) removed.
• When checking the engine room,
do not go near fire.
Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam‐
mable oils that may cause fire.
• Before touching the battery, igni‐
tion cables and electrical wiring,
you should disconnect the battery
"-" terminal. You may get an elec‐
tric shock from the electric cur‐
rent.
• When you remove the interior trim
cover with a flat bed (-) driver, be
careful not to damage the cover.
• Be careful when you replace and
clean bulbs to avoid burns or elec‐
trical shock.
Maintenance
8-08
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per‐
formed at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer
as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties
and you may be charged for labor,
parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your en‐
gine coolant level when the engine is
hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam
(Continued)
(Continued)
may blow out under pressure. This
could cause burns or other serious
injury.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust
fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or pulls to one side
when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or hard-
to-push brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper‐
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation, in‐
cluding clutch operation.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehi‐
cle (water dripping from the air con‐
ditioning system during or after use
is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year (i.e., every
Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or dam‐
age.
• Check the windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean the wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
8-09
8
Maintenance
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather‐
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
8-10
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Scheduled maintenance service
precaution
Follow the Normal Maintenance Sched‐
ule if the vehicle is usually operated
where none of the following conditions
apply. If any of the following conditions
apply, follow the Maintenance Under
Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal
temperature or less than 16 km
(10 miles) in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low speed
driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, un‐
paved, graveled or salt-spread roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or moun‐
tain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or
roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than
the following Normal Maintenance
Schedule. After the periods or distance
shown in the chart, continue to follow
the prescribed maintenance intervals.
8-11
8
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.
NO. ITEM REMARK
*1 Engine oil and engine oil filter
Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before start‐
ing a long trip.
*2 Coolant (Engine)
When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper
coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*3 Drive belts (Engine)
• Adjust alternator, water pump and air conditioner (if equipped) drive belt.
Inspect and if necessary repair or replace.
• Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary cor‐
rect or replace.
*4 Valve clearance
Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if neces‐
sary. In this case, have the system checked by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
*5 Spark plug
For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do
maintenance of other items.
*6 Manual transaxle fluid
Manual transaxle fluid should be changed anytime it has been submerged in
water.
Maintenance
8-12
NO. ITEM REMARK
*7 Fuel additives (Gasoline)
Kia recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating
of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher
(for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI
(Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly,
one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000km (for Europe,
Australia and New Zealand)/ 10,000km (except Europe, Australia and New
Zealand, China) / 5,000 km (for China). Additives are available from a profes‐
sional workshop along with information on how to use them. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/service partner. Do not mix other additives.
8-13
8
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)] (continued)
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Engine oil and engine oil filter
*1
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI
Replace every 15,000 km(10,000 miles) or 12 monthsKappa 1.2L MPI
Kappa 1.4L MPI
Coolant (Engine)
*2
At first, Replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Drive belts (Engine)
*3
At first, Inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Valve clearance
*4
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI - - - - - I - -
Vacuum hoses and crankcase ventilation hoses - I - I - I - I
Spark plugs
*5
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Replace every 75,000 km (50,000 miles)
Kappa 1.2L MPI Replace every 150,000 km (100,000 miles)
Kappa 1.4L MPI Replace every 150,000 km (100,000 miles)
Automatic transaxle fluid - - - I - - - I
Manual transaxle fluid
*6
- - - I - - - I
Drive shaft and boots - I - I - I - I
Maintenance
8-14
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Fuel additives (Gasoline)
*7
Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Fuel lines, hoses and connections - - - I - - - I
Fuel tank air filter - - - I - - - I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap - - - I - - - I
Air cleaner filter - I - R - I - R
Intercooler, in/out hose, air in‐
take hose
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI I I I I I I I I
Exhaust system I I I I I I I I
Cooling system
At first, Inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter - R - R - R - R
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I
Brake drums and linings - I - I - I - I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid I R I R I R I R
8-15
8
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Parking brake - I - I - I - I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Maintenance
8-16
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE OP‐
ERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI‐
TION
Engine oil and engine
oil filter
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI
R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6
months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
Kappa 1.2L MPI
Kappa 1.4L MPI
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently depending on
the condition
B, H, I, K
Automatic transaxle fluid R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I,
J
Manual transaxle fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending on
the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I ,J
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently depending on
the condition
C, E
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently depending on
the condition
C, E, G
Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently depending on
the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Brake drums and linings I
Inspect more frequently depending on
the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently depending on
the condition
C, D, G, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending on
the condition
C, D, E, F, G
8-17
8
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE OP‐
ERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI‐
TION
Suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently depending on
the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance operation
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in
freezing temperature.
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances.
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads.
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in heavy dust condition.
F : Driving in heavy traffic area.
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack.
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing.
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h).
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions.
Maintenance
8-18
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.
NO. ITEM REMARK
*1 Engine oil and engine oil filter
Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before start‐
ing a long trip.
*2 Coolant (Engine)
When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper
coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*3 Drive belts (Engine)
• Adjust alternator, water pump and air conditioner (if equipped) drive belt.
Inspect and if necessary repair or replace.
• Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary cor‐
rect or replace.
*4 Valve clearance
Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if neces‐
sary. In this case, have the system checked by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
*5 Spark plug
For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do
maintenance of other items.
*6 Manual transaxle fluid
Manual transaxle fluid should be changed anytime it has been submerged in
water.
8-19
8
Maintenance
NO. ITEM REMARK
*7 Fuel additives (Gasoline)
Kia recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating
of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher
(for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI
(Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly,
one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000 km (for Eu‐
rope, Australia and New Zealand)/10,000 km (except Europe, Australia and
New Zealand, China) / 5,000 km (for China). Additives are available from a
professional workshop along with information on how to use them. Kia rec‐
ommends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/service partner. Do not mix other
additives.
Maintenance
8-20
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] (continued)
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Engine oil and engine oil filter
*1
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI
Except China : Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12
months
For China : Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Kappa 1.2L MPI Except Middle East, Central & South America, India, Libia, Iran, Al‐
geria, Sudan, Morocco, Tunisia, Egypt, China :
Replace every 15,000 km(10,000 miles) or 12 months
For Middle East, Central & South America, India, Libia, Iran, Algeria,
Sudan, Morocco, Tunisia, Egypt :
Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months
For China : Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Kappa 1.4L MPI
Coolant (Engine)
*2
At first, Replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Drive belts (Engine)
*3
- I - I - I - I
Valve clearance
*4
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI - - - - - I - -
Vacuum hoses and crankcase ventilation hoses - I - I - I - I
8-21
8
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Spark plugs
*5
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI
(Unleaded)
Replace every 75,000 km (50,000 miles)
Kappa 1.2L MPI (Un‐
leaded)
Replace every 150,000 km (100,000 miles)
Kappa 1.4L MPI (Un‐
leaded)
Replace every 150,000 km (100,000 miles)
Kappa 1.2L MPI (Lea‐
ded)
Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles)
Kappa 1.4L MPI (Lea‐
ded)
Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles)
Automatic transaxle fluid - - - I - - - I
Manual transaxle fluid
*6
- - - I - - - I
Drive shaft and boots - I - I - I - I
Fuel additives (Gasoline)
*7
Add every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6months
(For Australia and New Zealand :
Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months,
For China : Add every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6months)
Fuel filter (Gasoline) For China, Brazil - I - R - I - R
Maintenance
8-22
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Fuel lines, hoses and connections - - - I - - - I
Fuel tank air filter
For China I I R I I R I I
Except China - I - R - I - R
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap - - - I - - - I
Air cleaner filter
Except China, India,
Middle East
I I R I I R I I
For China, India, Mid‐
dle East
R R R R R R R R
Intercooler, in/out hose, air intake
hose
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI I I I I I I I I
Exhaust system I I I I I I I I
Cooling system
At first, Inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter
Except Australia and
New Zealand
R R R R R R R R
For Australia and New
Zealand
I R I R I R I R
8-23
8
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I
Brake drums and linings - I - I - I - I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid I R I R I R I R
Parking brake - I - I - I - I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Maintenance
8-24
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE OP‐
ERATION
MAINTENANCE IN‐
TERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
Engine oil and en‐
gine oil filter
Kappa 1.0L T-GDI
Except China R
Every 5,000 km
(3,000 miles) or 6
months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
I, J, K
For China R
Every 5,000 km
(3,000 miles) or 3
months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
I, J, K
Kappa 1.2L MPI,
Kappa 1.4L MPI
Except Middle East,
Central & South
America, India, Li‐
bia, Iran, Algeria,
Sudan, Morocco,
Tunisia, Egypt, Chi‐
na
R
Every 7,500 km
(5,000 miles) or 6
months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
I, J, K
For Middle East,
Central & South
America, India, Li‐
bia, Iran, Algeria,
Sudan, Morocco,
Tunisia, Egypt
R
Every 5,000 km
(3,000 miles) or 6
months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
I, J, K
For China R
Every 5,000 km
(3,000 miles) or 3
months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
I, J, K
Spark plugs R
Replace more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
B, H, I, K
8-25
8
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE OP‐
ERATION
MAINTENANCE IN‐
TERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
Automatic transaxle fluid R
Every 90,000 km
(60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Manual transaxle fluid R
Every 120,000 km
(80,000 miles)
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, E
Climate control air filter R
Replace more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, E, G
Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Brake drums and linings I
Inspect more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, D, G, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance
8-26
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE OP‐
ERATION
MAINTENANCE IN‐
TERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
Suspension ball joints I
Inspect more fre‐
quently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance operation
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in
freezing temperature.
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances.
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads.
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in heavy dust condition.
F : Driving in heavy traffic area.
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack.
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing.
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h).
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions.
8-27
8
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.
NO. ITEM REMARK
*1 Engine oil and engine oil filter
Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before start‐
ing a long trip.
*2
Engine oil and engine oil filter (For
Diesel Engine)
• If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil fil‐
ter every 20,000 km or 12 months.
• The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly.
Operating with an insufficient amount oil can damage the engine, and such
damage is not covered by warranty.
• This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only
when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">. If the diesel fuel speci‐
fications don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced according to the severe
maintenance schedule.
*3 Coolant (Engine)
When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper
coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*4 Drive belts (Engine)
• Adjust alternator, water pump and air conditioner (if equipped) drive belt.
Inspect and if necessary repair or replace.
• Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary cor‐
rect or replace.
*5 Manual transaxle fluid
Manual transaxle fluid should be changed anytime it has been submerged in
water.
Maintenance
8-28
NO. ITEM REMARK
*6 Fuel filter cartridge (Diesel)
This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when
using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications
don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regard‐
less of maintenance schedule and consult a professional workshop for more
details. Kia recommends to consult an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
8-29
8
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)] (continued)
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Engine oil and engine oil filter
*1
,
*2
U-II 1.4L, U-II
1.6L
R R R R R R R R
Coolant (Engine)
*3
At first, Replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Drive belts (Engine)
*4
At first, Inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months
Automatic transaxle fluid - I - I - I - I
Manual transaxle fluid
*5
- I - I - I - I
Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter cartridge (Diesel)
*6
I R I R I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Air cleaner filter I R I R I R I R
Exhaust system I I I I I I I I
Cooling system
At first, Inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Maintenance
8-30
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km×1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I
Brake drums and linings I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid R R R R R R R R
Parking brake I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
8-31
8
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - For Diesel Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)]
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI‐
TION
Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
Automatic transaxle fluid R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I,
J
Manual transaxle fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, E
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, E, G
Brake discs and pads, calipers and ro‐
tors
I
Inspect more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, D, E, G, H
Brake drums and linings I
Inspect more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, D, G, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, D, E, F, G
Suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently depending on the con‐
dition
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance operation
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
8-32
R : Replace or change.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in
freezing temperature.
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances.
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads.
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in heavy dust condition.
F : Driving in heavy traffic area.
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack.
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing.
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h).
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions.
8-33
8
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.
NO. ITEM REMARK
*1 Engine oil and engine oil filter
Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before start‐
ing a long trip.
*2
Engine oil and engine oil filter (For
Diesel Engine)
• The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly.
Operating with an insufficient amount oil can damage the engine, and such
damage is not covered by warranty.
• This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only
when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">. If the diesel fuel speci‐
fications don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced according to the severe
maintenance schedule.
*3 Coolant (Engine)
When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper
coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*4 Drive belts (Engine)
• Adjust alternator, water pump and air conditioner (if equipped) drive belt.
Inspect and if necessary repair or replace.
• Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary cor‐
rect or replace.
*5 Manual transaxle fluid
Manual transaxle fluid should be changed anytime it has been submerged in
water.
Maintenance
8-34
NO. ITEM REMARK
*6 Fuel filter cartridge (Diesel)
This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when
using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications
don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regard‐
less of maintenance schedule and consult a professional workshop for more
details. Kia recommends to consult an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
8-35
8
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] (continued)
MAINTENANCE IN‐
TERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Engine oil and en‐
gine oil filter
*1
,
*2
U-II 1.4L, U-II 1.6L
For Russia, Australia and New Zealand :
Replace every 15,000 km(10,000 miles) or 12 months
Except Russia, Australia and New Zealand :
Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months
Coolant (Engine)
*3
At first, Replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Drive belts (Engine)
*4
At first, Inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Automatic transaxle fluid - - - I - - - I
Manual transaxle fluid
*5
- - - I - - - I
Drive shaft and boots - I - I - I - I
Fuel filter cartridge (Diesel)
*6
- I - R - I - R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections - I - I - I - I
Air cleaner filter
Except China, India,
Middle East
I I R I I R I I
For China, India, Mid‐
dle East
R R R R R R R R
Maintenance
8-36
MAINTENANCE IN‐
TERVALS
Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Diesel Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Exhaust system - I - I - I - I
Cooling system
At first, Inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Climate control air
filter
Except Australia and
New Zealand
R R R R R R R R
For Australia and New
Zealand
I R I R I R I R
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I
Brake drums and linings - I - I - I - I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid I R I R I R I R
Parking brake - I - I - I - I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
8-37
8
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Maintenance
8-38
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions - For Diesel Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)]
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI‐
TION
Engine oil and en‐
gine oil filter
For Russia, Australia
and New Zealand
R Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
Except Russia, Aus‐
tralia and New Zea‐
land
R Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
Automatic transaxle fluid R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles) A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Manual transaxle fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently depending on the
condition
C, E
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently depending on the
condition
C, E, G
Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, D, E, G, H
Brake drums and linings I
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, D, G, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, D, E, F, G
8-39
8
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI‐
TION
Suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance operation
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in
freezing temperature.
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances.
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads.
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in heavy dust condition.
F : Driving in heavy traffic area.
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack.
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing.
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h).
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions.
Maintenance
8-40
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the vehi‐
cle is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes are
required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu‐
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces‐
sary.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the belt,
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
Fuel filter cartridge (for diesel)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, dam‐
age the emission system and cause
multiple issues such as hard starting. If
an excessive amount of foreign matter
accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter
may require replacement more fre‐
quently.
After installing a new filter, run the en‐
gine for several minutes, and check for
leaks at the connections. Have the fuel
filter replaced by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a life‐
time fuel filter that integrated with the
fuel tank. Regular maintenance or re‐
placement is not needed but depends
on fuel quality. If there are some im‐
portant safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, fuel filter inspec‐
tion or replace is needed.
Have the fuel filter inspected or re‐
placed by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Have the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con‐
nections replaced by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Diesel only
Never work on the injection system
with the engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off the en‐
gine. High pressure pump, rail, injec‐
tors and high pressure pipes are
subject to high pressure even after
the engine stops. The fuel jet pro‐
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri‐
ous injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should not
more move than 30 cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the en‐
gine room while the engine is run‐
ning, since the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce con‐
siderable magnetic fields.
8-41
8
Maintenance
Vapor hose (for gasoline engine)
and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals
specified in the maintenance schedule.
Make sure that a new vapor hose or
fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi‐
dence of heat and/or mechanical dam‐
age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking,
tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling indicate deterioration. Particu‐
lar attention should be paid to examine
those hose surfaces nearest to high
heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or mov‐
ing component which might cause heat
damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all
hose connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are se‐
cure, and that no leaks are present. Ho‐
ses should be replaced immediately if
there is any evidence of deterioration
or damage.
Air cleaner filter
Have the air cleaner filter replaced by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect spark
plugs when the engine is hot. You
may burn yourself.
Valve clearance (for Kappa 1.0L
T-GDI engine)
Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessa‐
ry. In this case, have the system serv‐
iced by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system components,
such as the radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage and
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid (if
equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid ac‐
cording to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid (if
equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
Have the automatic transmission fluid
changed by a professional workshop
according to the maintenance schedule.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is ba‐
sically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto‐
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker. It is normal condition
and you should not judge the need
(Continued)
Maintenance
8-42
(Continued)
to replace the fluid based upon the
changed color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction
and failure.
Use only specified automatic trans‐
axle fluid. (Refer to Recommended
lubricants and capacities on page
9-13.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake/Clutch fluid (if equipped)
Check the brake/clutch fluid level in the
brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level
should be between MIN and MAX
marks on the side of the reservoir. Use
only hydraulic brake/clutch fluid con‐
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifica‐
tion.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system in‐
cluding the parking brake lever (or ped‐
al) and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and calipers
for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, we recom‐
mend to refer to the Kia web site.
(www.kia-hotline.com)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage. Re‐
place any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged parts
and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant (if
equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
8-43
8
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL (GASOLINE)
Checking the engine oil level
■ Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.2L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.4L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera‐
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
WARNING
n
Radiator hose
(Continued)
(Continued)
Be very careful not to touch the ra‐
diator hose when checking or adding
the engine oil as it may be hot
enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should be
between F (Full) and L (Low).
CAUTION
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when add‐
ing or changing engine oil. If you
drop the engine oil on the engine
room, wipe it off immediately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with a
clean cloth. When mixed with
debris, it can cause engine dam‐
age.
Maintenance
8-44
■ Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.2L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.4L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil
to bring the level to F (Full). Do not
overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to Recommended lubricants and ca‐
pacities on page 9-13.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have the engine oil and filter replaced
by a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause skin irri‐
tation or cancer if left in contact
with the skin for prolonged periods
of time. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in
laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your hands
thoroughly with soap and warm wa‐
ter as soon as possible after han‐
dling used oil.
8-45
8
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL (DIESEL)
Checking the engine oil level
OYB076004B
U-II 1.4/1.6L Engine (Diesel)
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera‐
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
WARNING
n
Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the ra‐
diator hose when checking or adding
the engine oil as it may be hot
enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should be
between F (Full) and L (Low).
CAUTION
• Do not spill engine oil, when adding
or changing engine oil. If you drop
the engine oil on the engine room,
wipe it off immediately.
• When you wipe the oil level gauge,
you should wipe it with a clean
cloth. When mixed with debris, it
can cause engine damage.
OYB076007B
U-II 1.4/1.6L Engine (Diesel)
If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil
to bring the level to F (Full). Do not
overfill.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to Recommended lubricants and ca‐
pacities on page 9-13.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have the engine oil and filter replaced
by a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Maintenance
8-46
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause skin irri‐
tation or cancer if left in contact
with the skin for prolonged periods
of time. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in
laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your hands
thoroughly with soap and warm wa‐
ter as soon as possible after han‐
dling used oil.
8-47
8
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has
a reservoir filled with year round anti‐
freeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at
the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and be‐
fore traveling to a colder climate.
CAUTION
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly add‐
ing engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant slowly
in small quantities.
• Do not drive with no engine cool‐
ant. It may cause water pump fail‐
ure and engine seizure, etc.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi‐
ator cap while the engine is oper‐
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine dam‐
age. Also, hot coolant or steam
could cause serious personal in‐
jury.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cool‐
ing system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise
to remove it.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operating,
do not remove the radiator cap or
the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
The electric motor (cool‐
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera‐
ture, refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working near
the blades of the cooling fan so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan
blades. As the engine coolant tem‐
perature decreases, the electric mo‐
tor will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
Maintenance
8-48
■ Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.2L/1.4L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
OYB076011B
U-II 1.4/1.6L Engine (Diesel)
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater ho‐
ses. Replace any swollen or deteriora‐
ted hoses.
The coolant level should be filled be‐
tween MAX and MIN (F and L) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when
the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) or soft water. Bring
the level to MAX (F), but do not overfill.
If frequent additions are required, have
the system inspected by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion‐
ized water or soft water for your ve‐
hicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An im‐
proper coolant mixture can result in
serious malfunction or engine dam‐
age.
• The engine in your vehicle has alumi‐
num engine parts and must be pro‐
tected by an ethylene-glycol with
phosphate based coolant to prevent
corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the speci‐
fied coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would re‐
duce the effectiveness of the solu‐
tion.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Ambient
Tempera‐
ture
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
8-49
8
Maintenance
Ambient
Tempera‐
ture
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-25°C
(-13°F)
40 60
-35°C
(-31°F)
50 50
-45°C
(-49°F)
60 40
■ Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline)
■ Kappa 1.2L/1.4L MPI Engine (Gasoline)
OYB076086B
U-II 1.4/1.6L Engine (Diesel)
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam
may blow out under pressure caus‐
ing serious injury.
Maintenance
8-50
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant replaced by a profes‐
sional workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in or‐
der to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the alternator.
WARNING
n
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or an‐
tifreeze in the washer fluid reser‐
voir.
• Radiator coolant can severely ob‐
scure visibility when sprayed on
the windshield and may cause loss
of vehicle control or damage the
paint and body trim.
8-51
8
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir pe‐
riodically. The fluid level should be be‐
tween MAX and MIN marks on the side
of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch fluid contamina‐
tion.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumula‐
ted mileage. This is a normal condition
associated with the wear of the brake
linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the system checked by a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Re‐
fer to Recommended lubricants or ca‐
pacities on page 9-13.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING
n
Loss of brake/clutch fluid
In the event the brake/clutch system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
have the system Inspected by a pro‐
fessional workshop. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
WARNING
n
Brake / clutch fluid
When changing and adding brake/
clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do
not let it come in contact with your
eyes. If brake/clutch fluid should
come in contact with your eyes, im‐
(Continued)
(Continued)
mediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have
your eyes examined by a doctor as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake/
clutch fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
properly disposed. Don't put in the
wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil,
in your brake/clutch system can
damage brake/clutch system parts.
Maintenance
8-52
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the automatic
transaxle fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following
procedure.
1. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm if the engine is
running at normal idle speed.
NOTICE
Insert the level gauge, after checking
the automatic transaxle fluid level. In
the direction referred in the picture.
CAUTION
If you insert the level gauge in the
wrong direction, it can cause defor‐
mation (or damage) to level gauge.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up
sufficiently [fluid temperature
70~80°C (158~176°F)], for example
by 10 minutes usual driving, move
the shift lever through all positions
then place the shift lever in N(Neu‐
tral) or P(Park) position.
HOT
COLD
3. Confirm if the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the level gauge. If
the fluid level is lower, add the
specified fluid from the fill hole. If
the fluid level is higher, drain the
fluid from the drain hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold
condition [fluid temperature
20~30°C (68~86°F)], add the fluid to
the "COLD" line and then recheck
the fluid level according to the
above step 2.
8-53
8
Maintenance
WARNING
n
Transaxle fluid
The transaxle fluid level should be
checked when the engine is at nor‐
mal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator, ra‐
diator hose and exhaust system etc.,
are very hot. Exercise great care not
to burn yourself during this proce‐
dure.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes transaxle
shift slippage. Overfilling can cause
foaming, loss of fluid and trans‐
axle malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could cause transaxle malfunction
and failure.
WARNING
n
Parking brake
(Continued)
(Continued)
To avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle, apply the parking brake and
depress the brake pedal before mov‐
ing the shift lever.
NOTICE
The COLD range is for reference
only and should NOT be used to de‐
termine the transaxle fluid level.
NOTICE
New automatic transaxle fluid
should be red. The red dye is added
so the assembly plant can identify it
as automatic transaxle fluid and dis‐
tinguish it from engine oil or anti‐
freeze. The red dye, which is not an
indicator of fluid quality, is not per‐
manent. As the vehicle is driven, the
automatic transaxle fluid will begin
to look darker. The color may even‐
tually appear light brown.
Use only the specified automatic trans‐
axle fluid. (Refer to Recommended lu‐
bricants or capacities on page 9-13.)
Changing the automatic
transaxle fluid
Have the automatic transaxle fluid
changed by a professional workshop
according to the maintenance schedule.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Maintenance
8-54
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.
Plain water may be used if washer fluid
is not available. However, use washer
solvent with antifreeze characteristics
in cold climates to prevent freezing.
WARNING
n
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or an‐
tifreeze in the washer fluid reser‐
voir.
• Radiator coolant can severely ob‐
scure visibility when sprayed on
the windshield and may cause loss
of vehicle control or damage to
paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer‐
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poison‐
ous to humans and animals. Do
not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
8-55
8
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake
by counting the number of clicks’’
heard while fully applying it from the
released position. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the system serviced by a profes‐
sional workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Stroke : 5~7 clicks’’ at a force of 20 kg
(44 lbs, 196 N).
Maintenance
8-56
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from the fuel
filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water
from fuel and accumulating the water
in its bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter,
the warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illumi‐
nates, take your car to a pro‐
fessional workshop and have
drain the water and check the
system. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
Fuel filter cartridge replacement
NOTICE
When replacing the fuel filter car‐
tridge, use parts for replacement
from a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
8-57
8
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover at‐
taching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover at‐
taching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele‐
ment more often than the usual rec‐
ommended intervals. (Refer to Main‐
tenance under severe usage conditions
on page 8-17.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces‐
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil‐
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use parts for replacement from a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
Maintenance
8-58
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the maintenance
schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and re‐
placed earlier. When you replace the cli‐
mate control air filter, replace it per‐
forming the following procedure, and
be careful to avoid damaging other
components.
1. Open the glove box and remove the
stoppers on both sides.
2. With the glove box open, pull the
support strap (1).
3. Remove the climate control air fil‐
ter cover while pressing the lock on
the right side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil‐
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Other‐
wise, the system may produce noise
and the effectiveness of the filter
may be reduced.
8-59
8
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi‐
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield
or the wiper blades with foreign matter
can reduce the effectiveness of the
windshield wipers. Common sources of
contamination are insects, tree sap,
and hot wax treatments used by some
commercial car washes. If the blades
are not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline, kero‐
sene, paint thinner, or other solvents
on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade‐
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
(Continued)
(Continued)
attempt to move the wipers man‐
ually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc‐
tion and failure.
Front windshield wiper blade
Maintenance
8-60
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the re‐
verse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
8-61
8
Maintenance
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm (1) and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is in‐
stalled firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have the wiper
blade replaced by a professional work‐
shop. Kia recommends to visit an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Maintenance
8-62
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petrole‐
um jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution
of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used
for an extended time, disconnect the
battery cables.
NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is main‐
tenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked
with LOWER and UPPER on the side,
you can check the electrolyte level.
The electrolyte level should be be‐
tween LOWER and UPPER. If the
electrolyte level is low, it needs to
add distilled (demineralized) water
(Never add sulfuric acid or other
electrolyte). When refill, be careful
not to splash the battery and adja‐
cent components. And do not overfill
the battery cells. It can cause corro‐
sion on other parts. After then en‐
sure that tighten the cell caps. Con‐
tact a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
WARNING
n
Battery dangers
(Continued)
(Continued)
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com‐
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid
to contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
8-63
8
Maintenance
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get
immediate medical atten‐
tion.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention im‐
mediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working
in an enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis‐
posed battery can be
harmful to the environ‐
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery ac‐
cording to your local law(s)
or regulation.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The battery contains lead.
Do not dispose of it after
use. Contact a professional
workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service
partner.
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat‐
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warnings
can result in serious bodily injury or
death.
CAUTION
• When you don’t use the vehicle for
a long time in the low temperature
area, separate the battery and
keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent battery case damage in
low temperature area.
• If you connect unauthorized elec‐
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
Battery capacity label
■ Example
Maintenance
8-64
❈ The actual battery label in the vehi‐
cle may differ from the illustration.
1. AGM90L-DIN : The Kia model name
of battery
2. 90Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
3. 170RC : The nominal reserve ca‐
pacity (in min.)
4. 12V : The nominal voltage
5. 850CCA (SAE) : The cold-test cur‐
rent in amperes by SAE
6. 680A : The cold-test current in am‐
peres by EN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in
a short time (because, for example,
the headlights or interior lights were
left on while the vehicle was not in
use), recharge it by slow charging
(trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge it
at 20-30A for two hours.
WARNING
n
Recharging battery
When recharging the battery, ob‐
serve the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg‐
ing, and stop or reduce the charg‐
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when check‐
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter‐
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
• Operation related to the battery is
recommended to be done by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
• Keep the battery away from wa‐
ter or any liquid.
• For your safety, use parts for re‐
placement from a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
8-65
8
Maintenance
• Sunroof
• Trip computer
• Climate control system
• Audio
Maintenance
8-66
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must al‐
ways maintain recommended tire infla‐
tion pressures and stay within the load
limits and weight distribution recom‐
mended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the spare)
should be checked when the tires are
cold. Cold Tires means the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours
or driven less than 1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi‐
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to Tires and wheels on page
9-06.
All specifications (sizes and pressures)
can be found on a label attached to the
vehicle.
WARNING
n
Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa (10
psi) or more) can lead to severe heat
build-up, causing blowouts, tread
separation and other tire failures
that can result in the loss of vehicle
control leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher on
(Continued)
(Continued)
hot days and when driving for long
periods at high speeds.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in ex‐
cessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel de‐
formation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have the system checked
by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater
possibility of damage from road
hazards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec‐
ommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to ad‐
just the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
(Continued)
8-67
8
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Be sure to reinstall the tire infla‐
tion valve caps. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leak‐
age. If a valve cap is missing, in‐
stall a new one as soon as possi‐
ble.
WARNING
n
Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation can
reduce tire life, adversely affect ve‐
hicle handling, and lead to sudden
tire failure. This could result in loss
of vehicle control and potential in‐
jury.
CAUTION
n
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres‐
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci‐
dents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been dam‐
aged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they're underinfla‐
ted.
Check the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1.6
km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly
onto the valve to get a pressure meas‐
urement. If the cold tire inflation pres‐
sure matches the recommended pres‐
sure on the tire and loading information
label, no further adjustment is necessa‐
ry. If the pressure is low, add air until
you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the cen‐
ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire
pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to
put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear
and damage. Always use a tire
pressure gauge.
(Continued)
Maintenance
8-68
(Continued)
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con‐
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the
tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause accidents.
Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recom‐
mends that you check the spare
every time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommen‐
ded that the tires be rotated every
10,000 km (6,500 miles) or sooner if ir‐
regular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for cor‐
rect balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres‐
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire. Re‐
place the tire if you find either of these
conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or
cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to
bring the front and rear tire pressures
to specification and check lug nut tight‐
ness.
Refer to Tires and wheels on page
9-06.
With a full-size spare tire
(Only the vehicle without TPMS system)
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
Disc brake pads should be inspected for
wear whenever tires are rotated.
8-69
8
Maintenance
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare tire
(if equipped) for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply
tires under any circumstances.
This may cause unusual handling
characteristics that could result in
death, severe injury, or property
damage.
Wheel alignment and tire
balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to have
your wheels aligned again. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling one way or the other,
the alignment may need to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use
only approved wheel weights.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
Indicator (A) will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread left
on the tire. Replace the tire when this
happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing
the tire.
Maintenance
8-70
NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally sup‐
plied with the vehicles.
If not, that affects driving perform‐
ance.
CAUTION
When replacing the tires, recheck
and tighten the wheel nuts after
driving about 50km (31miles) and re‐
check after driving about 1,000km
(620miles). If the steering wheel
shakes or the vehicle vibrates while
driving, the tire is out of balance.
Align the tire balance. If the problem
is not solved, contact a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
WARNING
n
Replacing tires
(Continued)
(Continued)
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries from an accident
caused by tire failure or loss of vehi‐
cle control:
• Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged.
Worn tires can cause loss of brak‐
ing effectiveness, steering control,
and traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with too
little or too much pressure in your
tires. This can lead to uneven wear
and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never mix ra‐
dial and bias-ply tires on the same
car. You must replace all tires (in‐
cluding the spare) if moving from
radial to bias-ply tires.
• Using tires and wheels other than
the recommended sizes could
cause unusual handling character‐
istics and poor vehicle control, re‐
sulting in a serious accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wheels that do not meet Kia’s
specifications may fit poorly and
result in damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor vehicle
control.
• The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replac‐
ing tires, all 4 tires must use the
same size originally supplied with
the vehicle. Using tires of a differ‐
ent size can cause the ABS (Anti-
lock Brake System) and ESC (Elec‐
tronic Stability Control) to work ir‐
regularly.
8-71
8
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement (if
equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire. Re‐
place it when you can see the tread
wear indicator bars on the tire. The re‐
placement compact spare tire should be
the same size and design tire as the
one provided with your new vehicle and
should be mounted on the same com‐
pact spare tire wheel. The compact
spare tire is not designed to be moun‐
ted on a regular size wheel, and the
compact spare tire wheel is not de‐
signed for mounting a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new wheels
are equivalent to the original factory
units in diameter, rim width and offset.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire
(Continued)
(Continued)
clearance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra‐
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you drive
on worn tires, tires that are improperly
inflated or on slippery road surfaces.
Tires should be replaced when tread
wear indicators appear. Slow down
whenever there is rain, snow or ice on
the road to reduce the possibility of
losing control of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease tire
wear. If you find a tire is worn uneven‐
ly, have a professional workshop check
the wheel alignment. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
partner.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This will
increase vehicle ride comfort and tire
life. Additionally, a tire should always
be rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and de‐
scribes the fundamental characteristics
of the tire and also provides the tire
identification number (TIN) for safety
standard certification. The TIN can be
used to identify the tire in case of a re‐
call.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.
Maintenance
8-72
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this in‐
formation when selecting replacement
tires for your vehicle. The following ex‐
plains what the letters and numbers in
the tire size designation mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an ex‐
ample only; your tire size designator
could vary depending on your vehicle.)
P235/55R19 108T
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix P’’ are intended
for use on passenger vehicles or light
trucks; however, not all tires have this
marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
108 - Load Index, a numerical code as‐
sociated with the maximum load the
tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section for
additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important
information that you need if you ever
have to replace one. The following ex‐
plains what the letters and numbers in
the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.5JX19
7.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif‐
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designa‐
tion on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's de‐
signed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date, (in‐
cluding the spare tire) should be re‐
placed by new ones. You can find the
manufacturing date on the tire sidewall
(possibly on the inside of the wheel),
displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code
is a series of numbers on a tire consist‐
ing of numbers and English letters. The
manufacturing date is designated by
the last four digits (characters) of the
DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and tread
pattern and the last four numbers indi‐
cate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents that
the tire was produced in the 16th week
of 2017.
8-73
8
Maintenance
WARNING
n
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining tread,
we recommend that tires be re‐
placed after approximately six (6)
years of normal service. Heat caused
by hot climates or frequent high
loading conditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden tire
failure, which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident involving se‐
rious injury or death.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub‐
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire man‐
ufacturers also must indicate the ma‐
terials in the tire, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others. The letter
"R" means radial ply construction; the
letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter "B" means
belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum per‐
missible inflation pressure. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information label for
recommended inflation pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where ap‐
plicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con‐
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one-and-a-half times (1½)
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires de‐
pends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart sig‐
nificantly from the norm due to varia‐
tions in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
These grades are molded on the side-
walls of passenger vehicle tires. The
tires available as standard or optional
equipment on your vehicle may vary
with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Maintenance
8-74
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi‐
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem‐
perature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak‐
ing traction tests, and does not in‐
clude acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteris‐
tics.
WARNING
n
Tire temperature
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is prop‐
erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex‐
cessive speed, underinflation, or ex‐
cessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat build-
up and possible sudden tire failure.
This can cause loss of vehicle control
and serious injury or death.
Low aspect ratio tire (if
equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided for
sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires are
optimized for handling and braking, it
may be more uncomfortable to ride in
and there is more noise compare with
normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low as‐
pect ratio tire is shorter than the
(Continued)
(Continued)
normal, the wheel and tire of the
low aspect ratio tire is easier to be
damaged. So, follow the instructions
below.
• When driving on a rough road or
off road, drive cautiously because
tires and wheels may be damaged.
And after driving, inspect tires and
wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
• If the tire is impacted, inspect the
tire condition or contact a profes‐
sional workshop. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
• To prevent damage to the tire, in‐
spect the tire condition and pres‐
sure every 3,000km.
8-75
8
Maintenance
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see the tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or re‐
placed because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire informa‐
tion on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
8-76
FUSES
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi
fuse
■ BFT
❈ Left side : Normal
Right side : Blown
A vehicle’s electrical system is protec‐
ted from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the others in the engine com‐
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accesso‐
ries, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will
melt.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon‐
nect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one
of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi‐
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to consult an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car‐
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
WARNING
n
Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything
but another fuse of the same rat‐
ing.
• A higher capacity fuse could cause
damage and possibly a fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-
on electric wiring of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any oth‐
er metal object to remove fuses be‐
cause it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
8-77
8
Maintenance
NOTICE
• When replacing fuse, turn the igni‐
tion OFF and turn off switches of
all electrical devices then remove
battery (-) terminal.
• The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or re‐
lay with a new one, make sure the
new fuse or relay fits tightly into
the clips. The incomplete fastening
fuse or relay may cause the vehi‐
cle wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi‐
nals may be fastened incomplete‐
ly, and it may cause a possible fire.
If fuses, relays and terminals fas‐
tened with bolts or nuts are blown,
consult a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to consult an au‐
thorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
• Do not input any other objects ex‐
cept fuses or relays into fuse/relay
terminals such as a driver or wir‐
ing. It may cause contact failure
and system malfunction.
• Do not plug in screwdrivers or af‐
termarket wiring into the terminal
originally designed for fuse and re‐
lays only. The electrical system
and wiring of the vehicle interior
may be damaged or burned due to
contact failure.
• If you directly connect the wire on
the taillight or replace the bulb
which is over the regulated capaci‐
ty to install trailers etc., the inner
junction block can get burned.
CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap to
ensure it is securely closed. If the
battery cap is not securely closed,
moisture may enter the system and
damage the electrical components.
NOTICE
n
Random wiring prohibited
when retrofitting equipment
Use of random wiring in the vehicle
might cause danger due to failure
and damage of the vehicle’s per‐
formance.
Using random wires especially when
retrofitting AVN or theft alarm sys‐
tem, remote engine control, car
phone or radio might damage the
vehicle or cause fire.
NOTICE
n
Remodeling Prohibited
(Continued)
Maintenance
8-78
(Continued)
Do not try remodeling the vehicle in
any way. It is illegal, and may affect
the vehicle’s performance, durability,
and safety. Warranty is also not
provided for problems caused by re‐
modeling.
Be aware of safety problems caused
by remodeling the vehicle with unau‐
thorized electrical devices (lamp,
black box, electrical equipment, diag‐
nostic device, communication device,
etc.). It might cause malfunction of
the vehicle, wiring damage, battery
discharge, connector damage, or
fire. the vehicle or cause fire.
NOTICE
n
Window tinting precaution
Window tint (especially metallic film)
might cause communication disorder
or poor radio reception, and mal‐
function of the automatic lighting
system due to excessive change of
(Continued)
(Continued)
illumination inside the vehicle. The
solution used might also flow into
electric, electronic devices causing
disorder and failure.
Inner panel fuse replacement
OYB077026
1. Turn the ignition switch and all oth‐
er switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the main fuse box in the engine
compartment.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the in‐
strument panel fuse panel (or in
the engine compartment fuse pan‐
el).
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult a professional
workshop. Kia recommends to consult
an authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
8-79
8
Maintenance
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
of the same rating from a circuit you
may not need for operating the vehicle,
such as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlights or taillights, stoplights,
courtesy lamp, day time running lights
(D.R.L) do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced.
Memory fuse
OYB077037
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if
your vehicle is parked without being op‐
erated for prolonged periods. Use the
following procedures before parking the
vehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover
and pull up the memory fuse.
NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up
from the fuse panel, the warning
chime, audio, clock and interior
lamps, etc., will not operate. Some
items must be reset after replace‐
ment. Refer to Battery on page
8-63.
• Even when the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be
discharged by operation of the
headlights or other electrical devi‐
ces.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all oth‐
er switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type fuse
is disconnected, remove it by using
the clip designed for changing fuses
located in the engine room fuse
box. Upon removal, securely insert
reserve fuse of equal quantity.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
Maintenance
8-80
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
a professional workshop. Kia rec‐
ommends to consult an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely install
the fuse panel cover through the au‐
dible clicking sound.
If not, electrical failures may occur
from water contact.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be re‐
moved as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic‐
ture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of
the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of re‐
moval.
NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to consult an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
8-81
8
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
OYB077030
Drivers side fuse panel
■ Engine compartment fuse panel
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Kappa 1.0L T-GDI PTC Heater only)
■ Engine compartment fuse panel (Diesel only)
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse
panel in your vehicle, refer to the
fuse panel label.
Maintenance
8-82
Driver’s side fuse panel
OYB077033LB
8-83
8
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Symbol
Fuse rat‐
ing
Circuit Protected
20A Tail Gate Unlock Relay, Dead Lock Relay, Door Lock/Unlock Relay
20A Power Outlet
25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
STOP
LAMP
15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
15A BCM (Body Control Module), SLM Unit
20A Cigarette Lighter
10A
Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Air Conditioner Control Module, ECM
(Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module)
10A Outside Mirror Folding
RH
25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch(LHD)
20A Front Seat Warmer Control Module
10A DRL (Daytime Running Light) Relay
7.5A
With Immobilizer & Smart Key : ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module), En‐
gine Room Junction Block(Start Relay)
Without Immobilizer & Smart Key : Burglar Alarm Relay
7.5A Head Lamp RH, License Lamp RH(Sedan), Rear Combination Lamp (IN) RH(Wagon), ILL (+)
Maintenance
8-84
Symbol
Fuse rat‐
ing
Circuit Protected
10A
BCM (Body Control Module), Crash Pad Switch, FCA Unit, Lane Departure Warning System, BLIND-
SPOT DETECTION WARNING Radar LH/RH
15A
Engine Room Junction Block(Back-Up Lamp Switch), Sport Mode Switch, Speed Sensor, Stop Lamp
Switch, Speed Sensor (In/Out), Transaxle Range Switch
LH
25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch(RHD)
SPARE
25A Spare
10A Rear Fog Lamp Relay
15A Clock Spring
LH
7.5A Head Lamp LH, License Lamp LH(Sedan), Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH(Wagon)
7.5A
Front Console Switch, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Audio, Audio / Video & Navigation Head
Unit, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Air Conditioner Control Module, Electro Chromic
Mirror, Crash Pad Switch, DC-DC Converter, Clock Spring, A/T Shift Lever Indicator
7.5A
Engine Room Junction Block(Multipurpose Check Connector), ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
Control Module
10A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
SPARE
15A Spare
15A Front Fog Lamp Relay
7.5A
Engine Room Junction Block(Air Conditioner Blower Relay), GSL Junction Block(PTC Heater Relay),
DSL Junction Block(Start Relay, Air Conditioner Blower Relay), Air Conditioner Control Module
MODULE
5
10A
Engine Room Junction Block(Head Lamp High Relay, Head Lamp Relay), Front Seat Warmer Control
Module, BCM (Body Control Module)
8-85
8
Maintenance
Symbol
Fuse rat‐
ing
Circuit Protected
S
10A Glow Plug Relay Unit, Fuel Filter Heater, Oil Level Sensor
E
10A
ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module), Immobilizer Module, Smart Key
Control Module
15A Sunroof Motor
10A Immobilizer Module
10A Key Interlock, Center Facia Switch
SPARE
10A Spare
7.5A SLM Unit, BCM (Body Control Module), Smart Key Control Module
SPARE
10A Spare
10A SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Control Module
MODULE
1
7.5A SBR Unit, BCM (Body Control Module), SLM Unit
25A Smart Key Control Module
7.5A Air Conditioner Control Module
15A Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Motor, Rear Wiper Relay
20A Multifunction Switch, Wiper Motor, Engine Room Junction Block(Wiper LO Relay)
10A
Power Outlet Relay, DC-DC Converter, Audio, Audio / Video & Navigation Head Unit, USB Charger,
SLM UNIT, BCM (Body Control Module), Smart Key Control Module, Power Outside Mirror Switch
SPARE
20A Spare
7.5A Instrument Cluster
7.5A Instrument Cluster
Maintenance
8-86
Symbol
Fuse rat‐
ing
Circuit Protected
7.5A MDPS Unit
AUDIO
20A DC-DC Converter, Audio, Audio / Video & Navigation Head Unit
10A
Room Lamp Relay, Power Outside Mirror Switch, Air Conditioner Control Module, SLM Unit, BCM
(Body Control Module), Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, Rain
Sensor, Trunk Room Lamp, Glove Box Lamp
8-87
8
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
■ 1.2L, 1.4L (Gasoline) / 1.4L, 1.6L (Diesel)■ 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline)
Maintenance
8-88
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Diesel only)
OYB076034
8-89
8
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel (Kappa 1.0L T-GDI PTC Heater only)
Maintenance
8-90
Engine room compartment fuse panel (Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gasoline))
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
80A MDPS Unit
ALT
150A Fuse - RR DEFOG, ABS1, ABS2, BLOWER
40A Rear Defogger Relay
1
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A Air Conditioner Blower Relay
10A Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, Wiper LO Relay
10A Cooling Fan Relay
10A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), RCV Control Solenoid Valve
15A
ECM (Engine Control Module), Oil Control Valve #1, #2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Air Condi‐
tioner Clutch Type ECV Relay
10A Head Lamp RH
10A Head Lamp LH
E3
15A ECM (Engine Control Module)
E4
15A ECM (Engine Control Module)
8-91
8
Maintenance
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
IGN
COIL
20A Ignition Coil #1~#4
INJECTOR
15A Fuel Pump Relay, ECM (Engine Control Module)
10A Back-Up Lamp Switch
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block
50A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Window Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay)
60A Cooling Fan Relay
30A Fuse - ENG E3, ENG E4, Main Relay
10A Air Conditioner Clutch Type ECV Relay
20A Head Lamp Relay
20A Head Lamp High Relay
FUEL
PUMP
20A Fuel Pump Relay
15A Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
AMS
10A Battery Sensor
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Tail Lamp Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay, ACC Relay)
Maintenance
8-92
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
POWER
OUTLET
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
Relay(Kappa 1.0L T-GDI Engine (Gaso‐
line))
Symbol Relay Name Type
Start Relay MICRO
A/C Blower Relay MICRO
FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay MICRO
Wiper HI Relay MICRO
LO
Wiper LO Relay MICRO
Head Lamp High Relay MICRO
Head Lamp Relay MICRO
Air Conditioner Clutch Type ECV Relay MICRO
Horn Relay MICRO
Burglar Alarm Horn Relay MICRO
MAIN
Main Relay MINI
Cooling Fan Relay MINI
8-93
8
Maintenance
Engine room compartment fuse panel
(Kappa 1.2L MPI Engine (Gasoline))
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
80A MDPS Unit
ALT
150A
125A
Fuse - RR DEFOG, ABS1, ABS2, BLOWER
40A Rear Defogger Relay
1
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A Air Conditioner Blower Relay
10A Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, Wiper LO Relay
10A Cooling Fan1 Relay, Cooling Fan2 Relay
10A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Front Wheel Sensor RH, Engine Coolant Stop Valve
15A
ECM (Engine Control Module), Oil Control Valve #1, #2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Air Condi‐
tioner Clutch Type ECV Relay
10A Head Lamp RH
10A Head Lamp LH
IGN
COIL
20A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser
INJECTOR
15A Fuel Pump Relay, ECM, Injector #1~#4
Maintenance
8-94
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
10A Back-Up Lamp Switch
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block
50A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Window Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay)
40A Cooling Fan1 Relay, Cooling Fan2 Relay
30A Main Relay
10A Air Conditioner Clutch Type ECV Relay
20A Head Lamp Relay
20A Head Lamp High Relay
FUEL
PUMP
20A Fuel Pump Relay
15A Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
E3
15A ECM/PCM
AMS
10A Battery Sensor
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Tail Lamp Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay, ACC Relay)
POWER
OUTLET
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
8-95
8
Maintenance
Relay(Kappa 1.2L MPI Engine (Gaso‐
line))
Symbol Relay Name Type
Start Relay MICRO
A/C Blower Relay MICRO
FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay MICRO
Cooling Fan1 Relay MICRO
Wiper HI Relay MICRO
LO
Wiper LO Relay MICRO
Head Lamp High Relay MICRO
Head Lamp Relay MICRO
2
Cooling Fan2 Relay MICRO
Horn Relay MICRO
Burglar Alarm Horn Relay MICRO
MAIN
Main Relay MINI
Air Conditioner Clutch Type ECV Relay MICRO
Maintenance
8-96
Engine room compartment fuse panel
(Kappa 1.4L MPI Engine (Gasoline))
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
80A MDPS Unit
ALT
150A
125A
Fuse - RR DEFOG, ABS1, ABS2, BLOWER
40A Rear Defogger Relay
1
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A Air Conditioner Blower Relay
10A Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, Wiper LO Relay
10A Cooling Fan1 Relay, Cooling Fan2 Relay
10A
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Front Wheel Sensor RH, Engine Coolant Stop Valve
(M/T), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve (M/T)
15A
ECM/PCM, Engine Coolant Stop Valve (A/T), Oil Control Valve #1, #2 (M/T), Variable Intake Sole‐
noid Valve (A/T), Purge Control Solenoid Valve (M/T), A/C Blower Relay
10A Head Lamp RH
10A Head Lamp LH
IGN
COIL
20A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser
8-97
8
Maintenance
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
INJECTOR
15A
Fuel Pump Relay, ECM/PCM, Injector #1~#4, Oil Control Valve #1, #2 (A/T), Purge Control Sole‐
noid Valve (A/T)
10A Back-Up Lamp Switch
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block
50A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Window Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay)
40A Cooling Fan1 Relay, Cooling Fan2 Relay
30A Main Relay
10A Air Conditioner Clutch Type ECV Relay
20A PCM (A/T)
20A Head Lamp Relay
20A Head Lamp High Relay
FUEL
PUMP
20A Fuel Pump Relay
15A Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
E3
15A ECM/PCM
AMS
10A Battery Sensor
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Tail Lamp Relay)
Maintenance
8-98
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay, ACC Relay)
POWER
OUTLET
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
Relay(Kappa 1.4L MPI Engine (Gaso‐
line))
Symbol Relay Name Type
Start Relay MICRO
A/C Blower Relay MICRO
FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay MICRO
Cooling Fan1 Relay MICRO
Wiper HI Relay MICRO
LO
Wiper LO Relay MICRO
Head Lamp High Relay MICRO
Head Lamp Relay MICRO
2
Cooling Fan2 Relay MICRO
Horn Relay MICRO
Burglar Alarm Horn Relay MICRO
MAIN
Main Relay MINI
8-99
8
Maintenance
Symbol Relay Name Type
A/C Blower Relay MICRO
Engine room compartment fuse panel
(U-II 1.4L/1.6L Engine (Diesel))
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
80A MDPS Unit
ALT
150A Fuse - RR DEFOG, ABS1, ABS2, BLOWER
40A Rear Defogger Relay
1
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control
40A ABS/ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Control, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A Air Conditioner Blower Relay
10A Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, Wiper LO Relay
10A PM Sensor, Electronic VGT Actuator, WGT Vacuum Modulator
10A Lambda Sensor #1, #2, Rail Pressure Regulating Valve, Cooling Fan1 Relay, Cooling Fan2 Relay
15A Camshaft Position Sensor, Air Flow Sensor, Oil Control Valve, PTC1 Heater Relay
10A Head Lamp RH
10A Head Lamp LH
Maintenance
8-100
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
E4
20A ECM
S3
15A
EGR Cooling Bypass Solenoid, Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump
Relay, A/C Blower Relay, Fuel Heat Relay
10A Back-Up Lamp Switch
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block
50A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Window Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay)
50A Cooling Fan1 Relay, Cooling Fan2 Relay
40A Fuel Heat Relay
30A Main Relay
10A Air Conditioner Clutch Type ECV Relay
20A Not Used
20A Head Lamp Relay
20A Head Lamp High Relay
FUEL
PUMP
20A Fuel Pump Relay
15A Horn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
E3
15A ECM/PCM
8-101
8
Maintenance
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
AMS
10A Battery Sensor
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Tail Lamp Relay)
40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay, ACC Relay)
POWER
OUTLET
40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
Relay(U-II 1.4L/1.6L Engine (Diesel))
Symbol Relay Name Type
Start Relay MICRO
A/C Blower Relay MICRO
FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay MICRO
Cooling Fan1 Relay MICRO
Wiper HI Relay MICRO
LO
Wiper LO Relay MICRO
Head Lamp High Relay MICRO
Head Lamp Relay MICRO
2
Cooling Fan2 Relay MICRO
Horn Relay MICRO
Maintenance
8-102
Symbol Relay Name Type
Burglar Alarm Horn Relay MICRO
MAIN
Main Relay MINI
A/C Blower Relay MICRO
Fuel Heat Relay MICRO
Diesel fuse box (U-II 1.4L/1.6L Engine
(Diesel))
Symbol Relay Name Type
PTC3 Heater Relay MICRO
PTC2 Heater Relay MICRO
PTC1 Heater Relay MICRO
Symbol Fuse rating Circuit Protected
50A PTC3 Heater Relay (RLY.3)
50A PTC2 Heater Relay (RLY.2)
50A PTC1 Heater Relay (RLY.1)
80A Glow Relay Unit
8-103
8
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Bulb replacement precaution
Please prepare bulbs with appropriate
standards in case of emergencies. Re‐
fer to Bulb wattage on page 9-04
for further information).
When changing bulbs and sorts, first
turn off the engine at a safe place,
firmly apply the side brake and take
out the battery's negative (-) terminal.
WARNING
n
Working on the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure that
the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position and turn off the lights
to avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified wat‐
tage.
WARNING
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause ex‐
tensive wiring damage and possible
fire.
CAUTION
If you don't have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to consult an author‐
ized Kia dealer/ service partner.
In many cases, it is difficult to re‐
place vehicle light bulbs because oth‐
er parts of the vehicle must be re‐
moved before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight as‐
sembly to get to the bulb(s). Remov‐
ing/ installing the headlight assem‐
bly can result in damage to the vehi‐
cle.
CAUTION
• If unauthentic parts or substan‐
dard lights are used when chang‐
ing lights, it may lead to fuse dis‐
connection and malfunction, and
other wiring damages.
• Do not install extra lamps or LED
to the vehicle. If supplementary
lights are installed, it may lead to
lamp malfunction and flickering of
the lights. In addition, the fuse box
and other writing may be dam‐
aged.
• Lamp part malfunction due to net-
work failure
The headlamp, taillight, and fog light
may lit up when the head lamp
switch is turned ON, and not light up
when the taillight or for light switch
is turned ON. This may be cause by
network failure or vehicle electrical
control system malfunction. If there
is a problem, have the system serv‐
iced by a professional workshop. Kia
recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/ service partner.
Maintenance
8-104
• Lamp part malfunction due to electri‐
cal control system stabilization
A normally functioning lamp may
flicker momentarily. This momentary
occurrence is due to stabilization unc‐
tion of the vehicle's electrical on con‐
trol system. If the lamp soon returns
to normal, the vehicle does not re‐
quire service.
However, if the lamp goes out after
he momentary flickering, or the flick‐
ering continues, have the system
serviced by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
• If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed from an operating
lamp activated by electricity, the
fuse box’s electronic device may
scan it as a malfunction. There‐
fore, a lamp malfunction history
may be recorded in Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) in the fuse
box.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is normal for an operating lamp
may blink temporarily. Since this
occurrence is due stabilization
function of the vehicle’s electronic
control device, if the lamp lights up
normally after temporary blinking,
there is no problem in the vehicle.
However, if the lamp continues to
blink several times or turn off
completely, there may be an error
in the vehicle’s electronic control
device. In this case, have the vehi‐
cle checked by a professional
workshop immediately. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
After an accident or after the head‐
light assembly is reinstalled, have
the headlight aiming adjusted by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia
dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
After driving in heavy rain or wash‐
ing, headlamp and taillamp lenses
could appear frosty. This condition is
caused by the temperature differ‐
ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con‐
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the
lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an author‐
ized Kia dealer/service partner.
NOTICE
n
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric. If you go abroad to a
country with opposite traffic direc‐
tion, this asymmetric part will dazzle
oncoming car driver. To prevent daz‐
(Continued)
8-105
8
Maintenance
(Continued)
zle, ECE regulation demand several
technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet,
down aiming). This headlamps are
designed not to dazzle opposite driv‐
ers. So, you need not change your
headlamps in a country with oppo‐
site traffic direction.
Light bulb position (Front)
OYB077038B
Head lamp - Type A
OYB077090B
Head lamp - Type B
OYB077040B
Fog lamp
1. Headlamp (Low/High)
2. Front turn signal lamp
3. Position lamp / Day time running
lamp (Bulb type)
4. Position lamp / Day time running
lamp (LED type)
5. Static bending light
6. Fog lamp
Maintenance
8-106
Light bulb position (Rear)
OYB077043B
Rear combination lamp - Type A
OYB077091B
Rear combination lamp - Type B
OYB077092B
Back up lamp
OYB077093B
Rear fog lamp
OYB077045B
License plate lamp
OYB077046B
High mounted stop lamp
1. Tail lamp (Bulb type)
2. Stop and tail lamp (Bulb type)
3. Rear turn signal lamp (Bulb type)
4. Tail lamp (LED type)
5. Tail lamp (LED type)
6. Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
8-107
8
Maintenance
7. Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
8. Back up lamp
9. Rear fog lamp
10. License plate lamp
11. High mounted stop lamp
Light bulb position (Side)
■ Type A
■ Type B
1. Side repeater lamp (LED type)
2. Side repeater lamp (bulb type)
Side repeater lamp (LED type)
bulb Replacement
If the side repeater lamp (LED) (1) does
not operate, have your vehicle checked
by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated
unit. The LED lamps has to be replaced
with the unit.
A skilled technician should check or re‐
pair side repeater lamp (LED), for it
may damage related parts of the vehi‐
cle.
Maintenance
8-108
Side repeater lamp (bulb type)
bulb Replacement
1. Remove the lamp assembly from
the vehicle by prying the lens and
pulling the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical con‐
nector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens
parts by turning the socket coun‐
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots on the
lens part.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Reassemble the socket and the
lens part.
7. Connect the bulb electrical connec‐
tor.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Headlamp (Low/High beam) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type A)
OYB077052B
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp as‐
sembly.
5. Install a new bulb-socket assembly
in the headlamp assembly by align‐
ing the tabs on the bulb-socket
with the slots in the headlamp as‐
sembly. Push the bulb-socket into
the headlamp assembly and turn
the bulb-socket clockwise.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlamp bulb
8-109
8
Maintenance
WARNING
n
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact
with liquids. Never touch the glass
with bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit.
A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang‐
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type A)
OYB077051B
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp as‐
sembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb-
socket by pressing it in and rotat‐
ing it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the slots
in the bulb-socket. Pull the bulb out
of the bulb-socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-sock‐
et into the headlamp assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
Position lamp / Day time
running lamp bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type A)
OYB077094B
1. Open the hood.
Maintenance
8-110
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp as‐
sembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb-
socket by pressing it in and rotat‐
ing it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the slots
in the bulb-socket. Pull the bulb out
of the bulb-socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-sock‐
et into the headlamp assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
Headlamp (Low/High beam) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type B)
OYB077095B
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp as‐
sembly.
5. Install a new bulb-socket assembly
in the headlamp assembly by align‐
ing the tabs on the bulb-socket
with the slots in the headlamp as‐
sembly. Push the bulb-socket into
the headlamp assembly and turn
the bulb-socket clockwise.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlamp bulb
8-111
8
Maintenance
WARNING
n
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact
with liquids. Never touch the glass
with bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit.
A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang‐
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type B)
OYB077096B
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp as‐
sembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb-
socket by pressing it in and rotat‐
ing it counterclockwise until the
tabs on the bulb align with the slots
in the bulb-socket. Pull the bulb out
of the bulb-socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the bulb-socket and rotating it
until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp
assembly by aligning the tabs on
the bulb-socket with the slots in
the assembly. Push the bulb-sock‐
et into the headlamp assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
Static bending light replacement
(Headlamp Type B)
OYB077097B
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
Maintenance
8-112
3. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the
bulb-socket counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb-socket align
with the slots on the headlamp as‐
sembly.
4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket
by pulling it out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the bulb-socket.
6. Install the bulb-socket in the head‐
lamp assembly by aligning the tabs
on the bulb-socket with the slots in
the headlamp assembly. Push the
bulb-socket into the headlamp as‐
sembly and turn the bulb-socket
clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Position lamp / Day time
running lamp (LED type)
replacement (Headlamp Type B)
OYB077098B
If the position lamp + DRL (LED) (1)
does not operate, have your vehicle
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated
unit. The LED lamps has to be replaced
with the unit.
A skilled technician should check or re‐
pair the position lamp + DRL (LED), for
it may damage related parts of the ve‐
hicle.
Front fog lamp bulb
replacement
OYB077057B
If the front fog lamp (1) does not oper‐
ate, have your vehicle checked by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
8-113
8
Maintenance
Rear turn signal lamp bulb
replacement
OYB077060B
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriv‐
er.
OYB077061B
3. Remove the rear combination lamp
assembly from the body of the ve‐
hicle.
4. Disconnect the rear combination
lamp connector.
OYB077099B
5. Remove the socket from the as‐
sembly by turning the socket coun‐
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots on the
assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Install the rear combination lamp
assembly to the body of the vehi‐
cle.
Maintenance
8-114
Stop and tail lamp bulb
replacement
OYB077060B
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriv‐
er.
OYB077061B
3. Remove the rear combination lamp
assembly from the body of the ve‐
hicle.
4. Disconnect the rear combination
lamp connector.
OYB077100B
5. Remove the socket from the as‐
sembly by turning the socket coun‐
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots on the
assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Install the rear combination lamp
assembly to the body of the vehi‐
cle.
8-115
8
Maintenance
Tail lamp (inside) bulb
replacement
OYB077065B
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover.
OYB077101B
3. Remove the socket from the as‐
sembly by turning the socket coun‐
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots on the
assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket
by pulling it out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the bulb-socket.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
bulb replacement
OYB077064B
If the stop and tail lamp (LED) (1,2,3,4)
does not operate, have your vehicle
checked by a professional workshop.
Kia recommends to visit an authorized
Kia dealer/service partner.
The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated
unit. The LED lamps has to be replaced
with the unit.
A skilled technician should check or re‐
pair the stop and tail lamp (LED), for it
may damage related parts of the vehi‐
cle.
Maintenance
8-116
Back up lamp bulb replacement
OYB077103B
If the back up lamp (1) does not oper‐
ate, have your vehicle checked by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Rear fog lamp bulb replacement
OYB077102B
If the rear fog lamp (1) does not oper‐
ate, have your vehicle checked by a
professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
High mounted stop lamp bulb
replacement
OYB077104B
If the high mounted stop lamp (1) does
not operate, have your vehicle checked
by a professional workshop. Kia recom‐
mends to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
8-117
8
Maintenance
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
OYB077069B
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen‐
tly pry the lens cover from lamp
housing.
2. Remove the socket from the as‐
sembly by turning the socket coun‐
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots on the
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket
by pulling it out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in‐
to the bulb-socket.
5. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
Map lamp bulb replacement
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the OFF button
is depressed to avoid burning your
fingers or receiving an electric shock.
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen‐
tly pry the lens cover from lamp
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous‐
ings.
Maintenance
8-118
Vanity mirror lamp bulb
replacement
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the OFF button
is depressed to avoid burning your
fingers or receiving an electric shock.
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen‐
tly pry the lamp assembly from in‐
terior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interi‐
or.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous‐
ings.
Room lamp bulb replacement
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the OFF button
is depressed to avoid burning your
fingers or receiving an electric shock.
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen‐
tly pry the lens cover from lamp
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous‐
ings.
8-119
8
Maintenance
Glove box lamp bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen‐
tly pry the lamp assembly from in‐
terior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Install the lamp assembly to interi‐
or.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous‐
ings.
Tailgate room lamp bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen‐
tly pry the lens cover from lamp
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous‐
ings.
NOTICE
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have your vehicle checked by a pro‐
fessional workshop. Kia recommends
to visit an authorized Kia dealer/
service partner.
Maintenance
8-120
Headlamp and front fog lamp
aiming (for Europe)
Headlamp aiming
■ Type A
■ Type B
1. Inflate the tires to the specified
pressure and remove any loads
from the vehicle except the driver,
spare tire, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a
flat floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines
passing through respective head
lamp centers) and a horizontal line
(Horizontal line passing through
center of head lamps) on the
screen.
4. With the head lamp and battery in
normal condition, aim the head
lamps so the brightest portion falls
on the horizontal and vertical lines.
5. To aim the low and high beams left
or right, turn the driver (1) clock‐
wise or counterclockwise. To aim
the low and high beams up or
down, turn the driver (2) clockwise
or counterclockwise.
Front fog lamp aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as the
same manner of the head lamps aim‐
ing.
With the front fog lamps and battery
normal condition, aim the front fog
lamps.
To aim the front fog lamp up or down,
turn the driver clockwise or counter‐
clockwise.
8-121
8
Maintenance
Aiming point
OYB077077B
* A : Screen
Maintenance
8-122
Type A
Vehicle condition (If
equipped 185/65R15
tire)
Head lamp (MFR type) Head lamp (BI-FUNCTION type)
Ground Height Distance between
lamps
Ground Height Distance between
lamps
Low/High beam Low/High beam Low/High beam Low/High beam
H1 W1 H1' W1'
Without driver
757 (29.8) 1,259 (49.6) 760 (29.9) 1,250 (49.2)
[mm (in)]
With driver
747 (29.4) 1,259 (49.6) 750 (29.5) 1,250 (49.2)
[mm (in)]
Type B
Vehicle condition (If
equipped 205/55R17
tire)
Head lamp (MFR type) Head lamp (BI-FUNCTION type)
Ground Height Distance between
lamps
Ground Height Distance between
lamps
Low/High beam Low/High beam Low/High beam Low/High beam
H1 W1 H1' W1'
Without driver
775 (30.5) 1,259 (49.6) 778 (30.6) 1,250 (49.2)
[mm (in)]
With driver
765 (30.1) 1,259 (49.6)) 768 (30.2) 1,250 (49.2)
[mm (in)]
8-123
8
Maintenance
Type C
Vehicle condition (If equipped 185/65R15
tire)
Front Fog lamp (Bulb type)
Ground Height Distance between lamps
H3 W3
Without driver
493 (19.4) 1,431 (56.3)
[mm (in)]
With driver
483 (19.0) 1,431 (56.3)
[mm(in)]
Type D
Vehicle condition (If equipped 205/55R17
tire)
Front Fog lamp (Bulb type)
Ground Height Distance between lamps
H3 W3
Without driver
511 (20.1) 1,431 (56.3)
[mm(in)]
With driver
501 (19.7) 1,431 (56.3)
[mm(in)]
Maintenance
8-124
■ Based on 10m screen
A : Vehicle axis
B : Vertical line of the left head lamp bulb center
C : Vertical line of the right head lamp bulb center
D : Horizontal line of head lamp bulb center
E : Ground
F : Cut-Off line
Head lamp low beam (LHD Vehicle)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
8-125
8
Maintenance
■ Based on 10m screen
A : Vehicle axis
B : Vertical line of the left head lamp bulb center
C : Vertical line of the right head lamp bulb center
D : Horizontal line of head lamp bulb center
E : Ground
F : Cut-Off line
Head lamp low beam (RHD Vehicle)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
Maintenance
8-126
■ Based on 10m screen
A : Vehicle axis
B : Vertical line of the left fog lamp bulb center
C : Vertical line of the right fog lamp bulb center
D : Horizontal line of fog lamp bulb center
E : Ground
F : Cut-Off line
G : Upper limit
Front fog lamp
1. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
8-127
8
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least once
a month with lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate‐
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, in‐
dustrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor‐
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct sun‐
light or when the body of the vehi‐
cle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure wa‐
ter, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean with
chemical solvents or strong deter‐
gents.
WARNING
n
Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
(Continued)
(Continued)
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers,
make sure to maintain sufficient dis‐
tance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors or
its surrounding area directly with a
high pressure washer. Shock applied
from high pressure water may cause
the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be damaged
if they come into contact with high
pressure water.
Maintenance
8-128
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com‐
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail‐
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/
electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no lon‐
ger bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufactur‐
er’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to
protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip
the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-
wax these areas even if the rest of the
vehicle does not yet need waxing.
Do not apply wax on embossed unpain‐
ted unit, as it may tarnish the unit.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, acid detergents or strong
detergents containing high alkaline
or caustic agents on chrome-plat‐
ed or anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to the
protective coating and cause dis‐
coloration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major re‐
pair expense.
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and re‐
quires any metal repair or replace‐
ment, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preserva‐
tive and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
8-129
8
Maintenance
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these ma‐
terials are not removed, accelerated
rusting can occur on underbody parts
such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system, even though they
have been treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-
road driving and at the end of each
winter. Pay special attention to these
areas because it is difficult to see all
the mud and dirt. It will do more harm
than good to wet down the road grime
without removing it. The lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and frame
members have drain holes that should
not clog with dirt; trapped water in
these areas can cause rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
(Continued)
(Continued)
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol‐
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter‐
gent, and rinse thoroughly with wa‐
ter. Also, be sure to clean the wheels
after driving on salted roads. This
helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter‐
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro‐
sion, we produce vehicles of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of
the job. To achieve the long-term cor‐
rosion resistance your vehicle can deliv‐
er, the owner's cooperation and assis‐
tance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coat‐
ings by stones, gravel, abrasion or
minor scrapes and dents which leave
unprotected metal exposed to corro‐
sion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle
is regularly exposed to corrosive mate‐
rials, corrosion protection is particularly
important. Some of the common cau‐
ses of accelerated corrosion are road
salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air
and industrial pollution.
Maintenance
8-130
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to occur.
For example, corrosion is accelerated
by high humidity, particularly when
temperatures are just above freezing.
In such conditions, the corrosive mate‐
rial is kept in contact with the vehicle’s
surface by moisture that evaporate
slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it
dries slowly and holds moisture in con‐
tact with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis‐
persed.
For all these reasons, it is particularly
important to keep your vehicle clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to
the underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol‐
lowing:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your vehicle clean and free of cor‐
rosive materials. Attention to the un‐
derside of the vehicle is particularly im‐
portant.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take ex‐
tra care to prevent corrosion. In win‐
ter, hose off the underside of your
vehicle at least once a month and be
sure to clean the underside thor‐
oughly when winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the vehi‐
cle, give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just damp‐
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will accelerate
corrosion rather than prevent it. Wa‐
ter under high pressure and steam
are particularly effective in removing
accumulated mud and corrosive ma‐
terials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to acceler‐
ate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poor‐
ly ventilated garage. This creates a fa‐
vorable environment for corrosion. This
is particularly true if you wash your ve‐
hicle in the garage or drive it into the
garage when it is still wet or covered
with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated
garage can contribute to corrosion un‐
less it is well ventilated so moisture is
dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good
condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should
be covered with "touch-up" paint as
soon as possible to reduce the possibili‐
ty of corrosion. If bare metal is showing
through, the attention of a qualified
body and paint shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage pain‐
ted surfaces in just a few hours. Al‐
ways remove bird droppings as soon as
possible.
8-131
8
Maintenance
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro‐
sion. Check under the mats periodically
to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use
particular care if you carry fertilizers,
cleaning materials or chemicals in the
vehicle.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks
should be cleaned up, flushed with
clean water and thoroughly dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do con‐
tact the interior parts, wipe them off
immediately. If necessary, use a vinyle
cleaner, see instructions for correct us‐
age.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/elec‐
(Continued)
(Continued)
tronic components inside the vehicle
as this may damage them.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high al‐
cohol content solutions or acid/alka‐
line detergents, the color of the
leather may fade or the surface may
get stripped off.
Taking care of leather seats
• Vacuum the seat periodically to re‐
move dust and sand on the seat. It
will prevent abrasion or damage of
the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
• Sufficient use of a leather protective
may prevent abrasion of the cover
and helps maintain the color.
Be sure to read the instructions and
consult a specialist when using leath‐
er coating or protective agents.
• Leather with bright colors(beige,
cream beige) is easily contaminated
and clear in appearance. Clean the
seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
Cleaning the leather seats
• Remove all contaminations instantly.
Refer to instructions below for re‐
moval of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic products(sunscreen, foun‐
dation, etc.)
- Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated point.
Wipe off the cream with a wet
cloth and remove water with a dry
cloth.
• Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)
- Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contami‐
nations do not smear.
• Oil
- Remove oil instantly with absorba‐
ble cloth and wipe with stain re‐
mover for natural leather only.
• Chewing gum
- Harden the gum with ice and re‐
move gradually.
Maintenance
8-132
Fabric seat cover using precautions
(If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats regularly
with a vacuum cleaner in consideration
of fabric material characteristics. If
they are heavily soiled with beverage
stains, etc., use a suitable interior
cleaner. To prevent damage to seat
covers, wipe off the seat covers down
to the seams with a large wiping mo‐
tion and moderate pressure using a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth. Velcro
closures on clothing or sharp objects
may cause snagging or scratches on
the surface of the seats. Make sure not
to rub such objects against the surface.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl clean‐
er.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom‐
mended for upholstery or carpets. Re‐
move fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do
not receive immediate attention, the
fabric can be stained and its color can
be affected. Also, its fire-resistant
properties can be reduced if the mate‐
rial is not properly maintained.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-re‐
sistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for clean‐
ing upholstery or carpet. Follow the in‐
structions provided with the soap. Do
not bleach or re-dye the webbing be‐
cause this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the ve‐
hicle become fogged (that is, covered
with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they
should be cleaned with glass cleaner.
Follow the directions on the glass
cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window de‐
froster grid.
8-133
8
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty in‐
formation contained in the Warranty &
Maintenance book in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis‐
sion control system to meet all applica‐
ble emission regulations.
There are three emission control sys‐
tems, as follows.
1. Crankcase emission control system
2. Evaporative emission control sys‐
tem
3. Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, have
your vehicle inspected and maintained
by a professional workshop in accord‐
ance with the maintenance schedule in
this manual. Kia recommends to visit an
authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Caution for the Inspection and Mainte‐
nance Test (With Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring
during dynamometer testing, turn
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system off by pressing the ESC
switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com‐
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys‐
tem is employed to prevent air pollu‐
tion caused by blow-by gases being
emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air intake
hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air
mixes with blow-by gases, which then
pass through the PCV valve into the in‐
duction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control Sys‐
tem is designed to prevent fuel vapors
from escaping into the atmosphere.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the on‐
board canister. When the engine is run‐
ning, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid
valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con‐
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant tem‐
perature is low during idling, the PCSV
closes so that evaporated fuel is not
taken into the engine. After the engine
warms up during ordinary driving, the
PCSV opens to introduce evaporated
fuel to the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System
is a highly effective system which con‐
trols exhaust emissions while maintain‐
ing good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability
and may even violate governmental
safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifica‐
tion may not be covered under warran‐
ty.
Maintenance
8-134
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized elec‐
tronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if
you smell exhaust fumes of any kind
inside your vehicle, have it inspected
and repaired immediately. If you ever
suspect exhaust fumes are coming
into your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired immedi‐
ately.
WARNING
n
Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide (CO). Though colorless and
odorless, it is dangerous and could
be lethal if inhaled. Follow the in‐
structions on this page to avoid CO
poisoning.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to
draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi‐
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
WARNING
n
Fire
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi‐
cle. Do not park the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such as
grass, vegetation, paper, leaves,
etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the en‐
gine is running or immediately af‐
ter the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor‐
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle ac‐
cording to the Fuel requirements on
page 1-03.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction,
such as misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
8-135
8
Maintenance
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 mi‐
nutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control
system. All inspections and adjust‐
ments must be made by a professio‐
nal workshop. Kia recommends to
visit an authorized Kia dealer/service
center.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag‐
ing the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Diesel particulate filter (if
equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys‐
tem removes the soot in the exhaust
gas.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot ac‐
cording to the driving condition. In other
words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high
driving condition burns and removes
the accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at repeated short distance or
driven at low speed for a long time, the
accumulated soot may not be auto‐
matically removed because of low ex‐
haust gas temperature. More than a
certain amount of soot deposited, the
malfunction indicator light ( ) illumi‐
nates.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving
the vehicle at more than 60 km/h
(37 mph) or at more than second gear
with 1500 ~ 2500 engine rpm for a cer‐
tain time (for about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light ( )
continues to be blinked or the warning
massage "Check exhaust system" illu‐
minates in spite of the procedure, visit
a professional workshop and check the
DPF system. Kia recommends to visit
an authorized Kia dealer/service part‐
ner.
If you continue to drive with the mal‐
function indicator light blinking for a
long time, the DPF system can be dam‐
aged and fuel consumption can be wor‐
sen.
CAUTION
Diesel Fuel (if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regula‐
ted automotive diesel fuel for diesel
vehicle equipped with the DPF sys‐
tem.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be dam‐
aged and white smoke can be emit‐
ted.
Lean NOx trap (if equipped)
The Lean NOx Trap (LNT) system re‐
moves the nitrogen oxide in the ex‐
haust gas. The smell can occur in the
exhaust gas depending on the quality
of the fuel and it can degrade NOx re‐
duction performance, please use the
regulated automotive diesel fuel.
Maintenance
8-136
Engine..........................................................................................9-02
Dimensions................................................................................. 9-03
Bulb wattage..............................................................................9-04
Tires and wheels....................................................................... 9-06
Weight/Volume..........................................................................9-11
Air conditioning system........................................................... 9-12
Recommended lubricants and capacities..............................9-13
Recommended SAE viscosity number...............................9-15
Vehicle identification number (VIN)........................................9-17
Vehicle certification label ........................................................ 9-18
Tire specification and pressure label..................................... 9-19
Engine number.......................................................................... 9-20
Air conditioner compressor label............................................9-21
Refrigerant label ...................................................................... 9-22
Declaration of conformity....................................................... 9-23
Specifications & Consumer information
9
ENGINE
Item Gasoline 1.0 Gasoline 1.2 Gasoline 1.4 Diesel 1.4 Diesel 1.6
Displacement
998 (60.9) 1,248 (76.2) 1,368 (83.48) 1,396 (85.12) 1,582 (96.53)
[cc (cu.in)]
Bore x Stroke
71 x 84 (2.8 x
3.3)
71 x 78.8 (2.80
x 3.10)
72 x 84 (2.83 x
3.30)
75 x 79 (2.95 x
3.11)
77.2 x 84.5
(3.03 x 3.32)
[mm (in)]
Firing order 1-2-3 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 3 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line
Specifications & Consumer information
9-02
DIMENSIONS
Item mm (in)
Overall length 4,140 (162.9)
Overall width 1,760 (69.3)
Overall height
Without roof rack
1,485 (58.4) (15’’ tire)
1,505 (59.3) (17’’ tire)
With roof rack
1,500 (59.1) (15’’ tire)
1,520 (59.8) (17’’ tire)
Front tread
185/65R15 1,537 (60.5)
205/55R17 1,531 (60.2)
Rear tread
185/65R15 1,544 (60.8)
205/55R17 1,539 (60.6)
Wheelbase 2,580 (101.6)
9-03
9
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Head lamp
Low
Standard 55W H4LL
Option
*
60W 9005 HL+
High
Standard 55W H4LL
Option
*
60W 9005 HL+
Static bending light
*
55W H7LL
Daytime running light
*
21W or LED P21WLL or LED
Position lamp 55W or LED W5W LL or LED
Turn signal lamp 21W PY21W LL
Front fog lamp
*
51W HB4
Rear
Tail lamp
Inside 5W or LED W5W LL or LED
Outside 5W or LED P21/5W LL or LED
Stop lamp
Inside LED LED
Outside 21W or LED P21/5W LL or LED
Turn signal lamp 21W PY21W LL
Back up lamp 16W W16W
Rear fog light
*
21W or LED P21W LL or LED
High mounted stop lamp 5W X 4EA W5W LL
License plate lamp 5W X 2EA W5W LL
*
If equipped
Specifications & Consumer information
9-04
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Interior
Map lamps
*
10W X 2EA W10W
Room lamp 8W FESTON
Luggage lamp 8W FESTON
Glove box lamp 8W FESTON
Vanity mirror lamps
*
5W FESTON
*
If equipped
9-05
9
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
For Europe
Specifications & Consumer information
9-06
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed capacity
Inflation pressure [bar (psi, kPa)] Wheel
lug nut
torque
Kgf·m
(lbf·ft,
N·m)
Normal load Maximum load
LI
*1
Kg
SS
*2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
185/65R15 6.0J x 15 88 560 H 210
2.35 2.15 2.4 2.5
11 ~ 13
(79 ~ 94,
107 ~
127)
(34,
235)
(31,
215)
(35,
240)
(36,
250)
2.5 2.3 2.5 2.5
(36,
250)
(33,
230)
(36,
250)
(36,
250)
(F/C
Pack)
(F/C
Pack)
(F/C
Pack)
(F/C
Pack)
2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6
(38,
260)
(38,
260)
(38,
260)
(38,
260)
(Eco
pack)
(Eco
pack)
(Eco
pack)
(Eco
pack)
195/55R16 6.0J x 16 87 545 H 210
2.3 2.1 2.4 2.6
(34,
235)
(31,
215)
(35,
240)
(37,
260)
205/45R17 6.5J x 17 88 560 V 240
2.3 2.1 2.4 2.6
(34,
235)
(31,
215)
(35,
240)
(37,
260)
*1
Load Index
*2
Speed Symbol
9-07
9
Specifications & Consumer information
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed capacity
Inflation pressure [bar (psi, kPa)] Wheel
lug nut
torque
Kgf·m
(lbf·ft,
N·m)
Normal load Maximum load
LI
*1
Kg
SS
*2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire 205/55R17 6.5J x 17 95 690 V 240
2.35 2.1 2.4 2.6
11 ~ 13
(79 ~ 94,
107 ~
127)
(34,
235)
(31,
215)
(35,
240)
(37,
260)
Compact
spare tire
T125/80D15 3.5J x 15 95 690 M 130
4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
T125/80D16 4.0T x 16 97 730 M 130
4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
*1
Load Index
*2
Speed Symbol
Specifications & Consumer information
9-08
Except Europe
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed capacity
Inflation pressure [bar(psi, kPa)] Wheel
lug nut
torque
Kgf·m
(lbf·ft,
N·m)
Normal load Maximum load
LI
*1
Kg
SS
*2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
185/65R15 6.0J X 15 88 560 H 210
2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
11 ~ 13
79 ~ 94,
107 ~
127)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
195/55R16 6.0J X 16 87 545 H 210
2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
205/45R17 6.5J X 17 88 560 V 240
2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
(33,
230)
Compact
spare tire
T125/80D15 3.5J x 15 95 690 M 130
4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
(60,
420)
*1
Load Index
*2
Speed Symbol
9-09
9
Specifications & Consumer information
NOTICE
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles.
If not, that affects driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please check the
tire pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 1.5 psi/km
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
Specifications & Consumer information
9-10
WEIGHT/VOLUME
Item
Gasoline 1.0 Gasoline 1.2 Gasoline 1.4 Diesel 1.6
6MT 5M/T 6M/T 6M/T
Gross vehicle
weight
For Europe 1,640 (3,616) 1,600 (3,527) 1,610 (3,549) 1,700 (3,748)
kg (lbs.)
Luggage volume
For Europe
MIN 352 (12.4)
MAX 1,155 (40.8)
l
(cu ft)
9-11
9
Specifications & Consumer information
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
ITEM Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant 450 ± 25g R-1234yf
R-134a
Compressor lubricant 120 ± 10cc PAG 30
Please contact a professional workshop for more details.
Kia recommends to contact an authorized Kia dealer/service partner.
Specifications & Consumer information
9-12
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The cor‐
rect lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1
*2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Gasoline
Engine
1.0L
3.6
l
(3.8 US
qt.)
ACEA A5/B5
1.2L
3.5
l
(3.7 US
qt.)
API service SM, ILSAC GF4 or above, ACEA
A5/B5
*3
API SN, ACEA C2
*4
1.4L
3.6
l
(3.8 US
qt.)
API service SM, ILSAC GF4 or above, ACEA
A5/B5
*3
API SN, ACEA C2
*4
Diesel En‐
gine
1.4L /
1.6L
with
DPF
*5
5.3
l
(5.6 US
qt.)
ACEA C2 or C3
Without
DPF
*5
5.3
l
(5.6 US
qt.)
ACEA C3 or C2 or A3/B4
Manual transaxle fluid
Gasoline Engine
1.2L
1.5 ~ 1.6
l
(1.4 ~
1.5 US qt.)
API Service GL-4 SAE 70W
- HK SYN MTF 70W
- SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF
- GS MTF HD 70W
1.0L/
1.4L
1.6 ~ 1.7
l
(1.5 ~
1.6 US qt.)
Diesel Engine 1.4L
1.7 ~ 1.8
l
(1.6 ~
1.7 US qt.)
Automatic transaxle
fluid
Gasoline Engine 1.4L
6.8
l
(7.2 US
qt.)
ATF SP-III (Recommended DIAMOND, SK)
9-13
9
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
Gasoline
Engine
1.0L
5.5
l
(5.8 US
qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol
base coolant for aluminum radiator)
1.2L
5.1
l
(5.4 US
qt.)
1.4L
MT
5.1
l
(5.4 US
qt.)
AT
5.5
l
(5.8 US
qt.)
Diesel En‐
gine
1.4L/1.6L
6.4
l
(6.8 US
qt.)
Brake / clutch fluid
0.7 ~ 0.8
l
(0.7 ~
0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
45
l
(11.9 US
gal.)
-
*1
Refer to Recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 9-15.
*2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel
economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to
measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3
FOR INDIA, MIDDLE EAST, IRAN, LIBIA, ALGERIA, SUDAN, MOROCCO, TUNISIA, EGYPT, CENTRAL&SOUTH AMERICA
*4
EXCEPT INDIA, MIDDLE EAST, IRAN, LIBIA, ALGERIA, SUDAN, MOROCCO, TUNISIA, EGYPT, CENTRAL&SOUTH AMERICA
*5
Diesel Particulate Filter
Specifications & Consumer information
9-14
Recommended SAE viscosity number
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowabil‐
ity). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity en‐
gine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed
to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.
9-15
9
Specifications & Consumer information
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil
2
Diesel
Engine Oil
1.0L
1.2L
1.4L
: For EUROPE, AUSTRALIA, CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA, CHINA
For Fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 0W-20(API
SN, ACEA C2).However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
: For INDIA, MIDDLE EAST, IRAN, LIBIA, ALGERIA, SUDAN, MOROCCO, TUNISIA, EGYPT
For Fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-30(API
service SM, ILSAC GF4 or above, ACEA A5/B5).However, if the engine oil is not available in
your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
Specifications & Consumer information
9-16
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
■ Type A
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the number used in registering your
car and in all legal matters pertaining
to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor un‐
der the passenger seat. To check the
number, remove the cover (1).
VIN label
OBH088005NC
■ Type B (if equipped)
The VIN is also on a plate attached to
the top of the dashboard. The number
on the plate can easily be seen through
the windshield from outside.
9-17
9
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s)
side center pillar gives the vehicle iden‐
tification number (VIN).
Specifications & Consumer information
9-18
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best per‐
formance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres‐
sures recommended for your car.
9-19
9
Specifications & Consumer information
ENGINE NUMBER
■ Gasoline engine (1.0L)
■ Gasoline engine (1.2L)
■ Gasoline engine (1.4L)
OUB085006LB
Diesel engine (1.4L/1.6L)
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
Specifications & Consumer information
9-20
AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LABEL
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, supplier
part number, production number, re‐
frigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
9-21
9
Specifications & Consumer information
REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)
OSC087005
The refrigerant label is located on the
underside of the hood.
Specifications & Consumer information
9-22
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Example
CE0678B
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the man‐
ufacturer's declaration of conformity is
available on Kia web site as follows;
http://www.kia-hotline.com
9-23
9
Specifications & Consumer information
Ш (BULGARIAN VERSION)...............10-02
я .............................................................10-02
........................................................10-04
Vetrarakstur (ICELANDIC VERSION).....................................10-05
Akstur í snjó eða hálku.......................................................10-05
Uppsetninþ á keðjum..........................................................10-06
Appendix
10
(BULGARIAN VERSION)
я
я
.
,
,
-:
я. А ,
я я
.
В
я
я
Вя .
,
,
я
.
я ,
я. В
я. я
я
, В,
Вя .
.
-
я , я
я .
В
.
я
.
А я я
- ,
я
.
я ,
я я
я
я. , я
я
я
.
,
.
К
. К
.
n
‐
.
()
Appendix
10-02
()
‐
.
,
,
- я я
.
-,
я, я
я - я. Е
-
я, я.
я -
,
- ; я
я . А я
я,
12
.
Вя
-
я
я
я Вя .
В я
.
• ,
‐
.
‐
‐
.
‐
‐
, ‐
‐
. , ‐
S
(SAE).
()
10-03
10
Appendix
()
• ‐
- ‐
0,5
1 , ‐
.
,
.
•
,
(
)
. ( ‐
,
10 /.)
К ,
я -
. К -
. А ,
я
, . А
,
я
.
,
-
.
n
К ,
-
.
-
, -
.
,
-
- ‐
.
n
•
‐
.
•
- , ‐
, 30
/, - .
()
()
• К
, ,
,
.
• ‐
- ,
.
• ‐
, ‐
, ‐
, , ‐
.
• ‐
- ,
.
Appendix
10-04
VETRARAKSTUR (ICELANDIC VERSION)
Akstur í unþri ýærð oþ vetrarveðri
leiðir til aukins slits á ökutækinu oþ ska‐
par mis vandamál. Hæþt er að draþa
úr erýiðleikum sem ýylþja vetrarakstri
eý ýarið er að essum ráðleþþinþum:
Akstur í snjó eða hálku
Við akstur í djúpum snjó kann að vera
nauðsynleþt að nota vetrarhjólbarða
eða setja keðjur á hjólbarðana. Reynist
nauðsynleþt að nota vetrarhjólbarða
arý að velja hjólbarða aý sömu stærð
oþ þerð oþ venjuleþu hjólbarðarnir. Sé
að ekki þert þetur að dreþið úr öryþþi
oþ skert aksturseiþinleika ökutækisins.
Hraðakstur, skyndileþ hröðun, nauð‐
hemlun oþ krappar beyþjur þeta enn
ýremur ýalið í sér mikla hættu.
Þeþar dreþið er úr hraða er ráðleþt að
beita vélarhemlun sem kostur er.
Við nauðhemlun á snævi öktum eða
hálum veþum þetur ökutækið hæþleþa
runnið til. Nauðsynleþt er að halda hæý‐
ileþri ýjarlæþð á milli íns ökutækis oþ
ökutækisins ýyrir ýraman. Alltaý ætti að
beita hemlinum mjúkleþa. Haýa ber í
huþa að eý keðjur eru settar á hjólbarða
ýæst aukinn driýkraýtur en að hindrar
ó ekki að ökutækið renni til hliðanna.
TILKYNNING
Notkun snjókeðja er ólöþleþ í sumum
ríkjum. Kynnið ykkur þildandi lands‐
löþ áður en keðjur eru settar upp.
Vetrarhjólbarðar
Eý vetrarhjólbarðar eru settir á ökutæ‐
kið arý að þæta ess að nota veroýna
hjól- barða aý sömu stærð oþ ásunþa
oþ upprunaleþu hjólbarðarnir. Setjið ve‐
trarhjólbarða á öll ýjöþur hjólin til að
tryþþja öruþþa strinþu ökutækisins við
öll veðurskilyrði. Haýið í huþa að á
auðum veþi kunna vetrarhjólbarðar að
haýa minna þrip en hjólbarðarnir sem
ýylþdu ökutækinu. Því arý að aka aý
þætni, jaýnvel á auðum veþum.
Ráðýærið ykkur við söluaðila hjólbarðan‐
na um ráðlaþðan hámarkshraða.
VIÐVÖRUN
n
Stærðir vetrarhjólbarða
(ýramhald)
(ýramhald)
Vetrarhjólbarðar ættu að vera aý
sömu stærð oþ þerð oþ hjólbarðarnir
sem ýylþdu ökutækinu.
Misræmi á ví þetur dreþið úr öryþþi
oþ skert aksturseiþinleika ökutæki‐
sins.
Áður en neþldir hjólbarðar eru settir
upp er rétt að kynna sér reþluþerðir um
notkun slíkra hjólbarða í viðkomandi
landi, ýylki eða sveitarýélaþi.
10-05
10
Appendix
Keðjur á hjólbarða
Hliðar veroýinna hjólbarða eru ynnri
en á öðrum hjólbörðum oþ sumar þerðir
snjókeðja þeta ví valdið skemmdum á
eim. Því er ráðleþt að nota vetrarhjól‐
barða ýremur en keðjur, eý ess er kos‐
tur.
Setjið aldrei keðjur á hjólbarða ökutækja
sem búin eru álýelþum ar sem keðju‐
rnar þeta valdið skemmdum á ýelþu‐
num. Eý óhjákvæmileþt reynist að nota
keðjur skal nota vírkeðjur sem eru innan
við 12 mm á ykkt. Ábyrþðartryþþinþ
söluaðila ökutækisins tekur ekki til
skemmda sem orsakast aý ranþri not‐
kun snjókeðja. Snjókeðjur skal aðeins
setja á ýramhjólbarðana.
VARÚÐ
• Gætið ess að snjókeðjurnar séu aý
eirri stærð oþ þerð sem hæýir
hjólbörðunum. Notkun snjókeðja aý
ranþri þerð þetur valdið skemmd‐
um á yýirbyþþinþu oþ ýjöðrun öku‐
tækisins oþ kann að ýalla utan
ábyrþðartryþþinþar söluaðila öku‐
tækisins. Þá þeta ýestikrókar keðj‐
anna skemmst veþan núninþs við
íhluti ökutækisins oþ snjókeðjurnar
losnað aý hjólbarðanum. Gætið
ess að snjókeðjurnar séu með
SAE-vottun í S-ýlokki.
• Eýtir um að bil 0,5-1 km akstur
skal ævinleþa skoða keðjurnar aý‐
tur til að tryþþja að ær haýi verið
settar upp á réttan oþ öruþþan
hátt. Herðið keðjurnar eða setjið
ær aýtur á eý ær haýa losnað.
• Jaýnvel með viðeiþandi keðju upp‐
setta skal ekki taka ýulla beyþju
(snúa strinu til ýulls til annarrar
hliðar) eþar ökutækinu er ekið. (Eý
ú ert að taka ýulla beyþju skaltu
aka á hraða undir 10 km/klst.)
Uppsetninþ á keðjum
Þeþar keðjur eru settar á skal ýylþja
leiðbeininþum ýramleiðanda oþ herða
keðjurnar eins mikið oþ unnt er.
Þeþar keðjur haýa verið settar á skal
aka hæþt. Eý hljóð heyrist sem bendir til
að keðjurnar séu í snertinþu við yýir‐
byþþinþu eða undirvaþn er rétt að
nema staðar oþ herða keðjurnar. Eý
snertinþ virðist enn eiþa sér stað skal
hæþja aksturinn ar til hljóðið aþnar.
Takið keðjurnar niður um leið oþ komið
er á rudda oþ snjólausa veþi.
VIÐVÖRUN
n
Uppsetninþ á keðjum
Þeþar snjókeðjur eru settar upp skal
leþþja ökutækinu á sléttum ýleti
ýjarri umýerð. Kveikið á viðvörunar‐
ljósum ökutækisins oþ setjið ríhyrn‐
inþslaþa viðvörunarskilti upp ýyrir aý‐
tan ökutækið, eý að er tiltækt. Haý‐
ið ökutækið ævinleþa í stöðuhemli oþ
drepið á vélinni áður en snjókeðjur
eru settar upp.
Appendix
10-06
VIÐVÖRUN
n
Keðjur á hjólbarða
• Notkun keðja þetur skert aksturs-
eiþinleika ökutækisins.
• Akið ekki hraðar en 30 km/klst. eða
samkvæmt ráðlöþðum hámark‐
shraða ýramleiðanda keðjanna,
hvort sem reynist læþra.
• Akið þætileþa oþ sneiðið hjá úst‐
um, holum, kröppum beyþjum oþ
öðrum hættum á veþinum, sem
þætu valdið hristinþi ökutækisins.
• Forðist krappar beyþjur eða læsta
hemlun.
VARÚÐ
• Séu snjókeðjur aý ranþri stærð eða
ranþt upp settar þeta ær valdið
skemmdum á hemlalöþn, ýjöðrun,
yýirbyþþinþu oþ hjólum ökutæki‐
sins.
• Hvenær sem hljóð bendir til ess
að keðjurnar sláist við ökutækið
skal stöðva akstur oþ herða keð‐
jurnar.
10-07
10
Appendix
A
Air baþ-supplemental restraint system
Side air baþ.................................................................. 3-51
Air baþs.............................................................................3-38
Air baþ warninþ label................................................. 3-62
Air baþ warninþ liþht..................................................3-42
Curtain air baþ.............................................................3-53
Driver's and passenþer's ýront air baþ....................3-46
SRS components and ýunctions............................... 3-43
Air cleaner........................................................................ 8-58
Air conditioner compressor label..................................9-21
Air conditioninþ system................................................. 9-12
Alarm system.................................................................. 4-13
Antenna............................................................................ 5-02
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...................................... 6-34
Appearance care
Interior care...............................................................8-132
Ashtray...........................................................................4-126
Audio system
Antenna........................................................................5-02
Auomatic transaxle
Shiýt lock system........................................................6-27
Auto deýoþþinþ system...............................................4-120
Automatic climate control system............................4-108
Air conditioninþ.........................................................4-113
Automatic heatinþ and air conditioninþ............... 4-109
Manual heatinþ and air conditioninþ.....................4-110
Automatic transaxle.......................................................6-24
Sports mode................................................................ 6-25
B
Battery............................................................................. 8-63
Battery saver ýunction...................................................4-80
BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warninþ)
BCW (Blind-Spot Collision Warninþ) / LCA
(Lane Chanþe Assist)................................................ 6-71
Beýore drivinþ.................................................................. 6-04
Blind Sport Detection system
Rear cross traýýic alert.............................................. 6-73
Blind spot detection system......................................... 6-70
Bottle holder, see cup holders....................................4-127
Brake operation...............................................................6-55
Brake system.................................................................. 6-30
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).................................. 6-34
Parkinþ brake.............................................................. 6-31
Power brakes.............................................................. 6-30
Vehicle stability manaþement (VSM)......................6-39
Brake/Clutch ýluid........................................................... 8-43
Alphabetical index
I-1Alphabetical index
Bulb replacement..........................................................8-104
Bulb wattaþe................................................................... 9-04
Button start/stop: see "Enþine start/stop button".. 6-10
C
Camera (rear view).........................................................4-79
Care
Exterior care..............................................................8-128
Interior care...............................................................8-132
Tire care....................................................................... 8-67
Center console storaþe................................................4-122
Certiýication label............................................................9-18
Chains
Tire chains....................................................................6-83
Checkinþ tire inýlation pressure....................................8-68
Child restraint system................................................... 3-26
Installinþ a Child Restraint System (CRS)...............3-28
ISOFIX anchoraþe and top-tether anchoraþe
(ISOFIX anchoraþe system) ýor children................3-29
Selectinþ a Child Restraint System (CRS)...............3-26
Child-protector rear door lock......................................4-19
Ciþarette liþhter............................................................4-126
Climate control (manual)............................................... 4-99
Climate control air ýilter........................4-106,4-116,8-59
Climate control system (automatic)......................... 4-108
Clothes hanþer.............................................................. 4-132
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster..........4-45
Compact spare tire replacement..................................8-72
Coolant..............................................................................8-48
Coolinþ ýluid: see "Enþine coolant"............................... 8-48
Crankcase emission control system..........................8-134
Cruise control system.................................................... 6-43
Cup holder......................................................................4-127
Curtain air baþ.................................................................3-53
D
Dashboard illumination: see "Instrument panel
illumination".................................................................... 4-46
Dashboard, see instrument cluster............................. 4-45
Declaration oý conýormity............................................. 9-23
Deýoþþinþ (Windshield)................................................4-118
Deýoþþinþ loþic (Windshield).......................................4-119
Deýroster (rear window)................................................4-98
Deýrostinþ (Windshield)...............................................4-118
Diesel particulate ýilter................................................ 8-136
Dimensions.......................................................................9-03
Alphabetical index
I-2 Alphabetical index
Display illumination: see "Instrument panel illu‐
mination"......................................................................... 4-46
Displays, see instrument cluster..................................4-45
Door locks.........................................................................4-16
Child-protector rear door lock..................................4-19
DPF..................................................................................8-136
Drinks holder, see cup holders....................................4-127
Driver's and passenþer's ýront air baþ........................ 3-46
Drivinþ at niþht................................................................6-79
Drivinþ in ýlooded areas................................................. 6-80
Drivinþ in the rain............................................................6-80
E
Economical operation.....................................................6-76
Electric power steerinþ..................................................4-37
Electrochromic mirror (ECM)........................................ 4-42
Electronic stability control (ESC)..................................6-36
Emerþency startinþ........................................................7-05
Jump startinþ.............................................................. 7-05
Push-startinþ..............................................................7-06
Emission control system.............................................8-134
Crankcase emission control system..................... 8-134
Evaporative emission control system.................. 8-134
Exhaust emission control system......................... 8-134
Enþine compartment..................................................... 2-06
Enþine coolant................................................................. 8-48
Enþine dimensions.......................................................... 9-02
Enþine number................................................................ 9-20
Enþine oil (Gasoline)....................................................... 8-44
Enþine overheats............................................................ 7-07
Enþine start/stop button.............................................. 6-10
Startinþ the enþine.................................................... 6-07
Enþine temperature þauþe........................................... 4-49
Enþine will not start....................................................... 7-04
Evaporative emission control system.......................8-134
Exhaust emission control system............................. 8-134
Explanation oý scheduled maintenance items...........8-41
Vapor hose (ýor þasoline enþine) and ýuel
ýiller cap.......................................................................8-42
Exterior care..................................................................8-128
Exterior ýeatures..........................................................4-133
Rooý rack....................................................................4-133
Exterior overview (Front).............................................. 2-02
Exterior overview (Rear)................................................2-02
F
Flat tire............................................................................. 7-20
Alphabetical index
I-3Alphabetical index
Jack and tools..............................................................7-12
Tire mobility kit...........................................................7-20
Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................4-131
Fluid
Automatic transaxle ýluid..........................................8-53
Washer ýluid.................................................................8-55
Foldinþ the rear seat......................................................3-10
Front seat adjustment...................................................3-05
Fuel ýiller lid......................................................................4-30
Fuel ýilter..........................................................................8-57
Fuel þauþe........................................................................4-50
Fuel requirements...........................................................1-03
Fuses.................................................................................8-77
Fuse/relay panel description.......................... 8-82,8-83
Instrument panel ýuse............................................... 8-79
Multi ýuse..................................................................... 8-81
G
Gauþes
Enþine temperature þauþe.......................................4-49
Fuel þauþe....................................................................4-50
Glove box........................................................................4-122
H
Hazardous drivinþ conditions........................................6-78
Headliþht bulb replacement........................................8-104
Headrest (ýront)..............................................................3-06
Headrest (rear)................................................................3-09
Heated steerinþ whee....................................................4-39
Hiþhway drivinþ...............................................................6-81
Hood.................................................................................. 4-28
Horn...................................................................................4-39
How to use this manual.................................................1-02
I
Immobilizer system........................................................4-05
In case oý an emerþency while drivinþ........................7-03
Inside rearview mirror....................................................4-41
Instrument cluster..........................................................4-45
Enþine temperature þauþe.......................................4-49
Fuel þauþe....................................................................4-50
Instrument cluster control........................................4-46
LCD window control....................................................4-47
Speedometer...............................................................4-48
Tachometer................................................................. 4-49
Instrument panel ýuse................................................... 8-79
Alphabetical index
I-4 Alphabetical index
Instrument panel overview........................................... 2-05
Interior care...................................................................8-132
Interior ýeatures........................................................... 4-126
Ashtray...................................................................... 4-126
Ciþarette liþhter....................................................... 4-126
Clothes hanþer..........................................................4-132
Cup holder..................................................................4-127
Floor mat anchor(s)................................................. 4-131
Power outlet............................................................. 4-129
Seat warmer............................................................. 4-128
Shoppinþ baþ holder................................................ 4-131
Sunvisor..................................................................... 4-128
USB charþer...............................................................4-130
Interior liþht..................................................................... 4-95
Map lamp......................................................................4-95
Interior overview.............................................................2-04
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system...................................... 6-16
ISOFIX system................................................................. 3-29
J
Jack and tools.................................................................. 7-12
Jump startinþ.................................................................. 7-05
K
Key positions................................................................... 6-06
Keys...................................................................................4-04
Immobilizer system....................................................4-05
L
Label
Air baþ warninþ label................................................. 3-62
Tire sidewall labelinþ..................................................8-72
Tire speciýication and pressure label.......................9-19
Vehicle certiýication label.......................................... 9-18
Lane departure warninþ system (Lane Depar‐
ture Warninþ (LDW) System).......................................6-62
Lap belt.............................................................................3-19
Lap/shoulder belt............................................................3-16
LCD window control........................................................4-47
Liþht bulbs..................................................................... 8-104
Liþhtinþ.............................................................................4-80
Battery saver ýunction.............................................. 4-80
M
Maintenance schedule....................................................8-11
Alphabetical index
I-5Alphabetical index
Maintenance services.....................................................8-07
Maintenance
Explanation oý scheduled maintenance items.......8-41
Maintenance services................................................ 8-07
Owner maintenance...................................................8-09
Scheduled maintenance service...............................8-11
Tire maintenance........................................................8-72
Manual climate control system....................................4-99
Air conditioninþ.........................................................4-104
Climate control air ýilter..........................................4-106
Heatinþ and air conditioninþ...................................4-100
Manual transaxle.............................................................6-20
Manual windows..............................................................4-27
Map lamp..........................................................................4-95
Mirror
Day/niþht rearview mirror........................................4-41
Foldinþ the outside rearview mirror........................4-44
Outside rearview mirror............................................4-42
Remote control........................................................... 4-43
Mirrors.............................................................................. 4-41
Electrochromic mirror (ECM).................................... 4-42
Inside rearview mirror............................................... 4-41
Multi ýuse......................................................................... 8-81
O
Odometer......................................................................... 4-51
Oil (Enþine)....................................................................... 8-44
Outside rearview mirror................................................ 4-42
Outside temperature þauþe..........................................4-51
Overheats.........................................................................7-07
Owner maintenance....................................................... 8-09
P
Parkinþ brake...................................................................6-31
Parkinþ brake (check).....................................................8-56
Power brakes...................................................................6-30
Power outlet..................................................................4-129
Power window lock button............................................4-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt................................................. 3-20
Push-startinþ.................................................................. 7-06
R
Rear parkinþ assist system.......................................... 4-76
Rear seat..........................................................................3-02
Rearview camera............................................................ 4-79
Alphabetical index
I-6 Alphabetical index
Recommended cold tire inýlation pressures...............8-67
Recommended lubricants and capacities................... 9-13
Recommended SAE viscosity number.....................9-15
Reýriþerant label............................................................. 9-22
Remote keyless entry....................................................4-07
Replacement liþht bulb................................................8-104
Road warninþ...................................................................7-02
Rockinþ the vehicle......................................................... 6-78
S
Scheduled maintenance service................................... 8-11
Seat belts......................................................................... 3-13
Lap belt.........................................................................3-19
Lap/shoulder belt........................................................3-16
Pre-tensioner seat belt.............................................3-20
Stowinþ the rear seat belt........................................3-20
Seat warmer..................................................................4-128
Seats................................................................................. 3-02
Foldinþ the rear seat..................................................3-10
Front seat adjustment.............................................. 3-05
Headrest (ýront)..........................................................3-06
Headrest (rear)........................................................... 3-09
Rear seat......................................................................3-02
Shiýt lock system............................................................ 6-27
Shoppinþ baþ holder.....................................................4-131
Smart key...............................................................4-04,4-10
Smooth cornerinþ........................................................... 6-79
Snow tires........................................................................ 6-82
Spare tire
Compact spare tire replacement............................. 8-72
Special drivinþ conditions...............................................6-78
Drivinþ at niþht........................................................... 6-79
Drivinþ in ýlooded areas.............................................6-80
Drivinþ in the rain....................................................... 6-80
Hazardous drivinþ conditions................................... 6-78
Hiþhway drivinþ.......................................................... 6-81
Rockinþ the vehicle.....................................................6-78
Smooth cornerinþ.......................................................6-79
Speed limit control system........................................... 6-50
Speedometer................................................................... 4-48
Sports mode.................................................................... 6-25
SRS components and ýunctions....................................3-43
Startinþ diýýiculties, see the enþine will not start.... 7-04
Startinþ the enþine - with a smart key......................6-07
Startinþ the enþine - with an iþnition key................. 6-12
Steerinþ wheel.................................................................4-37
Electric power steerinþ..............................................4-37
Heated steerinþ whee............................................... 4-39
Horn.............................................................................. 4-39
Alphabetical index
I-7Alphabetical index
Tilt and telescopic steerinþ.......................................4-38
Storaþe compartments............................................... 4-122
Center console storaþe........................................... 4-122
Glove box................................................................... 4-122
Stowinþ the rear seat belt............................................ 3-20
Sunrooý............................................................................. 4-33
Sunvisor..........................................................................4-128
T
Tachometer......................................................................4-49
Tailþate.............................................................................4-21
Theýt-alarm system...................................................... 4-13
Tilt and telescopic steerinþ........................................... 4-38
Tire chains........................................................................6-83
Tire mobility kit...............................................................7-20
Tire pressure monitorinþ system (TPMS).................. 7-08
Tire speciýication and pressure label........................... 9-19
Tires and wheels................................................... 8-67,9-06
Checkinþ tire inýlation pressure............................... 8-68
Compact spare tire replacement............................. 8-72
Low aspect ratio tire..................................................8-75
Recommended cold tire inýlation pressures.......... 8-67
Tire care....................................................................... 8-67
Tire maintenance........................................................8-72
Tire replacement........................................................ 8-70
Tire rotation................................................................ 8-69
Tire sidewall labelinþ..................................................8-72
Tire traction.................................................................8-72
Wheel aliþnment and tire balance........................... 8-70
Wheel replacement.................................................... 8-72
TMK, see tire mobility kit.............................................. 7-20
Towinþ...............................................................................7-26
TPMS.................................................................................7-08
Trailer towinþ.................................................................. 6-86
Transaxle - Manual transaxle.......................................6-20
Transaxle
Automatic transaxle.................................................. 6-24
U
USB charþer...................................................................4-130
Usinþ the tire mobility kit..............................................7-23
V
Vehicle break-in process................................................1-06
Vehicle certiýication label...............................................9-18
Vehicle identiýication number....................................... 9-17
Vehicle stability manaþement (VSM).......................... 6-39
Alphabetical index
I-8 Alphabetical index
Vehicle weiþht..................................................................6-94
W
Washer ýluid.....................................................................8-55
Weiþht/Volume................................................................9-11
Wheel aliþnment and tire balance................................8-70
Wheel replacement.........................................................8-72
Windows........................................................................... 4-23
Auto up/down window...............................................4-25
Manual windows......................................................... 4-27
Power window lock button....................................... 4-26
Windshield deýrostinþ and deýoþþinþ....................... 4-118
Auto deýoþþinþ system...........................................4-120
Deýoþþinþ loþic (Windshield).................................. 4-119
Winter drivinþ
Snow tires....................................................................6-82
Tire chains....................................................................6-83
Wiper blades.................................................................... 8-60
Wipers and washers....................................................... 4-90
Alphabetical index
I-9Alphabetical index
